Home

BreezeMAX BST, Ver.4.0.2 TDD - System Manual

1. DB 15 pin Male Micro 15 pin Female Name Description GPS Adapter NPU 1 1 IN SENSE GPs Adapter Presence Indication 2 2 EXT 16M IN External 16MHz clock from GPS 10 10 EXT 16M IN Adapter LVDS twisted pair Not Used 3 3 NC Not Used 4 4 1PPS IN 1PPS signal from GPS Adapter LVDS 11 11 1PPS IN twisted pair 5 5 GPS TX Transmit communication channel from 13 13 GPS TX GPS RS422 twisted pair 6 6 GPS RX Receive communication channel to 44 14 GPS RX GPS RS422 twisted pair 7 7 NC Not Used 8 8 GND Ground 9 9 GND Ground 12 12 NC Not Used 15 15 12V 12 VDC to GPS Shell Shell Shield 9 1 5 e H LSN 5 8 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 65 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 4 5 GPS Adapter to Outdoor GPS Receiver Cable Table 2 19 GPS Adapter to Outdoor GPS Receiver Cable Pin Out 12 pin Bayonet RJ 45 Name Wire Color Description GPS Receiver GPS Adapter 1 2 Power 12 VDC Orange Twisted pair 9 1 Ground Orange White 2 5 Receive Blue RS422 twisted pair 3 6 Receive Blue White 4 4 Transmit Brown RS422 twisted pair 5 3 Transmit Brown White 11 8 1PPS Green White RS422 twisted pair 12 7 1PPS Green NC Case Shield AY arr fo So o 0 Qo A 66 Installation Chapter 3 Commissioning In This Chapter E Configuring Basic Paramet
2. Name Connector Functionality IDU 1 4 4 x TNC jacks Connection to ODU connectors of AU IDUs ODU 1 4 4 x TNC jacks Connections to IF connectors of AU ODU HP units 48V 3 pin D Type power jack Connection to DC power source GND Grounding Screw Connection to ground earth 58 Installation Installing the ODU Power Feeder Table 2 15 ODU Power Feeder LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Input power indication E Off ODU Power Feeder is not powered E Green ODU Power Feeder power is OK ODU PWR 1 4 Output power indications E Off AU ODU HP is not connected E Red Power output problem short or overload E Green AU ODU HP is connected and powered 2 3 2 1 Preparing a Power Cable 2 3 0 A 2 5m DC power cable is supplied with each ODU Power Feeder module Additional DC cables can be ordered from Alvarion If necessary use the following instruction to prepare a DC cable To prepare the power cable 1 Usea cable capable of supporting a current of at least 10A Use a cable with 2 x 1OAWG or thicker wires for the power plus an additional 10AWG to 20AWG ground wire 2 The matching power connector to be used is Amphenol D type power P N 177TWA 3W3 SP3Y with high power socket contacts P N 17DM53744 1 3 Connect the cable to the power connector as follows Pin 1 RTN Red 10 AWG min wire Pin 2 48V Black 10 AWG min wire Pin 3 L Ground sh
3. BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 139 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 8 2 4 8 3 4 8 3 1 4 8 3 2 140 For more details on SW File Version and Operation refer to Section 4 8 5 2 3 Upgrading AU s SW To facilitate efficient upgrade of AU s SW two upgrade levels are available E AU level for upgrading a single AU described in Section 4 8 5 2 3 2 E Base Station level for upgrading all AUs in the Base Station as described in the following section SW Files in NPU Up to four AU SW files can be stored in the NPU Any of the available files can be loaded by the NPU to a selected AU When four AU files are stored in the NPU a new file cannot be added until at least one of the existing files is deleted A default SW File Name and Default Action can be defined These are the SW File and associated Action that will be used for a new AU after being installed as well as after each reset This feature simplifies the upgrade process by defining the SW File and Action for all AUs Two different pairs of Default SW File Name and Default Action may be defined to optionally support AUs using either Standard Operation Mode or Advanced Si Advanced Self Install Operation Mode These Default SW File Name and Default Action are applicable to all AUs in the Base Station using the specified Operation Mode However they are not applicable for any AU whose Configured SW File Name see Section 4 8 1 is other th
4. BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 147 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration x 4 8 5 3 1 3 148 The default is Disable NOTE In the current release ARQ should not be enabled Maximum Cell Radius The Maximum Cell Radius is used to adapt various timing parameters of the MAC to the time it takes a message to reach its destination This time delay is dependent upon the distance between the originating and receiving units The timing parameters should be adapted to the largest expected delay which is determined from the distance from the AU of the farthest SU served by it NOTE For Non Line Of Sight NLOS links using refractions the cell distance should be higher than the line of sight distance Typically a 10 margin is a good estimate for the increase in distance due to the NLOS operation The basic time element symbol used by a system operating in TDD mode is 68 microseconds for a bandwidth of 3 5 MHz and 50 microseconds for a bandwidth of 5 MHz This symbol size is translated to a round trip delay of approximately 20 km for 3 5 MHz bandwidth and 15 km for 5 MHz bandwidth or a cell radius of 10 km or 7 5 km respectively NOTE An SU located at a distance larger than the Maximum Cell Radius will be rejected during the network entry process The values range for the Maximum Cell Distance is from 10 to 50 km for a bandwidth of 3 5 MHz and 7 to 45 km for a bandwidth of 5 MHz representing a maximum d
5. An SU that can communicate with more than one AU may become associated with the first AU it finds not necessarily the best choice in terms of quality of communication Changes in Base Station deployment and subscriber density can accumulate to create substantial changes in SU performance The quest for load sharing together with the desire to create best throughput conditions for the SU created the need for the Best BST AU feature to enable an SU to connect to the best AU in its neighborhood When the Best BST AU feature is enabled the SU scans all AUs in a predefined range in all frequencies according to the frequencies defined in the Frequency Scanning menu as described in Section 4 9 7 3 11 2 and in all available antennas according to the local definition in the SU as indicated by the Antenna Selection parameter in the Show menu of the SU Each of the AUs with which the SU can communicate perform initial phase of network entry is given a quality mark based on the quality of the signal at which it is received by the SU for each of the relevant antennas At the end of the scanning period the SU reaches a Best BST AU decision according to the information gathered The AU with the highest quality mark is selected as the Best BST AU and the SU will immediately try to associate with it using the relevant frequency and antenna The range used for scanning is defined by the BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask parameters of the SU The initial
6. Show All Select this option to see the current details of all entities in the applicable submenu Subscribers Services etc Show by This option enables selecting an entity by a specific identifier such as Name or MAC Address Select this option and enter the appropriate parameter s value to access the menu for a selected entity This will enable you to choose from the following options HM Show Select this option to view the details of the selected entity E Update Select this option to edit the details of the selected entity HM Delete Select this option to remove the selected entity from the database Show List Select this option to view all defined entities in the applicable submenu sorted by the entity type ID Subscriber ID Service ID etc The entity ID is an identifier attached automatically to each new entity You can select a specific entity by its ID This will open the Selected Entity menu with the Show Update and Delete options described above Select Select this option to select an entity by its Name This will open the Selected Entity menu with the Show Update and Delete options described above Add Select this option to add a new entity to the database The Services Menu The Services menu includes the following options BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 193 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration General Subscribers Services Service Profile Forwarding Rules
7. 4 9 4 3 2 4 9 4 4 4 9 5 4 9 6 4 9 7 4 9 7 1 Action The operation to be performed with the Default SW File Advanced Si after network entry of an SU using Advanced Si Operation Mode None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main Refer to Section 4 9 7 2 4 2 2 for more details on these Actions Delete a File Select this option and enter the name of an existing SU SW file to delete it from the NPU Flash memory Select by Name Use this option to select an SU by name to access the SU menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected SU viewing its performance information or deleting it from the database Select by MAC Address Use this option to select an SU by its MAC address to access the SU menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected SU viewing its performance information or deleting it from the database SU Menu The SU menu enables managing and configuring the selected SU The SU menu includes the following options E Show E Unit Control E Configuration E Performance Monitoring E Show MAC Addresses Behind SU E Delete Show Select this option to view the current value selected option of applicable parameters In addition some general status information is displayed as follows BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 163 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E Equipment and Registration Parameters MAC A
8. Retry Interval sec The Retry Interval parameter defines the time in seconds to wait before retransmitting a RADIUS message if no response is received The range is 1 5 seconds The default value is 5 seconds Maximum Number of Retries The Maximum Number of Retries parameter defines the maximum number of retransmission attempts before a decision is taken to revert to another server if configured or give up The range is 0 5 retries The default value is 3 retries Keep Alive Timeout sec The NPU maintains a keep alive mechanism with all defined servers The Keep Alive Timeout defines the time in seconds to wait before reaching a decision that a certain server is no longer available The range is 60 180 seconds The default value is 60 seconds NOTE When the NPU sends keep alive message to the server it uses it s own default User Name and User Password These User Name and User Password must be configured in the users list the same list used for the SUs of the server otherwise the server will response with a reject message The default User Name of the NPU is KeepAliveUserNameAndPassword The default User Password of the NPU is KeepAliveUserNameAndPassword The default User Name and User Password of the NPU are not configurable Authentication The Authentication menu enables viewing the status and parameters of defined Authentication servers adding a new server up to a maximum of two or deleting a
9. The minimum distance between any two antenna in the same sector space diversity configuration is 1 3 meters E The ODU should be installed as close as possible to the antenna NOTE An H kit for installation of up to 4 ODUs and 4 antennas that serve a single sector is optionally available from Alvarion Refer to the detailed BreezeMAX TDD Base Station Installation amp Maintenance Manual for information on installing the H accessory IF Cables The AU ODU is connected to the AU IDU or to the ODU Power Feeder via an IF cable carrying both signals and power The maximum permitted attenuation of the IF cable at applicable frequencies its screening effectiveness and its maximum permitted DC resistance the sum of the DC resistance of the inner and outer conductors are provided in the following table Table 2 2 IF Cables Requirements Item Description Screening Effectiveness 90 dB minimum in the 10 300 MHz band IF cable Impedance 50 ohm Maximum IF cable Attenuation 10 dB 240 MHz 7 5 dB 140 MHz 8 dB 64 MHz Maximum IF cable DC Resistance 1 5 onm Maximum IF cable Return Loss 20 dB in the 10 300 MHz band 32 To comply with the required screening effectiveness requirement it is recommended to use double shielded cables The following table provides details on maximum length for some popular cables Installation Installing the AU ODU Table 2 3 Maximum IF Cable
10. 250 Introduction This section describes the method used for defining the pre configured Service Profiles for Generic 3rd party VoIP devices that do not use the DRAP protocol The same principles can be used for modifying the pre configured profiles or creating new ones for VoIP services that have different characteristics Priority Marking We distinguish between two types of Service Profiles for Generic VolP devices E Marking is not used This scenario is applicable when the VoIP device behind the SU does not support either DSCP or 802 1p marking to distinguish between different VoIP related traffic types or when such marking is not used for any reason The implication is that a single Continuous Grant connection should be used for all VoIP traffic E Marking is used This scenario is applicable when the VoIP device is capable of marking the different VoIP related traffic types The assumption is that 3 different priority marks are used One for RTP traffic the second for RTCP and VoIP Signaling and a third one for Data Device Management General Assumptions E Protocol Header 18 bytes for Ethernet L2 header including 4 bytes for VLAN plus 40 bytes of IP UDP RTP headers A total of 58 bytes E RTCP bandwidth RFC 3556 Session Description Protocol SDP Bandwidth Modifiers for RTP Control Protocol RTCP Bandwidth states that normally the amount of bandwidth allocated to RTCP in an RTP session is 5 of the session bandw
11. 288 bits 50 pps Note 288 bits 36 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call total packet size 752bits 50 pps 37 6 Kbps Since Fax BW is higher than Voice BW the Fax BW requirement mandates the CG connection s attributes This is true for all G 729 and G 723 codecs FAX RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 37 6 Kbps is 3 76 Kbps QoS Profiles CG QoS for RTP Traffic The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 37 6 Kbps equivalent to a Packet Size of 752 bits or 94 bytes Thus the CG 38 QoS Profile parameters are E Packet Size 117 bytes E Sample Interval 20 msec RT QoS for RTCP and VoIP Signaling The required bandwidth is 5 76 Kbps 3 76 Kbps for Fax RTCP plus 2 Kbps for VoIP Signaling We round it up to 6 Kbps Thus the required RT 6 QoS Profile parameters are E CIR 6 Kbps E CT Short BE QoS for Data As stated the recommended QoS Profile for Data is BE 64 with the following parameters E MIR 64 Kbps HM CT Medium BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 255 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VolP Gateways B 4 B 4 1 B 4 2 B 4 3 B 4 4 256 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 Service Profile Service Characteristics E G 711 codec 20msec sample interval E 1POTS E No Fax E Priority marking behind the SU is not used All VoIP related traffic is classified onto a single Continuous Grant CG connection E Mul
12. 3 QPSK 1 2 4 QPSK 3 4 5 QAM16 1 2 6 QAM16 3 4 7 QAM64 2 3 8 QAM64 3 4 SU Ethernet Port Parameters Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation 1 Disable No 2 Enable Ethernet Port Speed and Available only if Ethernet Port Auto No Duplex Negotiation is set to Disable 1 10 Mbps Half Duplex 2 10 Mbps Full duplex 3 100 Mbps Half Duplex 4 100 Mbps Full Duplex SU Password Password Up to 20 printable characters case Yes sensitive SU Bridging Parameters Enable Disable Limit on 1 Disable Disable Yes Number of S ted Devices umber of Supporte 2 Enable Maximum Number of Supported 1 512 512 Yes Devices Bridge Aging Time 1 1440 minutes 3 minutes Yes SU Best BST AU Parameters Advanced Si Best BST AU Support 1 Disable No 2 Enable BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 235 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Preferred BST AU ID XXX XXX No X 0 255 Preferred BST AU ID Mask XXX XXX No X 0 255 BST AU ID XXX XXX No X 0 255 BST AU ID Mask XXX XXX No X 0 255 SU Radio Parameters Advanced Si Bandwidth MHz 1 1 75 No 2 3 5 3 5 4 7 5 10 Only values supported by the SU will be accepted Start Downlink Rx Frequency Depends on Frequency Bands Group No MHz available for the AU and the Bandwidth End Downlink Rx Frequency Depends on Freq
13. AU Service Type Section 4 8 5 3 5 2 New parameter SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006 SU MAC Parameters Section 4 9 7 3 2 Changed functionality SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006 SU Phy Parameters Section 4 9 7 3 3 Changed functionality SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued Best BST AU Parameters Updated explanations Added Best Section 4 9 7 3 10 BST AU ID and Best BST AU ID Mask replace Base Station ID and Base Station ID Mask in the SU MAC menu that starting from this version will not be applicable for units operating in TDD Advanced Si mode SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006 Radio Parameters Updated explanations Added Bandwidth Section 4 9 7 3 11 replace the Bandwidth parameter in the SU Phy menu that starting from this version will not be applicable for units operating in TDD Advanced Si mode SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006 Section 4 11 NPU Parameters Summary Updated to reflect all changes SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Legal Rights Legal Rights O Copyright 2007 Alvarion Ltd All rights reserved The material contained herein is proprietary privileged and confidential and owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors No disclosure thereof shall be made to third
14. LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD Disclaimer a The Software is sold on an AS IS basis Alvarion its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE UNITS OF PRODUCT INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO USE AS PART OF ON LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES b PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE AT ALVARION S OPTION TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW THE WARRANTIES
15. NPU Parameters Summary Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated SW File Action 0 None Yes 1 Load 2 Run from Shadow 3 Set as Main SU SW File Name A name of an SU SW File that exist in the Yes NPU SU SW File Action 0 None Yes 1 Load 2 Run from Shadow 3 Set as Main AU MAC Parameters Sector ID 0 255 206 No ARQ Enable Disable 1 Disable Disable No 2 Enable should not be used in version 4 0 2 Maximum Cell Radius km Bandwidth 3 5 MHz 10 50 km 20 km No Bandwidth 5 MHz 7 45 km AU Phy Parameters Bandwidth MHz 1 1 75 3 5 No 2 3 5 3 5 4 7 5 10 Only values supported by the AU will be accepted AU Multi Channel Parameters Diversity Mode 1 No Diversity No Diversity Yes 2 Second Order Diversity band 3 Fourth Order Diversity reset Channel ID 1 4 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 231 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Associated ODU 1 24 must be a defined ODU ID No Downlink Tx Frequency MHz According to the Configured ODU No Frequency Band and AU Bandwidth Admin Status 1 Disable Disable No 2 Enable AU Multirate Parameters Multirate Enable Disable 1 Disable Enable Yes 2 Enable Disable is temporary until next res
16. Priority Classifiers QoS Profiles Filtering Rules Interface Filtering MAC Addresses Deny List XML File Parsing Errors 4 10 4 1 General The General menu includes general service parameters It includes the following options 4 10 4 1 1 Show Select this option to view the current values options of the General parameters 4 10 4 1 2 Update Select this option to update any of the General parameters The General parameters are 4 10 4 1 2 1 Service Mode The Service Mode of the Base Station The available options are 1 Advanced 2 Quick The default Service Mode is Quick 2 For more information on Service Modes refer to Section 4 10 1 4 194 Operation Services Menu 4 10 4 1 2 2 Default L2 Voice Service Profile The default L2 or Voice Service Profile to be used by temporary SUs in Quick Mode Available profiles any of the L2 or Voice Service Profiles existing in the database 4 10 4 1 2 3 Default PPPoE Service Profile 4 10 4 2 4 10 4 2 1 4 10 4 2 2 4 10 4 2 3 4 10 4 2 4 4 10 4 2 5 The default PPPoE Service Profile to be used by temporary SUs in Quick Mode Available profiles any of the PPPoE Service Profiles existing in the database Subscribers The Subscribers menu enables defining new Subscribers viewing or editing details of previously defined Subscribers and removing Subscribers from the database The Subscriber entity is applicable only to Perma
17. mrrrnnnvnnnnnnnrrnnnnrnvrrnnnennvrnnnnnnnvnnnrennrrnenernnrrenennnnnnne 12 1 4 Management SySstemsS e ssrrnnnnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 13 EE EN 5 UR FE 14 1 4 2 AlvariCRAFT EE nice 15 1 4 3 BreezeMAX Service Manager rrrnarnnnnrnnrnnnnnrnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnrrrrrnnnnnnnnrnnennnnenne 15 EE eee S aise cies ccs cce cassie scene ceacesssccwnnsnceensivanend cananeccetescaasseensasaneteatemeenenserecneaanenes 16 ON Radiniai er erty re cence eter et ee ey ee eT 16 1 5 2 Base Station 2 X GHz Antennas Optional ornnnnvnnnrnnnvnnnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnenne 18 1 5 3 Base Station 3 5 GHz Antennas Optional rsrrrrrrrnnnnnvrnnrnnnrrnnnnrrrrrnnnnrnnrnnnnn 19 Contents 1 5 4 AU IDU to AU ODU Communication asrnnnnonnrrrnnnnonvrnnnnnnnvennrnnnrrnnnnennrrnnnennnennn 20 1 5 5 Data Communication Ethernet Ports rrrnrrnnnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnvnnrnnnrnnnnnrnrrnnnnrnnnennnn 20 1 5 6 Configuration and Management rennnnnnvnnnnnnnvrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnvennrnnnrrnnenennrrnenennnnnnee 21 157 SENVIrOnNMEN oe hectare sa cee oe EE E AAEE EEEE SENECA 21 1 5 8 Standards Compliance General rnnnnnnrnnnnnnnvrrnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnrnnnnerrrrrnnsnnnnnnne 22 150 SeMbes avventer malaesmminade 23 1 5 10 Physical and Electrical ve dnsadge 24 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 1 Installing the AU ODU 7 0messssesassmsenenmstenvennoameatadnnkesnektnndendnkenandd
18. An SU that is defined as Temporary will be deleted from the database 20 minutes after being disconnected Operation SU Menu 4 9 2 4 9 3 4 9 4 4 9 4 1 Show Summary by AU Select this option to view the total number of SUs connected to a specific AU as well as main details on these SUs as described in Section 4 9 1 You will be prompted to select the required AU Slot ID Upgrading SU s SW To facilitate efficient upgrade of SU s SW three upgrade levels are available HM SU level for upgrading a single SU described in Section 4 9 7 2 4 2 HM AU level for upgrading all SUs served by a specific AU as described in Section 4 8 5 2 3 3 E Base Station level for upgrading all SUs in the Base Station as described in the following section SW Files in NPU Up to four SU SW files can be stored in the NPU Any of the available files can be loaded by the NPU to a selected SU When four SU files are stored in the NPU a new file cannot be added until at least one of the existing files is deleted Default SW File Names and Default Actions can be defined These are the SW File and associated Action that will be used for an SU after network entry This feature simplifies the upgrade process by defining the SW File and Action for all SUs served by the Base Station Two different pairs of Default SW File Name and Default Action may be defined to optionally support SUs using either Standard Operation Mode or Advanced Si Adva
19. Chassis is powered by the redundant PIU Red Green Power input is out of range or PIU card is damaged Chassis is powered by the PIU Green Off Power to PIU is OK PIU is in redundant mode and the chassis is powered from the other PIU Green Green Power to PIU is OK The chassis is powered from the PIU HOT SWAP Off Power from the module to the chassis is not disconnected the PIU is not ready for removal Blue Power from the module to the chassis can be disconnected and the PIU can be safely removed For instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2 2 9 2 2 5 1 Preparing a Power Cable 44 A 2 5m DC power cable is supplied with each chassis Additional DC cables can be ordered from Alvarion If necessary use the following instruction to prepare a DC cable To prepare the power cable 1 Usea cable capable of supporting a current of at least 40A Use a cable with 2 x SAWG or thicker wires for the power plus an additional 8AWG to 20AWG ground wire 2 The matching power connector to be used is Amphenol D type power P N 177TWA 3W3 SP3Y with high power socket contacts P N 17DM53744 1 3 Connect the cable to the power connector as follows Pin 1 RTN Red 8 AWG min wire Pin 2 48V Black 8 AWG min wire Pin 3 L Ground shield SAWG 20AWG wire 4 Attach suitable terminal rings to the side that connects to the power source Installation Installing the Base Station Equipment 2 2 6
20. E EIR Utilization Excess Information Rate utilization measured for a BE or NRT connection over the last 15 seconds Not applicable for RT and CG connections k 100 x bytes transferred CIR MIR CIR is calculated for each 1 second interval In BE CIR 0 The EIR Utilization equals the average of k over the last 15 seconds and may range from O to 100 The value is updated every 15 seconds 200 Operation Services Menu 4 10 4 4 4 10 4 4 1 4 10 4 4 2 4 10 4 4 3 E Average Throughput bits s The average throughput in bits second measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds The value is updated every 15 seconds Service Profiles Each Service Profile defines the properties of the defined service Each Service Profile is associated with specific Forwarding Rule and Priority Classifier Priority Classifiers are not applicable to Voice Service Profiles The Service Profile menu enables viewing all Service Profiles in the database defining new Service Profiles editing details of previously defined Service Profiles and removing Service Profiles from the database The Service Profiles database can hold up to 1024 Service Profiles The Service Profile s parameters are Service Profile Name A Service Profile Name consists of up to 32 printable characters Service Type The Service Type of the Service Profile The Service Type parameter is configurable only when defining a new Service Profile Add
21. EL sector antenna dual slant 45 polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHS BS ANT 90 3 5 DP 2 x 15 5 dBi minimum in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 90 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna dual slant 45 polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHS BS ANT 120 3 5DP 2 x 13 dBi minimum in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 120 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna dual slant 45 polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHS Omni ANT 3 4 3 6 10 dBi typical in the 3 4 3 6 GHz band 360 AZ x 9 EL vertical polarization BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 19 Chapter 1 System Description 1 5 4 AU IDU to AU ODU Communication Table 1 6 AU IDU to AU ODU Communication Item Description IF Frequency E Tx 240 MHz E Rx 140 MHz Ref Synchronization Frequency 64 MHz Bi Directional Control Frequency 14 MHz IF cable Impedance 50 ohm Maximum IF cable Attenuation 10 dB 240 MHz 7 5 dB 140 MHz 8 dB amp 64 MHz Minimum IF cable Shielding Effectiveness 90 GB in the 10 300 MHz band Maximum IF cable Return Loss 20 GB in the 10 300 MHz band Maximum IF cable DC Resistance 1 5 ohm 1 5 5 Data Communication Ethernet Ports Table 1 7 Data Communication Ethernet Ports Item Description Standard Compliance IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD Maximum Packet Size 1550 Bytes including 4 CRC bytes and 4 VLAN tag
22. If there is a match it means that the source MAC address of the message received from the network side is identical to a MAC address of a device behind one of the SUs served by the Base Station In case of a match the NPU discards all packets designated to the device with this MAC address until it s aging time expires 2 Duplicate SU Name The SU Name User Name is already in use by another SU connected to the same Base Station A Base Station cannot serve two SUs with the same User Name Upon identifying an SU with an SU Name User Name that is identical to that of a previously registered SU the new SU will be registered to enable management but will not receive any services Its name in the NPU database will be changed to SU lt SU s MAC Address gt The system administrator will be informed of the problem through the Fault Status parameter in any of the relevant Show menus Fault Status 2 and through a trap message rbSuDuplicateName trap If the administrator decides that the SU is legitimate and should receive services a new User Name must be configured in the SU The SU will receive services only after configuring it with a User Name that is unique in the Base Station s database see also Section 4 9 7 3 1 1 E Summary Information Total Number of SUs The total number of SUs in the database including connected and pre configured SUs Total Connected SUs SUs Connected to AU Slot N where N 1 4 7 9 NOTE
23. Installation 30 LEDs 37 Authentication Activity Status 102 Add Server 102 Delete Selected Server 103 IP Address 102 Operation Status 102 Select Server 103 Server Status 102 Show All 102 Show Selected Server 103 Statistics 103 UDP Port 102 Authentication Parameters 101 Authorized Managers Add 125 IP Address 125 Parameters 124 Read Community 125 Select 125 Send Traps 125 Show All 125 Write Community 125 AVU 55 LEDs 55 Replacing 55 B Back Panel Port Counters 155 Backup File Creating 117 Filtering 117 Full 117 Profiles 117 Profiles and Services 117 Traps 117 Upload Download 118 Bandwidth AU 149 SU Phy Standard FDD Parameters 172 SU Radio Parameters Advanced Si 178 Base Station Chassis 40 Chassis Slot Assignment 91 Configuration Menu 91 Installation 39 Power Cable 44 278 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Index Power Requirements 41 Show 90 Base Station ID AU 147 SU MAC Standard FDD Parameters 171 Base Station ID Mask SU MAC Standard FDD Parameters 172 Base Station Licenses 107 Basic Parameters 68 BE 210 Best BST AU Parameters 176 Best BST AU Support 177 Best BST AU Table 177 Best Effort BE Qos Profile 210 Bridge Aging Time NPU 125 su 175 Bridging Parameters SU 175 Broadcast Relaying 207 Bronze LAN to LAN Pre Configured Profile 220 Bronze Teleworking Pre Configured Profile 220 BST AU ID 177
24. Management Port Parameters Management Port IP Address IP address 10 0 0 1 No Management Port Subnet Mask IP address 255 255 255 0 No Management Port Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 No Management Port Destination IP address 0 0 0 0 No Subnet Management Port Destination IP address 0 0 0 0 No Subnet Mask 228 Operation NPU Parameters Summary Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Management Port Management 1 Disable Enable Yes Traffic Enable Disable 2 Enable Data Port Parameters Data Port IP Address IP address 1 1 1 3 No Data Port Subnet Mask IP address 255 255 255 0 No Data Port Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 No Data Port Management VLAN 0 4094 or Null for No VLAN Null Yes Data Port Speed 1 100 Mbps 100 Mbps No 2 1 Gbps Data Port Management Traffic 1 Disable Enable Yes Enable Disable 5 Enable Authorized Managers Authorized Manager IP Address IP address NA Yes Authorized Manager Send 1 Disable NA Yes a 2 Enable Authorized Manager Read Up to 23 printable characters case NA Yes Community sensitive Authorized Manager Write Up to 23 printable characters case NA Yes Community sensitive Bridge Bridge Aging Time 1 1440 minutes or 0 for no aging 10 minutes Yes Voice DRAP TTL Retries 1 100 4 Yes Radio Cluster Parameters Rad
25. Name is replaced by the name configured in the SU User Name A Base Station cannot serve two SUs with the same User Name Upon identifying an SU with an SU Name User Name that is identical to that of a previously registered SU the new SU will be registered to enable management but will not receive any services Its name in the NPU database will be changed to SU lt SU s MAC Address gt The system administrator will be informed of the problem through the Fault Status parameter in any of the relevant Show menus Fault Status 2 and through a trap message rbSuDuplicateName trap If the administrator decides that the SU is legitimate and should receive services a new User Name must be configured in the SU The SU will receive services only after configuring it with a User Name that is unique in the Base Station s database Organization Name The Organization Name configured in the SU Address The Address configured in the SU Country The Country name configured in the SU MAC Standard FDD Parameters The SU MAC menu enables viewing updating the MAC parameters for Standard operation mode These parameters do not affect the operation of the unit when using Advanced Si operation mode These parameters are provided to support the Automatic Platform Detection mechanism of the dual mode CPEs allowing pre configuration of the relevant parameters before switching the sector to operate in FDD mode using Standard operation mode These p
26. Subnet Mask 120 Management Port Counters 128 Management Traffic Enable Disable Data Port 123 Management Port 121 Management VLAN Data Port 123 Marking Mode 802 1p 204 DSCP 204 Transparent 203 Max Tx Power 134 Maximum Cell Radius 148 Maximum Information Rate 212 Maximum Number of Retries 101 Maximum Number of Supported Devices SU 175 Maximum Number of Voice Calls AU 154 Service Profile 206 Minimum Number of Sub Channels 154 Minimum Severity 96 MIR 212 282 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Index Monitor Via Telnet 85 Via the MON Port 84 Monitor Inactivity Timeout 118 Monitor Password 114 Multi Channel Show Summary 149 Multi Channel Parameters 149 Multicast QoS Profile 208 Multicast VLAN ID 207 Multirate Algorithm 152 Multirate and ATPC Parameters SU 173 Multirate Enable Disable AU 154 Multirate Parameters AU 152 N Navigation Processor SW Version 111 Network Processing Unit 49 Non Real Time NRT QoS Profile 210 NPU 49 Bridge Aging Time 125 Configuration Menu 119 Connectors 50 Ejecting 52 Inserting 51 LEDs 50 Menu 112 Performance Monitoring 126 Replacing 56 Reset Unit 115 Run from Shadow 117 Set as Main 117 Set Factory Defaults 115 Show 112 SW Versions Control 115 Unit Control 114 NRT 210 Number of Gateways 159 Number Of Received Satellites 110 ODU Add 135 Admin Status 136 Associated Radio Cluster 135 Config
27. The GPS Adapter is powered by 12 VDC supplied by the NPU The GPS Adapter is installed in a 1U high panel the same panel that is used for the ODU Power Feeders ACTIVE GPS BASE STATION PWR 1PPS ODU INT CLOCK INTERFACE Sele 6 ole ouw o GPS ADAPTER Figure 2 13 GPS Adapter Front Panel INT GPS IDU GPS ODU GPS 1PPS IN Figure 2 14 GPS Adapter Rear Panel Table 2 16 GPS Adapter Connectors Name Connector Functionality BASE STATION 15 pin D Type jack E 1PPS and 16MHz synchronization signals LVDS interface to the INTERFACE NPU E Power 12 VDC from the NPU E Serial control signals RS 442 interface from the NPU CMD 9 pin D Type jack Serial control signals RS 232 interface to the Indoor GPS Receiver 1PPS IN BNC jack 1PPS signal TTL levels from Indoor GPS Receiver 62 Installation Installing the GPS Adapter Table 2 16 GPS Adapter Connectors Name Connector Functionality ODU GPS RJ 45 jack HM 1PPS RS 442 interface from Outdoor GPS Receiver E Serial control signals RS 422 interface to Outdoor GPS Receiver HM Power 12 VDC to Outdoor GPS Receiver GND Grounding Screw Connection to ground earth Table 2 17 GPS Adapter LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Input power indication E Off Power input failure E Green 12 VDC power supply from NPU is OK 1PPS 1PPS signal indication E Blinking Green 1PPS s
28. among sectors can be achieved The available options are Enable use external 1PPS clock source and Disable use internal 1PPS clock source derived from the selected 16 MHz clock The default is Enable External 16 MHz Clock The 16 MHz clock source is used for generation of all main clocking signals in the system including the internal 1PPS clock Using an external accurate 16 MHz clock source will enable better hold over of the 1PPS clock upon temporary loss or reduced reliability when receiving less than 4 satellites of the external 1PPS clock This will allow a longer time of continued operation before appearance of interferences due to clock drifts among Base Stations The available options are Enable use external 16 MHz clock source and Disable use internal 16 MHz clock source The default is Disable In the current release external 16 MHz clock from the GPS Adapter is not available BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 95 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 4 3 4 4 3 1 4 4 3 2 4 4 3 2 1 4 4 3 2 2 4 4 3 3 96 Alarms and Traps The Alarms and Traps menu enables viewing the active alarms or the traps log filtering the displayed traps and enabling disabling traps The available options are E Show Active Alarms E Traps Display Filter E Show Traps Log E Trap Configuration Show Active Alarms Select to view the currently active alarms For more details on active alarms
29. and the SW Version release date is 11 March 2006 E Signal Processor SW Version The number and date of the Signal Processor SW Version in the format OxYY OxZZ dd mm yyyy where XX and YY are the Major and Minor SW Version Numbers in hexadecimal digits respectively For example 0x18 0x2B 11 3 2005 means that the Major SW Version Number is 18 hex the Minor SW Version Number is 2B hex and the SW Version release date is 11 March 2005 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 111 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 4 5 1 112 NPU Menu The NPU menu includes the following options Show Unit Control Configuration Performance Monitoring Following is a detailed description of these options Show Select this option to view the current value selected option of configurable parameters Refer to Section 4 5 3 for more details on these parameters In addition some general status information is shown as follows HM General Status Information oO amp Q Serial Number HW Version HW Configuration Description Redundant CPLD Version the Redundant CPLD is necessary to enable GPS support Temperature Celsius Cumulative Power On Time hours The cumulative power on time of the NPU since first power up Management Port Parameters and Status Ko Management Port MAC Address Management Port IP Address Management Port Subnet Mask Management Port Gatewa
30. conductor of the DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor at the equipment See installation instructions E The equipment must be connected directly to the DC Supply System grounding electrode conductor E All equipment in the immediate vicinity must be grounded in the same way and not be grounded elsewhere E The DC supply system is to be local i e within the same premises as the equipment HM There shall be no disconnect device between the grounded circuit conductor of the DC source return and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor Lithium Battery viii The battery on the NPU card is not intended for replacement BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Legal Rights Caution To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Line Voltage Before connecting this instrument to the power line make sure that the voltage of the power source matches the requirements of the instrument Radio The instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation To avoid possible harmful exposure to this energy do not stand or work for extended periods of time in front of its antenna The long term characteristics or the possible physiological effects of radio frequency electromagnetic fields have not been yet fully investigated Outdoor Units and Antennas Installation and Grounding Ensure that outdoor units antennas and supporting structures are pr
31. nothing and 255 255 255 255 all ones meaning this address only are illegal and will be rejected Operation NPU Menu 4 5 3 2 3 4 5 3 2 4 4 5 3 2 5 4 5 3 2 6 NOTE The local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters must differ from the local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters and from the subnet that is used as the Static Route for remote management via the Management port defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters Data Port Gateway The IP address of the default Gateway for the Data port The default is 0 0 0 0 meaning no default gateway Data Port Management VLAN This parameter defines the VLAN ID for management frames via the Data port Ifa value from 0 to 4094 is configured for the Management VLAN ID then the device will accept management frames only if their VLAN tag is the same as this value Available values are 0 4094 or null empty for No VLAN The default is null No VLAN CAUTION The Data Port Management VLAN is updated in run time without reset Data Port Speed The speed of the Data port s Ethernet interface that operates always in full duplex mode Auto negotiation is not supported The available options are 100 Mbps and 1 Gbps The default speed is 100 Mbps Data Port Management Traffic Ena
32. 1 158 SU Menu The SU menu includes the following options Show Summary Show Summary by AU SW Files in NPU Select by Name Select by MAC Address Add Clear All Configured SU SW Files Following is a detailed description of these options Show Summary Select this option to view summary information and main details for all connected and pre configured SUs E For each SU the following information is displayed MAC Address SU Name SU Type gt v Vv Y V V WV CPE first generation CPE Not applicable in TDD systems CPE PRO CPR PRO L CPE PRO2 CPE PRO2 L CPE SI CPE SI L not applicable in current release Operation SU Menu gt CPE SI2 gt CPE SI2 L not applicable in current release CPE PRO CPE PRO L CPE SI and CPE SI L use first generation Intel s Pro Wireless 5116 WiMAX chip CPE PRO2 CPE PRO2 L CPE SI2 and CPE SI2 L use second generation IEEE 802 16e ready WiMAX chip The L suffix indicates that the SU was supplied with limited capabilities limited bandwidth SU Status Permanent or Temporary SUID an ID allocated to each SU by the connected AU Registration Status In Service Out Of Service Oo Oo amp Configured SW File Name The SW File configured in the NPU together with the Configured Action Configured SW Version The SW Version of the SW File configured in the NPU Configured Action The operation to be performe
33. 1 4 5 3 3 3 2 4 5 3 3 3 3 4 5 3 3 3 4 4 5 3 4 4 5 3 5 Show All Select this option to view the details of all currently defined authorized managers Select This option enables selecting an existing authorized manager for viewing or updating its properties or for deleting it from the database The selection is based on the authorized manager s IP address Refer to the following Add section for details on the configurable parameters Add Select this option to add a new authorized manager Up to 10 Authorized Manager can be defined The following parameters can be configured IP Address The IP address of the Authorized Manager Send Traps The Send Traps parameters whether to enable or disable sending of traps to the Authorized Manager Read Community The SNMP Read Community to be used by the Authorized Manager A null Read Community means that the read get operation can only be performed using the Write Community Valid Community strings Up to 23 printable characters case sensitive Write Community The SNMP Write Community to be used by the Authorized Manager A null Write Community means that the Authorized Manager has Read only access rights Valid Community strings Up to 23 printable characters case sensitive Bridge The Bridge submenu enables configuring the Bridge Aging Time parameter setting the aging time for all addresses in the Forwarding Data Base The available values are from 1 to 1440 min
34. 1 Radio Table 1 3 Radio Specifications Item Description Frequency Unit Band Frequency MHz AU ODU HP 2 3 2300 2360 AU ODU HP 2 3 WCS 2305 2315 2350 2360 AU ODU HP 2 3 Extended 2305 2317 2348 2360 WCS AU ODU HP 2 5A 2496 2602 AU ODU HP 2 5B 2590 2690 AU ODU HP TDD 3 4a 3399 5 3455 AU ODU HP TDD 3 4b 3455 3500 AU ODU HP TDD 3 5a 3500 3555 AU ODU HP TDD 3 5b 3545 3600 Operation Mode TDD Channel Bandwidth E 3 5 MHz E 5 MHz Central Frequency Resolution 0 125 MHz actual configurable frequencies depend on the local radio regulations and allocated spectrum Antenna Port AU ODU N Type 50 ohm Max Input Power at AU ODU antenna port 60 dBm before saturation 8 dBm before damage Output Power at AU ODU antenna port 2 x GHz 36 dBm 1 dB maximum Power control range 6 dB in 1 dB steps 3 x GHz 34 dBm 1 dB maximum Power control range 10 dB in 1 dB range Modulation OFDM modulation 256 FFT points BPSK QPSK QAM16 QAM64 FEC Convolutional Coding 1 2 2 3 3 4 System Description Specifications Table 1 3 Radio Specifications Item Description Typical Sensitivity Modulation amp Minimum Sensitivity dBm Sensitivity dBm BER 1E 6 2 x GHz units Coding SNR dB 3 5 MHz BW 5 MHz BW BPSK 1 2 2 5 98 96 QPSK 1 2 5 9 95 93 QPSK 3 4
35. 1p value and the configured VPL ID If no VPL ID is configured VPL ID Null the 802 1p tags will not be forwarded If VLAN Transparency Mode is On the frames will be forwarded without any change with the original 802 1p value and VLAN ID if exists If DSCP classification is used at the SU the original DSCP bits will be replaced by the configured DSCP Marking Value NOTE E PPPoE frames can be marked only with 802 1p DSCP marking for PPPoE services is not supported E In L2 Services many protocols may be carried over Ethernet As BreezeMAX bridges all these protocols there s no way to know what protocol type is encapsulated in Ethernet beforehand Consequently if DSCP Marking is configured for L2 the BreezeMAX system uses DSCP marking only for IP packets e g Ethertype 0x0800 If 802 1p Marking is configured it is used for all frames 4 10 4 4 6 Priority Marking Value The Priority Marking Value enables definition of the marking value for data frames transmitted to the backbone according to the configured Priority Marking Mode Table 4 9 Priority Marking Values Priority Marking Mode Priority Marking Values Range Transparent Not Applicable 802 1p 0 7 DSCP 0 63 4 10 4 4 7 Forwarding Rule The Forwarding Rule to be used by the Service Profile The Forwarding Rule parameter is not applicable to transparent Service Profiles VLAN Transparency Mode On as all transparent Service Profiles share
36. 2 Installation Guidelines 2 2 11 1 Replacing an NPU To minimize downtime and facilitate fast and easy NPU replacement it is recommended to maintain an updated copy of the NPU configuration Refer to Section 4 5 2 6 for details on preparing and uploading a backup file of the NPU configuration 1 Release the screws at the top and the bottom of the NPU s front panel 2 Press the handles red button until the handles are unlocked 3 Wait until the blue HOT SWAP LED turns on indicating that the module has been disconnected and can be removed 4 Press the handles down the upper handle up the lower handle until the module is unlocked Firmly hold the handles and take the module out of the chassis 5 Disconnect all IF cables connecting the AU IDUs to the AU ODUs This is necessary as the initial configuration of the new NPU is most probably inappropriate 6 Firmly push the new NPU module into its intended slot slot 5 7 Press the handles up the upper handle down the lower handle simultaneously until you hear the locking click and the red buttons are released The blue HOT SWAP LED will briefly turn on indicating that the module is being powered up 8 Secure the module in place by closing the screws at the top and bottom of the front panel 9 Download the backup file using a DOS based TFTP Use the command tftp i lt NPU port IP address gt put lt file name gt The default IP address of the MGMT port is 10 0 0 1
37. 8 6 92 89 QAM16 1 2 11 4 89 87 QAM 16 3 4 14 8 86 84 QAM64 2 3 20 81 79 QAM64 3 4 20 9 80 78 Typical Sensitivity Modulation amp Minimum Sensitivity dBm Sensitivity dBm BER 1E 6 3 x GHz units Coding SNR dB 3 5 MHz BW 5 MHz BW BPSK 1 2 2 5 99 97 QPSK 1 2 5 9 96 94 QPSK 3 4 8 6 93 91 QAM16 1 2 11 4 90 88 QAM16 3 4 14 8 87 85 QAM64 2 3 20 83 81 QAM64 3 4 20 9 81 79 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 17 Chapter 1 System Description 1 5 2 Base Station 2 X GHz Antennas Optional Table 1 4 Base Station 2 X GHz Antennas Electrical Specifications Item Description BS ANT 60 2 X V 16 5 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 60 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna vertical polarization compliance with ETSI EN 301 525 V 1 1 1 2000 06 CS and RoHS BS ANT 90 2 X V 15 5 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 90 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna vertical polarization compliance with ETSI EN 301 525 V 1 1 1 2000 06 CS and RoHS BS ANT 120 2 X V 14 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 120 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna vertical polarization compliance with ETSI EN 301 525 V 1 1 1 2000 06 CS and RoHS BS ANT 60 2 X DP 2 x 17 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 65 AZ x 7 EL sector antenna dual slant 45 polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHS BS ANT 90 2 X DP 2 x 15 5 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 90 AZ x 8 EL sector antenna dual slant 45
38. BST AU ID Mask 177 Burst Error Rate Counters AU 156 su 182 C Calculated Local Date and Time 111 Cell ID 93 Cell Parameters 93 CG 210 Chain Number 109 Chain Parameters 108 Change Password 114 Channel Admin Status 151 Associated ODU 151 Associated Radio Cluster 152 Downlink Tx Frequency 151 Frequency Band 152 Select 151 Tx Power 152 Uplink Rx Frequency 152 Chassis 40 Slot Assignment 91 CIR 212 Clear All Configured AU SW Files 141 Clear All Configured SU SW Files SU 183 Clear All Configured SU SW Files for this AU 147 Clock Parameters 95 Committed Information Rate 212 Committed Time 211 Configuration AU 147 Base Station Parameters 91 NPU 119 SU 170 Configured Action AU 138 SU 159 Configured SU Action AU 139 Configured SU SW File Name AU 139 Configured SU SW Version AU 139 Configured SW File Name AU 138 SU 159 Configured SW Version AU 138 SU 159 Connectors AU ODU 37 GPS Adapter 62 NPU 50 ODU Power Feeder 58 Continuous Grant CG QoS Profile 210 Counters AU Ports 155 Back Panel Port 155 Burst Error Rate AU 156 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 279 Index Burst Error Rate SU 182 Data Port 127 Management Port 128 Service 199 SU Ethernet Port 181 SU Port 181 Wireless Port AU 156 Wireless Port SU 181 Country 171 CPEs License Bank 107 Create Backup 117 cT 211 D Data Port Aut
39. Bands belonging to the applicable Frequency Bands Group see Section 4 7 5 and the configured Bandwidth Scanning Main Step KHz The Main Scanning Step used to define the set of Main Frequencies as described above For a Bandwidth of 3 5 MHz the range is from 125 KHz to 1750 KHz in steps of 125 KHz For a Bandwidth of 5 MHz the range is from 125 KHz to 5000 KHz in steps of 125 KHz Intermediate Scanning Steps The Intermediate Scanning Steps includes up to 8 entries of numbers between 1 to 8 or 0 for none that define the intermediate frequencies to be scanned as described above The highest step in KHz defined by the Intermediate Scanning Steps must be smaller than the Scanning Main Step Operation SU Menu 4 9 7 4 4 9 7 4 1 Performance Monitoring The Performance Monitoring sub menu provides the following options E Ports Counters E Burst Error Rate Counters SU Ports Counters The SU Ports Counters menu enables viewing or resetting the Ethernet and Wireless ports counters The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset The counters are reset each time the SU is reset or upon activating the Reset Counters option The displayed counters include E Ethernet Port Counters Data Bytes Received The total number of data bytes received from the Ethernet link Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data B
40. Best Effort 210 Continuous Grant 210 Definition 184 General Parameters 194 Generic VoIP non DRAP based 187 Hybrid VLAN Mode 197 L2 185 Menu 196 Name 196 Non Real Time 210 Operation Status 199 Performance 199 PPPoE 185 Real Time 210 SU MAC Address 197 Types 185 VLAN Classification Mode 198 VLAN List 197 Service Fault Status 159 Service Mode 194 Service Profile Definition 184 Maximum Number of Voice Calls 206 Menu 201 Name 201 Priority Marking Mode 203 Priority Marking Value 205 Service Type 201 VLAN Transparency Mode 201 VPL ID 202 Service Profile Class 206 209 Service Profile Name 201 Service Profiles Defining Local Service Profiles 218 Service Type L2 185 PPPoE 185 Voice 186 Services Defining Local Services 219 Voice DRAP based 186 Session Timeout 188 Set as Main BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 285 Index AU 146 NPU 117 SU 169 Set Factory Defaults AU 144 NPU 115 SU 167 Set Rates 173 Severity Trap Configuration 98 Shared Secret 100 Show Accounting Server 105 AU Slot 142 Authentication Server 103 Base Station Licenses 107 Base Station Parameters 90 CPEs License Bank Status 107 Files in NPU 140 General Service Parameters 194 Grace Licenses 108 NPU Parameters 112 ODU 134 SU 163 Temporary Grace Licenses 108 Show Active Alarms 96 Show All Accounting Servers 104 Authentication Servers 102 Authorized Manager
41. ETS 300 019 Part 2 1 T 1 2 amp part 2 2 T 2 3 for indoor amp outdoor Part 2 3 T 3 2 for indoor Part 2 4 T 4 1E for outdoor Radio ETSI EN 301 753 V 1 1 1 ETSI EN 301 021 V 1 6 1 FCC 04 135 FCC 27 53 22 System Description Specifications 1 5 9 Services Table 1 11 Services Item Description Max number of Services per BST 4 095 One or several services may be defined per subscriber one or more subscribers can be supported per SU Max number of Service Profiles per BST 1 024 Max number of Forwarding Rules per BST 255 Max number of Priority Classifiers per BST 255 Max number of QoS Profiles per BST 255 Max number of Subscribers per BST 1 024 applicable only for permanent SUs Min number of data connections per Service 2 1 uplink 1 downlink Max number of data connections per Service 8 4 uplink 4 downlink Max number of data connections per SU 126 Max number of data connections per AU 3999 3 x number of SUs 3 connections are reserved for each SU Max number of SUs per AU 510 Max number of AUs per BST 7 maximum 6 concurrently active AUs Max number of MAC addresses in Bridging Table BST 6 000 SU 512 Aging time is configurable The default is 3 minutes for SU 10 minutes for NPU Max number of VLANs per Service 16 Max number of VLANs per SU 16 Max number of
42. Files for this AU Select this option to clear delete the SU Configured SW File in all Permanent SUs served by this AU Configuration The AU Configuration menu enables viewing and updating the AU s parameters It is important to note that changes to some parameters take effect only after reset For these parameters the applicable Show menus display the Current as well as the Configured value The Configuration menu includes the following options E MAC E Phy E Multi Channel E Multirate E Voice Parameters MAC Parameters The MAC menu enables viewing updating the following parameters ID Parameters The Operator ID Cell ID and Sector ID constitute together the Base Station ID which is the unique identifier of the AU An SU can be authenticated by the AU only if its defined parameters match the Base Station ID configured for the AU The Operator ID and Cell ID are defined for the Base Station see Section 4 4 2 4 and are used by all AUs in the Base Station In the AU s MAC Parameters menu they are available only in the Show option The Sector ID parameter consists of three digits in the range of 0 to 255 The default Sector ID is 206 Changes in Sector ID are applied only after reset ARQ Enable Disable The ARQ Enable Disable parameter controls whether to use an ARQ algorithm for detecting errors and requesting retransmissions of applicable unicast messages applicable only for Best Effort and Non Real Time services
43. KHz N 1 2 End Frequency is the upper limit for the scanned frequencies The Frequency Scanning menu enables viewing and updating the scanning range parameters It also enables viewing the current set of discrete frequencies if exist as defined in the SU In the current release discrete frequencies can be defined modified only locally at the SU The Frequency Scanning menu includes the following options 4 9 7 3 11 2 1Show The Show option enables viewing the following E Start Downlink Rx Frequency MHz BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 179 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration End Downlink Rx Frequency MHz Scanning Main Step Scanning Intermediate Steps Configured Scanning Intermediate Steps Actual Discrete Frequencies or No discrete frequency configured 4 9 7 3 11 2 2Update The Update menu enables configuration of the following parameters changes in Frequency Scanning parameters take effect only after reset 180 Start Downlink Rx Frequency MHz The lowest frequency in the range of frequencies to be scanned The available values depend on the frequency range defined by the Frequency Bands belonging to the applicable Frequency Bands Group see Section 4 7 5 and the configured Bandwidth End Downlink Rx Frequency MHz The highest frequency in the range of frequencies to be scanned The available values depend on the frequency range defined by the Frequency
44. SU can also be managed directly from its Ethernet port using the Installer Monitor program or the built in Web Server These options are available to support the installation process and enable special tests and performance monitoring at the SU s site The following management options are available E SNMP based management using AlvariSTAR or another network management system customized to support management of BreezeMAX E Using Telnet to access the embedded Monitor application E Accessing the embedded Monitor application locally via the MON port NOTE It is not possible to manage the Base Station via the wireless link from the SU s side Two management access methods are available to support management using SNMP and or Telnet E Out Of Band OOB management via the dedicated MGMT port E In Band IB management via the DATA port NOTE To enable remote management of devices behind the SU including Voice and Networking Gateways IP connecctivity with the managed device is needed This is possible only via the Data port Typically BreezeMAX systems will be managed using AlvariSTAR or another SNMP based network management system Operation BreezeMAX System Management This chapter describes how to manage the system using the Monitor application For information on managing the system using AlvariSTAR refer to the Applicable AlvariSTAR documentation NOTE Ed To enable remote management using SNMP and or
45. SW File Name see Section 4 9 7 2 4 2 is other than None null NOTE The Default SW File Standard option is not applicable to this release that does not support products operating in Standard Operation Mode The Default SW File Standard parameters are Name The Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Standard Operation Mode after network entry Should be one of the SU SW Files currently stored in the NPU or None null Action The operation to be performed with the Default SW File Standard after network entry of an SU using Standard Operation Mode None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main Refer to Section 4 9 7 2 4 2 2 for more details on these Actions Default SW File Advanced Si Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Advanced Si Operation Mode after network entry and the Action to be taken with this file Not applicable to any SU served by an AU in which the SU SW File see Section 4 8 5 2 3 3 is other than None null They are also not applicable to any Permanent SU whose Configured SW File Name see Section 4 9 7 2 4 2 is other than None null The Default SW File Advanced Si parameters are Name The Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Advanced Si Operation Mode after network entry Should be one of the SU SW Files currently stored in the NPU or None null Operation SU Menu
46. Service Profile This marking overrides marking performed by external devices behind the SU Typically Priority Marking by the NPU will be used in the following cases HM The external networking equipment behind the SU does not use priority marking HM The service provider does not trust the priority marking defined by the user s equipment HM The service provider uses a priority marking type DSCP or 802 1p that differs from the one used by the user s networking equipment The system supports three marking modes 1 Transparent Marking Mode No Priority Marking In this case the system should forward the frames to the uplink network without any changes If 802 1p classification is used at the SU the frames will be transmitted to the operator s network according to the following rules BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 203 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 204 If VLAN Transparency Mode is Off the frames will be forwarded with their original 802 1p value and the configured VPL ID If no VPL ID is configured VPL ID Null the 802 1p tags will not be forwarded If VLAN Transparency Mode is On the frames will be forwarded without any change with the original 802 1p value and VLAN ID if exists For DSCP classification at the SU If the VPL ID is configured VLAN Transparency Mode Off the NPU adds an 802 1Q header with the configured VPL ID and 802 1p 0 If VLAN Transparency Mode
47. Subscriber Name is not applicable to a temporary Service Operation Services Menu 4 10 4 3 1 3 Service Profile Name The Service Profile to be used in the Service The Service Profile Name must be that of a Service Profile that exists in the database 4 10 4 3 1 4 SU MAC Address The MAC Address of the SU associated with the Service The SU MAC Address must be that of a Permanent SU that exists in the database The MAC Address can be changed in Update option only if the Admin status of the Service is set to Disabled 4 10 4 3 1 5 VLAN List A list of VLAN IDs listing the VLAN IDs behind the SU associated with the applicable Subscriber The list includes VLAN IDs each one in the range of 0 to 4094 separated by commas Select null empty string for No VLAN The VLAN List is not displayed in Show menus if the list is empty When Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off the VLAN List can include up to 16 VLAN IDs When Hybrid VLAN Mode is On the VLAN List can include up to 15 VLAN IDs the 16th entry is reserved for No VLAN The maximum total number of VLAN IDs behind a single SU is 16 15 when there is a Service with Hybrid VLAN Mode On is assigned to the SU Refer to Section 4 10 1 5 for guidelines regarding VLAN ID configuration 4 10 4 3 1 6 Hybrid VLAN Mode Hybrid VLAN Mode of operation enables classification of both tagged and untagged packets or untagged packets only according to the following rules Table 4
48. Telnet the parameters of the applicable port MGMT and or DATA must first be configured via the MON port For details on the applicable parameters refer to Section 4 5 3 1 Management Port and Section 4 5 3 2 Data Port BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 83 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 4 2 1 84 The Monitor Program Accessing the Monitor Program To access the Monitor program via the MON connector 1 Use the Monitor cable to connect the MON connector of the NPU to the COM port of your ASCII ANSI terminal or PC The COM port connector on the Monitor cable is a 9 pin D type plug 2 Runa terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminalTM 3 Set the communication parameters as shown in the following table Table 4 1 COM Port Configuration Parameter Value Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Flow Control Xon Xoff Port Connected COM port 4 The password prompt is displayed Enter the password and press the Enter key to get to the Main menu NOTE There are 3 access levels as described in Section 4 2 2 The default password for each of the access levels is Access Level Default Password Administrator admin Installer installer Monitor monitor Operation The Monitor Program gt To access the Monitor program using Telnet 1 The PC used for accessing the Monitor program
49. Upper Priority Limits list functionality is the same as that of the Uplink Upper Priority Limits list except that the ranges are defined for downlink communication Downlink QoS Profiles The Downlink QoS Profiles list functionality is the same as that of the Uplink QoS Profiles list except that the QoS Profiles are associated with the entries in the Downlink Upper Priority Limits list Priority Classifier Class A read only parameter available only in Show menu Currently the Class of all Priority Classifiers is Local BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 209 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 7 210 QoS Profiles The QoS Profile defines the Quality of Service parameters that are applicable when the QoS Profile is used Different QoS Profile Types are available to support different service requirements E Real Time RT service is designed to meet the needs of Real Time Variable Bit Rate like services characterized by requirements for guaranteed rate and delay such as streaming video or audio These services are dynamic in nature but offer periodic dedicated requests opportunities to meet real time requirements Because the Subscriber Unit issues explicit requests the protocol overhead and latency is increased but capacity is granted only according to the real needs of the connection QoS Profile parameters include Committed Information Rate CIR and Committed Time CT Non Real Time NRT
50. VLANs VPL IDs per BST 1 024 Max number of concurrent voice calls per 50 Voice L2 Service Max number of concurrent voice calls per AU 300 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 23 Chapter 1 System Description 1 5 10 Physical and Electrical 1 5 10 1 Mechanical Specifications Base station Equipment Table 1 12 Mechanical Specifications Base Station Equipment Unit Dimensions cm Weight kg BST SH 8U ETSI type shelf 8U x 43 19 x 24 6 9 excluding AVU PIU 3U x SHP x 16 0 35 PSU 3U x 8HP x 16 0 7 NPU 6U x 7HP x 16 0 7 AU IDU 4CH 6U x 7HP x 16 AU ODU HP except 2 3 GHz WCS models 32 9 x 15 7 x 16 9 9 6 1 AU ODU HP 2 3 GHz WCS models 32 9 x 15 7 x 20 9 8 6 AVU 2U x 84HP x 16 1 7 Power Feeder panel 1U ETSI type panel 0 14 Power Feeder Module 15 7 x 14 6 x 3 17 0 6 GPS Adapter 15 7 x 14 6 x 3 17 0 4 Outdoor GPS Receiver Tubular enclosure 15 5 D x 12 7 H 0 363 Indoor GPS Receiver 1U x 30 8 x 21 3 1 4 1U 44 45 mm 1 75 1HP 5 08 mm 0 2 24 System Description Specifications 1 5 10 2 Electrical Specifications Base station Equipment Table 1 13 Electrical Specifications Base Station Equipment Unit Details Power Source 40 5 to 60 VDC AVU PIU 16W maximum active PIU PSU 200W maximum output power Efficiency 80 minimum NPU 65W maximum 44W typical excluding power that m
51. Voice Service Profiles for DRAP based Gateways Name Service VPL Priority Maximum Number Forwarding Type ID Marking Mode of Voice Calls Rule VoIP 1V Voice 18 Transparent 2 VoIP VoIP 2V Voice 18 Transparent 4 VoIP VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation taking into account the considerations described in Section 4 10 1 5 To properly support Call Waiting an additional connection must be available Thus the Maximum Number of Voice Calls is twice the maximum expected number of actual voice sessions Table 4 15 Pre Configured Service Profiles for Generic non DRAP VoIP Services Name Service VPL ID Forwarding Priority Classifier Type Rule 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 1 POTS Advanced VoIP L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 729 G 729 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 1 POTS Advanced VoIP L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G711 G711 In all pre configured Service Profiles for generic VolP services the Priority Marking Mode is set to Transparent and the Maximum Number of Voice Calls is 0 VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation taking into account the considerations described in Section 4 10 1 5 BreezeMAX Modular Base Sta
52. bytes Speed Data Port 100 1000 Mbps Full Duplex Management Port 10 100 Mbps Half Full Duplex with Auto Negotiation 20 System Description Specifications 1 5 6 Configuration and Management Table 1 8 Configuration and Management Item Description Out Of Band OOB Management E Telnet via Management port E SNMP via Management port E Monitor port In Band IB Management via Data Port E SNMP E Telnet SNMP Agents SNMP ver 1 client MIB II RFC 1213 Private BreezeMAX MIBs Authentication and Authorization RADIUS Software upgrade Using TFTP Configuration upload download Using TFTP 15 7 Environmental Table 1 9 Environmental Specifications Type Unit Details Operating temperature Outdoor units 2 x GHz ODU 52 C to 55 C 3 x GHz ODU 40 C to 55 C Outdoor GPS Receiver 40 C to 85 C Outdoor Antenna of Indoor GPS Receiver 40 C to 70 C Indoor equipment Operating humidity Outdoor units 0 C to 40 C 5 95 non condensing Weather protected Indoor equipment 5 95 non condensing BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Chapter 1 System Description 1 5 8 Standards Compliance General Table 1 10 Standards Compliance General Type Standard EMC ETSI EN 301 489 1 4 ETSI EN 300 385 Safety EN 60950 1 UL 60 950 1 Environmental
53. client for which the RADIUS server does not have a shared secret must be silently discarded If the client is valid the RADIUS server consults a database of users to find the user whose User Name matches the request The user entry in the database contains the User Password that must be verified A RADIUS server can be used for authentication purposes only for accounting purposes only or for both authentication and accounting purposes Up to two servers of each type can be defined Each server of each type Authentication accounting can be defined as either Primary or Secondary Only one server of each type can be defined as Primary However both servers of the same type can be defined as Secondary If two servers of a certain type are defined then upon first trial of an authentication accounting transaction the NPU will attempt to communicate with the Primary server of the relevant type or with the first Secondary server if no server is defined as Primary provided the server s Operation Status is Up If it cannot communicate with this server it will attempt communicating with the other server Upon succeeding to communicate BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 99 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 4 4 1 4 4 4 1 1 100 with a certain server this server is defined as Active and the other one as Standby As long as the NPU succeeds to communicate with an Active Authentication Accounting server it will c
54. conditions will be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fourteen 14 months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser the Warranty Period Alvarion will at its sole option and as Purchaser s sole remedy repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion standard R amp R procedure b With respect to the Firmware Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation for a period of fourteen 14 month from BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Legal Rights invoice date the Warranty Period During the Warranty Period Alvarion may release to its Customers firmware updates which include additional performance improvements and or bug fixes upon availability the Warranty Bug fixes temporary patches and or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates Additional hardware if required to install or use Firmware updates must be purchased by the Customer Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two 2 most recent Software major releases ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLIGENCE IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE
55. described in the next page PPPoE Service PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet Access service provides connectivity between a PPPoE enabled devices at the subscriber s site and a PPPoE aware BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 185 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 1 2 3 186 Access Concentrator behind the Base Station The frames are forwarded only between the Subscribers PCs and the PPPoE Access Concentrator Frames that are not PPPoE Ethertype are discarded In the uplink frames are never relayed but only forwarded to the Access Concentrator In the downlink broadcasts are allowed only in cases of unknown addresses Voice Service The Voice over IP VolP service provides telephony services through an external Voice Gateway connected to the Subscriber Unit s data port The VolP service is designed for Alvarion s Voice Gateways using the proprietary DRAP signaling protocol to identify VoIP sessions and to verify optimal handling of these sessions Upon provisioning of such a service the system automatically handles Signaling and RTP connections establishment including QoS issues NOTE The DRAP based Voice Service is also available when an L2 Service is provisioned DRAP Dynamic Resources Allocation Protocol is a protocol between the Gateway installed behind the Subscriber Unit and the base station The protocol provides an auto discovery mechanism for the Gateway so that no specific
56. double the allocated BW RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth for a G 729 call 8 Kbps codec bit rate with RTP and 20 bytes of voice payload is Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 20 bytes 78 bytes Total packet size bits 78 bytes 8 bits per byte 624 bits PPS Packets Per Second 8 Kbps codec bit rate 160 bits 50 pps Note 160 bits 20 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call Total packet size 624 bits 50 pps 31 2 Kbps RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 31 2 Kbps is 3 12 Kbps QoS Profile The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 31 2 Kbps To accommodate for other traffic types such as RTCP up to 3 1 Kbps Voice Signaling up to 2 Kbps and Data Device Management we allocate to it a total bandwidth of 31 2 x 1 5 46 8 Kbps equivalent to a Packet Size of 936 bits or 117 bytes The SU may BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1 POTS Basic VolP G 729 Service Profile request twice this BW so it will be allocated with up to approximately 94 Kbps This is assumed to be sufficient for all traffic scenarios including Call Waiting Thus the CG 47 QoS Profile parameters are E Packet Size 117 bytes E Sample Interval 20 msec BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 253 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways B23 P
57. is On The NPU adds a 802 1Q header with the original VLAN ID if exists Note that there may be a disparity between the DSCP values and the default 802 1p 0 value 2 802 1p Marking Mode If VLAN Transparency Mode is Off all frames are marked with the configured VPL ID and the 802 1p Marking Value If no VPL ID is configured VPL ID None the 802 1Q header will include a VLAN ID 0 If VLAN Transparency Mode is On all frames are marked with the original VLAN ID and the 802 1p Marking Value NOTE If the Priority Marking Value is set to 0 untagged packets without VLAN ID will be forwarded without any change This is applicable to transparent services and to to non transparent services with no VPL ID If 802 1p classification is used at the SU the original 802 1p tags are replaced by the configured 802 1p Marking Value IfDSCP classification is used at the SU an 802 1Q header is added with the configured VPL ID if VLAN Transparency Mode is Off or the original VLAN ID if VLAN Transparency Mode is On and the 802 1p Marking Value The original DSCP bits are kept 3 DSCP Marking Mode All frames are marked with the configured DSCP Marking Values If 802 1p classification is used at the SU the frames will be transmitted to the operator s network according to the following rules Operation Services Menu If VLAN Transparency Mode is Off the frames will be forwarded with their original 802
58. modules The following tables list the LEDs of the Base Station modules and their associated indications 74 Commissioning Operation Verification Table 3 3 AU IDU LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Power indication E Off AU IDU is not powered E Red AU IDU power supply failed low power E Green AU IDU power is OK ALARM Alarm indication E Off AU IDU is OK E Red AU IDU failure WLINK Wireless link status indication I Off No SU is associated E Green At least one SU is associated WACT IDU transmission indication E Off No IDU transmission E Green IDU transmission OK SP Spare Not Used IP IP activity indication E Off No downlink AU to SU IP activity E Green blinking Downlink AU to SU IP activity ODU1 ODU4 PWR IDU to ODU Power Indication E Off No IDU to ODU power output E Red IDU to ODU power output failed E Green IDU to ODU power output OK ODU1 ODU4 ALRM IDU ODU communication E Off IDU ODU communication OK status E Red IDU ODU communication failure HOT SWAP IDU readiness for hot swap E Off Power to the module is not disconnected the removal AU IDU is not ready for removal E Blue Power to the module can be disconnected and the AU IDU can be safely removed For instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2 2 9 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 75 Chapter 3 Commissioning Table 3 4 N
59. must be installed and handled in full compliance with the instructions provided by such manufacturers as attached to this manual or provided thereafter by Alvarion or the manufacturers Non compliance with such instructions may result in serious BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Legal Rights damage and or bodily harm and or void the user s authority to operate the equipment and or revoke the warranty provided by such manufacturer BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual xi About This Manual This manual describes the BreezeMAX TDD BreezeMAX Base Station equipment Release 1 using SW version 4 0 and details how to install operate and manage the system components This manual is intended for technicians responsible for installing setting and operating the BreezeMAX Base Station equipment and for system administrators responsible for managing the system This manual contains the following chapters and appendices E Chapter 1 System description Describes the BreezeMAX system and its components E Chapter 2 Installation Describes how to install the Base Station system components E Chapter 3 Commissioning Describes how to configure basic parameters and validate units operation E Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Describes how to use the Monitor application for configuring parameters checking system status and monitoring performance E Appendix A Software Upgrade Descr
60. not match any of the applicable Filtering Rules accumulated since the last reset The counter will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status NOTE E Broadcasts and Management frames received from the network whose destination is the NPU are never filtered E ARP messages will be forwarded automatically if the following conditions are met 1 Active Rule Type is L3 L4 2 The L3 L4 Filtering Rules List includes at least one L4 Filtering Rule a defined protocol 3 The Default Action is Allow This is applicable for both interfaces Filtering Examples Example 1 Block All Broadcasts Except ARP and PPPoE To block all broadcasts except ARP and PPPoE define an L2 Filtering Rule that includes all other broadcasts Typically this includes broadcasts with IP Ethertype The parameters of this rule will be E MAC Address FF FF FF FF FF FF HM MAC Address Mask FF FF FF FF FF FF Operation Services Menu HM MAC Address Direction Destination E Ethertype 800 Assuming the intention is to block this broadcast in both directions this Filtering Rule should be included in the L2 Filtering Rules List of both the From Network Filtering and the From Wireless Filtering In addition for both Interfaces the following configuration should be defined E Active Rule Type Layer 2 E Admin Status Enabled E Default Action Deny If broadcasts using other Ethertypes except IP ARP and PPPoE are excepte
61. not occur under regular conditions E SYS Indication of important events and alarms E TRAP Text messages displaying the information supplied by relevant traps The default for all classes is Disable NOTE Enabling the display of selected classes is applicable only for the current Telnet session These parameters affect only the session and are not stored in the device Upon starting a new session or after reseting the unit all classes are disabled Performance Monitoring The Performance Monitoring option enables to view and reset the NPU Ethernet Ports counters The Performance Monitoring submenu includes the following options E Data Port E Management Port Operation NPU Menu E All counters 4 5 4 1 Data Port Counters The Data Port option enables viewing or resetting the Data DATA port counters The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset The counters are reset each time the NPU is reset or upon activating the Reset Counters option The Data Port counters include E Data Port Rx Counters Total Packets Received The total number of packets received on the interface Packets with errors are not counted Management Packets Forwarded The total number of management packets packets whose destination is the NPU and broadcasts received on the Data port and forwarded to the NPU s internal management Packets Forwarded
62. on the authentication port Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for any reason Accounting The Accounting menu enables viewing the status and parameters of defined Accounting servers adding a new server up to a maximum of two or deleting a server from the database The parameters of an existing server cannot be updated to modify the parameters of a server it must first be deleted and then defined again through the Add Server option The Accounting menu includes the following options E Show All E Add Server E Select Server Show All Select this option to view the current status and parameters of all defined Accounting servers For each defined Accounting server the following details are displayed E IP Address E UDP Port E Server Status Primary or Secondary Operation Base Station Menu 4 4 4 3 2 4 4 4 3 2 1 4 4 4 3 2 2 4 4 4 3 2 3 4 4 4 3 3 E Operation Status Up or Down according to the keep alive mechanism E Activity Status Active or Standby indicates whether this is the server currently in use for accounting purposes Add Server Select this option to define a new Accounting server Up to two Accounting servers can be defined You will be prompted to configure the following parameters IP Address The IP address of the Accounting server The default is null IP address must be defined U
63. port The Installer Password consists of a string of up to 20 printable characters case sensitive Bridging Parameters The Bridging Parameters menu enables setting a limit on the maximum number of Ethernet devices behind the SU and configuring the aging time for devices in the SU s bridging table NOTE The SU s Bridging parameters are available only in the NPU They are not available locally in the SU The Bridging parameters are Enable Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices If the Enable Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices parameter is set to Disable the maximum number of supported devices is 512 The default is Disable Maximum Number of Supported Devices This parameter is applicable only when the Enable Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices parameter is set to Enable The available range is from 1 to 512 devices The default is 512 Bridge Aging Time The Bridge Aging Time sets the aging time for all addresses in the SU s Forwarding Data Base The available values are from 1 to 1440 minutes The default is 3 minutes BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 175 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 7 3 9 4 9 7 3 10 4 9 7 3 10 1 176 License The License menu is applicable only to L model CPE It enables viewing the details of installed licenses and loading a new license if a required license is available in the CPE Licenses Bank Best BST AU Advanced Si
64. protected ANT N Type jack 50 ohm lightning protected ODU Power Feeder ODU 1 4 4 x TNC jack lightning protected IDU 1 4 4 x TNC jack lightning protected Power 3 pin 20A D Type plug Amphenol P N GPS Adapter BASE STATION INTERFACE 15 pin D Type jack IDU GPS CMD 9 pin D Type jack IDU GPS 1PPS IN BNC jack ODU GPS RJ 45 jack Specifications Table 1 14 Connectors Base Station Equipment Unit Connector Description Indoor GPS Receiver POWER 4 pins power plug TIME OF DAY CHANNEL 9 pin D Type jack COMMAND CHANNEL 9 pin D Type jack 2 048MHz BNC jack 1PPS BNC jack ANTENNA TNC jack Outdoor GPS Receiver 12 pin round plug 1 5 10 4 Base Station 2 X GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications Table 1 15 Base Station 2 X GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications Unit Description Dimensions cm Weight kg BS ANT 60 2 X V Downtilt Mounting Kit 2 to 4 5 pole 109 3 x 21 3 x 12 4 5 maximum Connector N Type female BS ANT 90 2 X V Downtilt Mounting Kit 2 to 4 5 pole 109 3 x 21 3 x 12 2 5 maximum Connector N Type female BS ANT 120 2 X V Downtilt Mounting Kit 2 to 4 5 pole 109 3 x 20 5 x 11 9 5 maximum Connector N Type female BS ANT 60 2 X DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 100x 12x5 2 maximum Connector 2 x N Type female BS ANT 90 2 X DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 100x 12x5 2 maximum
65. range can be limited by defining a preferred range of BST AU IDs and selecting the best AU in the preferred range If no AU is found in the preferred range the SU will scan the entire range The Best BST AU Parameters menu includes the following options Show The Show option enables viewing the following E Best BST AU Support HM Preferred BST AU ID Preferred BST AU ID Mask E Selected BST AU ID Operation SU Menu E Selected Downlink Rx Frequency E Preferred BST AU ID E Preferred BST AU ID Mask E Best BST AU Table displaying for each AU with which the SU can communicate including the selected AU the following parameters BST AU ID Downlink Rx Frequency MHz SNR dB Rx Antenna 4 9 7 3 10 2 Update The Update option enables configuration of the following parameters changes in Best BST AU parameters take effect only after reset 4 9 7 3 10 2 1Best BST AU Support The Best BST AU Support parameter allows enabling of disabling the Best BST AU feature in the SU If the Best BST AU Support feature is disabled the SU will start scanning in the range defined by the BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask and select the first found AU 4 9 7 3 10 2 2Preferred BST AU ID and Preferred BST AU ID Mask These two parameters define the initial range for scanning in order to find the best AU The SU will select the best AU within this range If no AU is found within this range the SU will continue searching
66. refer to the Traps and Alarms document Traps Display Filter Select to view update the filtering criteria for the Traps Log display The configurable filtering criteria are Minimum Severity The Minimum Severity parameter enables defining the minimum severity filter Traps whose severity is below the defined severity will not be displayed The options are Critical Major Minor Warning and Info The default is Info severity which means that all the traps in the log will be displayed Days The Days parameter enables defining the period for which traps will be displayed The available options are from 1 to 31 days Only traps that occurred within the last N days where N is the value selected for this parameter will be displayed The default is 31 days Show Traps Log Select to view the traps log The traps will be displayed based on the filtering criteria defined by the Minimum Severity and Days parameters in the Traps Operation Base Station Menu 4 4 3 4 4 4 3 4 1 4 4 3 4 2 Display Filtering option up to a maximum of the last 1000 traps For more details refer to the Traps and Alarms document Trap Configuration The Trap Configuration menu enables viewing current parameters of all traps and updating the parameters of a selected trap It also enables viewing traps with modified parameters different from the default and restoring the configuration of all modified traps to their default values Th
67. sending excess traffic to the network Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service MMDS is a licensed wireless service that has the capability to provide broadband access MMDS operates in several parts of the 2 GHz spectrum Maximum Receive Ratio Combining Not Available or Not Applicable Network Access Server A Network Access Server operates as a client of RADIUS The client is responsible for passing user information to designated RADIUS server s and then acting on the response Network Address Translation Basic Network Address Translation Basic NAT is a method by which IP addresses are mapped from one group to another transparent to end users Network Address Port Translation or NAPT is a method by which many network addresses and their TCP UDP ports are translated into a single network address and its TCP UDP ports Together these two operations referred to as traditional NAT provide a mechanism to connect a realm with private addresses to an external realm with globally unique registered addresses Network Interface Card An expansion board you insert into a computer or a built in component that enables the computer to connect to a network Most NICs are designed for a particular type of network protocol and media although some can serve multiple networks Network Interface Unit Non Line Of Sight A term referring to wireless services which don t require a clear open path between sites Network Management Sys
68. server is not available or when the SU is rejected by the RADIUS server provided the unit operates in Quick Service Mode and the SU uses the quick User Password quickynikinyoky A Temporary Service is given a default name of lt SU Name gt lt Number gt A Temporary Service cannot be defined deleted or edited locally using either the Monitor program or SNMP The Services menu enables viewing all Services defining new permanent Services editing details of previously defined permanent Services and removing permanent Services from the database NOTE The proper process of removing a Service is 1 Disable the Service set the Admin Status to Disable 2 Delete the Service If the Service is not disabled prior to being the deleted VLAN ID included in the VLAN List of the deleted Service may still be used by other Services to the same SU that use the same Forwarding Rule as the deleted Service The Services database in the NPU Base Station can hold up to 4095 Services The Services menu also enables viewing and resetting the Service counters Service Parameters The Service s parameters are Name A Service Name consists of up to 32 printable characters A temporary Service is given a default name of lt SU MAC Address gt lt Number gt 4 10 4 3 1 2 Subscriber Name 196 The Subscriber to which the Service is allocated The Subscriber Name must be that of a Subscriber that exists in the database The
69. should be configured according to the parameters configured for the applicable port MGMT or DATA port 2 If you connect directly to the MGMT or DATA port use a crossed Ethernet cable 3 Run the Telnet program connecting to the IP address of the connected port 4 The Enter the password message is displayed Enter the password and press the Enter key to get to the Main menu NOTE x Following three unsuccessful login attempts using incorrect passwords the monitor program is blocked for 10 minutes If you forgot the Installer or Monitor password the Administrator can login with the Administrator password and define a new password for Installer and or Monitor access level If you forgot the Administrator password type help to receive a challenge string consisting of 24 characters Contact Alvarion s Customer Service and provide the challenge string after user identification to receive a temporary password You can use this password only once to enter the program The password must be changed during the session to a different permanent password The administrator should be notified of this new password Five consecutive errors in entering the temporary password will invalidate it In this case repeat this procedure to receive a new challenge string for a new temporary password 4 2 2 Using the Monitor Program This section describes the Monitor program structure and navigation rules HM There are three access levels to the Mo
70. single address The IP Address Mask parameter is not applicable to an Any IP Address 4 10 4 8 2 4 IP Address Direction The direction Source or Destination of the IP Address Indicates whether the range defined by the IP Address and IP Address Mask is for the Source IP Address field or the Destination IP Address field in the IP frame The IP Address Direction parameter is not applicable to Any IP Address 4 10 4 8 2 5 Protocol The protocol of the IP packet The Protocol is defined by a decimal number from 0 to 254 An empty entry means Any and is applicable only if an IP Address range is defined the combination of Any for both the IP Address and Protocol is not allowed 4 10 4 8 2 6 Port The TDP UCP port number which is applicable only if the Protocol parameter is configured to a value of either 6 TCP or 17 UDP The Port is defined by a number in the range from 0 to 65534 An empty entry means Any port 4 10 4 8 2 7 Port Direction 214 The direction Source or Destination of the Port Indicates whether the Port number is for the Source Port field or the Destination Port field in the IP frame The Port Direction parameter is not applicable to Any Port Operation Services Menu 4 10 4 9 4 10 4 9 1 4 10 4 9 2 4 10 4 9 3 4 10 4 9 4 Interface Filtering The Interface Filtering menu enables viewing and editing the filtering mechanisms to be used on frames received from the network From Net
71. the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters B The local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters C Any subnet reachable via the default Gateway of the Data port if Data Port Gateway is defined D The Static Route subnet defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters reachable via the Gateway of the Management port NOTE To prevent the undesired situation where remote management traffic is unintentionally disabled in both the Management and Data ports the Data Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter will be automatically forced to Enabled upon disabling the Management Port Management Traffic and vice versa The Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter is available only in the Monitor program It is not available when using SNMP Data Port Parameters These parameters define the IP and Ethernet parameters for the Data DATA port connecting the base station to the backbone Data Port IP Address The IP address of the Data port The default is 1 1 1 3 Data Port Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the Data port The default is 255 255 255 0 In a binary representation 32 bits the string must comprise a series of contiguous binary 1 s starting from the MSB followed by a series of contiguous binary O s 0 0 0 0 all zeros meaning
72. the SU The combination of VLAN Transparency Service On Hybrid VLAN Mode Off and an empty VLAN List means that all packets are forwarded This combination should be used only if the Service Provider can ensure that there will not be conflicts between VLAN IDs used by devices behind the SU and existing VPL IDs To avoid conflicts a transparent Service Profile cannot be assigned to a Service if the Service s VLAN ID list includes a VLAN ID that is equal to any of the already assigned VPL IDs The combination VLAN Transparency Mode On Hybrid VLAN Mode On and an empty VLAN List means that only untagged frames should be forwarded Such a Service cannot be assigned if there is an assigned non transparent Service with VPL ID None Introduction to Filtering Features The Filtering features allow a network operator to control the traffic in the system by forwarding or discarding packets according to a set of rules based on multiple allow deny criteria This provides both improved network security and better utilization of the wireless medium BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 191 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration The filtering is done at the base station controlling the traffic between the network and the wireless link The filtering features enable Filtering packets arriving from the network interface From Network Filtering using a set of either Layer 2 or Layer 3 Layer 4 Filtering Rules Filtering pac
73. the accounting port and dropped for any reason 4 4 5 Licenses The License feature enables managing the license s granted to CPEs with limited capabilities L model CPEs as well as the general Base Station licenses In an L model CPE the overall throughput the aggregate downlink and uplink MIR in all services allocated to subscribers behind the CPE is limited to 2 Mbps The 106 Operation Base Station Menu 4 4 5 1 4 4 5 2 Network Service Provider may purchase from Alvarion a bank of CPE unlimited bandwidth licenses and allocate licenses to selected L model CPEs on a need basis refer to Section 4 9 7 3 9 for details on assigning a license to a selected CPE Rather than granting licenses only to specific L model CPEs the Network Service Provider may also purchase a Base Station unlimited bandwidth license to override the bandwidth limitations of all L model CPEs served by the Base Station The various licenses CPEs Unlimited Bandwidth Licenses Bank Base Station Unlimited Bandwidth License for all CPEs are supplied as files to be loaded to the Base Station using TFTP A license file can be loaded only to the Base Station specified in the applicable order The Licenses menu enables viewing the current status of CPEs and Base Station Licenses The available options are E Show CPEs License Bank Status E Show Base Station Licenses E Show Temporary Grace Licenses HM Show Grace Licenses Show CPEs L
74. the name of the downloaded SW file This name does not necessarily include clear identification of the SW version number E SW Version which provides unambiguous identification of the SW version The SW Version Control submenu includes the following options E Show versions E Run from Shadow E Set as Main Show Versions Select this option to view the current available versions and the running version HM Main SW File HM Main SW Version MH Shadow SW File E Shadow SW Version E Running From Main or Shadow HM Boot SW Version E Frequency Bands File Version Operation NPU Menu 4 5 2 4 2 4 5 2 4 3 4 5 2 5 Run from Shadow Select the Run from Shadow option to reset the NPU and run the Shadow version after power up To avoid unintentional actions you will be prompted to confirm the request Set as Main When the NPU is running the Shadow version after selecting Reset and Run from Shadow it will boot from the Main version after the next reset Select the Set as Main option if you want to swap versions so that the running version will become the Main version and will be the version to be used after reset To avoid unintentional actions you will be prompted to confirm the request Create Backup The Create Backup option enables creating backup files of the Base Station configuration The backup file contains copies of all the applicable configuration files and databases in the system The followin
75. the same pre defined Forwarding Rule The Forwarding Rule must be one of the names that exist in the database after being defined using the Forwarding Rule menu The Service Type defined in the selected Forwarding Rule must match the one defined for the Service Profile 4 10 4 4 8 Priority Classifier L2 and PPPoE Service Type The Priority Classifier to be used by the Service Profile Not applicable for Voice Services BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 205 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 4 9 Ed 4 10 4 4 10 4 10 4 5 4 10 4 5 1 4 10 4 5 2 206 The Priority Classifier must be one of the names that exist in the database after being defined using the Priority Classifier menu Maximum Number of Voice Calls L2 and Voice Service Type The Maximum Number of Voice Calls parameter sets the upper limit on the number of simultaneous VolP calls that can be supported by the Service using the Service Profile This parameter is applicable only for L2 and Voice Service Profiles and calls made by devices that support DRAP The available range is from 0 to 50 calls NOTE To properly support Call Waiting the Maximum Number of Voice Calls should be configured to a value that is twice the number of actual voice sessions that can be supported simultaneously Service Profile Class A read only parameter available only in Show menu Currently the Class of all Service Profiles is Local Forwarding Ru
76. to take BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 169 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 7 3 4 9 7 3 1 4 9 7 3 1 1 170 place will be to swap the Main and Shadow versions If it is already defined as the Main version no action will take place Configuration The SU Configuration menu enables viewing and updating the SU s parameters The Configuration menu includes the following options E Registration E MAC Standard FDD applicable only to 3 x GHz SUs E Phy Standard FDD applicable only to 3 x GHz SUs HM Multirate and ATPC E Voice Networking Gateways E Ethernet Port E Installer Password E Bridging Parameters E License E Best BST AU Advanced Si E Radio Parameters Advanced Si Registration Parameters The SU Registration Parameters option in the NPU Monitor enables viewing the SU s Registration parameters Registration parameters can be configured only locally at the SU via the Ethernet USB port SU Name The SU Name can only be configured locally in the SU User Name The default SU Name given to a new SU during the definition process see Section 4 9 8 is SU lt SU s MAC Address gt An SU that is added to the database is added as Permanent When an SU that exists in the database as a Permanent SU Operation SU Menu 4 9 7 3 1 2 4 9 7 3 1 3 4 9 7 3 1 4 4 9 7 3 2 4 9 7 3 2 1 is registered it receives services based on its MAC address and the default SU
77. used for compressing speech or audio signal components at a very low bit rate as part of the H 324 family of standards This codec has two bit rates associated with it 5 3 and 6 3 Kbps The higher bit rate provides a somewhat higher quality of sound The lower bit rate provides system designers with additional flexibility Described in the ITU T standard in its G series recommendations BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Glossary G 729 GPS H 323 IB IDU IEEE IEEE 802 1p IEEE 802 16 IEEE 802 1Q IEEE 802 3 A compression technique where voice is coded into 8 Kbps streams There are two variations of this standard G 729 and G 729 Annex A that differ mainly in computational complexity both provide speech quality similar to 32 kbps ADPCM Described in the ITU T standard in its G series recommendations Global Positioning System A system that uses satellites receivers and software to allow users to determine their precise geographic position A protocol suite defined by ITU T for voice transmission over internet Voice over IP or VoIP In addition to voice applications H 323 provides mechanisms for video communication and data collaboration in combination with the ITU T T 120 series standards In Band Indoor Unit Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE pronounced I triple E is an organization composed of engineers scientists and students The IEEE is best known for developin
78. when the GPS system losses satellites synchronization The Indoor GPS provides 1PPS at TTL levels and the control channel is driven by an RS 232 serial interface The unit is powered directly from a 48 VDC power source Outdoor GPS Receiver The all outdoor GPS Receiver is a pole mountable GPS receiver and antenna in a single environmentally protected enclosure The Outdoor GPS Receiver is powered by a 12 VDC power source supplied to it by the NPU via the GPS Adapter The RS 422 interface allows installation at distances up to 100m GPS Adapter Unit The GPS Adapter connects the different GPS units to the NPU adapting the different interfaces Future versions may include an internal GPS module that will allow an all in one low cost solution A future optional addition of OCXO in the GPS Adapter box may provide an improved hold over solution when the GPS is not synchronized The GPS Adapter is powered by 12 VDC supplied by the NPU The GPS Adapter is installed in a 1U high panel the same panel that is used for the ODU Power Feeders Networking Equipment The Base Station is connected to the backbone through standard data communication and telecommunication equipment The NPU aggregates the traffic from all AUs connecting to the backbone through a 100 1000 Base T port The point to point link from the Base Station to the backbone can be either wired or wireless Alvarion offers the DUET 6004 a V5 2 to SIP Access Gateway connecting a C
79. 0 29 28 System Description Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines In This Chapter E Installing the AU ODU on page 30 Installing the Base Station Equipment on page 39 Installing the ODU Power Feeder on page 57 Installing the GPS Adapter on page 61 NOTE x Refer to the BreezeMAX Base Station Installation Manual for more detailed instructions on installation of the Base Station and its components Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 1 Installing the AU ODU The following sections describe how to install the AU ODU including pole mounting the ODU and connecting the cables For more detailed instructions refer to the BreezeMAX TDD Base Station Installation amp Maintenance Manual NOTE x In sectors with diversity either second or fourth order diversity new 2 x GHz AU ODUs with HC08 revision 137 HW ready for 10 MHz bandwidth cannot be connected to the same AU IDU together with older AU ODUs with HC08 version 134 All AU ODUs connected to the same AU IDU must use the same HC08 version 2 1 1 AU ODU Installation Requirements 2 1 1 1 AU ODU Packing List E ODU Any of the following Table 2 1 AU ODU Types Item Description BMAX BST AU ODU HP 2 3 High Power AU ODU operating in TDD mode in the 2 3 GHz band 2300 2360 MHz BMAX BST AU ODU HP 2 3 WCS High Power AU ODU operating in TDD mode in the 2 3 GHz band complying with WCS limitations 2305 23
80. 10 Use the monitor program to configure the IP parameters IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address of the MGMT port These parameters are not affected by the loaded file 11 Reset the system 12 Reconnect the IF cables 56 Installation Installing the ODU Power Feeder 2 3 came 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 2 Installing the ODU Power Feeder Installation Requirements Packing List E A 19 panel can hold up to three ODU Power Feeder modules E ODU Power Feeder module including a DC power cable four 0 5 meter IF cables and four screws Additional Installation Requirements E A grounding cable with appropriate terminations for connecting the unit s ground terminal to the rack or to a ground connection E For installation in a 21 ETSI rack two 21 ETSI rack adapters E Other installation tools and materials BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 57 l Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines AE The ODU Power Feeder The ODU Power Feeder is used to provide power 48 VDC to AU ODU HP High Power ODUs It transfers transparently all signals between the AU IDU and the ODU while injecting DC power received from an external source Each ODU Power Feeder unit can serve up to four High Power ODUs Up to three ODU Power Feeder units can be installed in a 1U high Power Feeder panel 48V 20A max Figure 2 12 ODU Power Feeder Rear Panel Table 2 14 ODU Power Feeder Connectors
81. 15 2350 2360 MHz BMAX BST AU ODU HP 2 3 Extended WCS High Power AU ODU operating in TDD mode in the 2 3 GHz band complying with WCS limitations 2305 2317 2348 2360 MHz BMAX BST AU ODU HP 2 5 A1 BMAX BST AU ODU HP 2 5 A2 High Power AU ODU operating in TDD mode in the 2 5 GHz A1 band 2496 2602 MHz High Power AU ODU operating in TDD mode in the 2 5 GHz A2 band 2590 2690 MHz BMAX BST AU ODU HP TDD 3 4a High Power AU ODU operating in TDD mode in the 3 4 GHz a band 3399 5 3455 MHz BMAX BST AU ODU HP TDD 3 4b High Power AU ODU operating in TDD mode in the 3 4 GHz b band 3455 3500 MHz BMAX BST AU ODU HP TDD 3 5a High Power AU ODU operating in TDD mode in the 3 5 GHz a band 3500 3555 MHz BMAX BST AU ODU HP TDD 3 5b High Power AU ODU operating in TDD mode in the 3 5 GHz b band 3545 3600 MHz 30 Installation Installing the AU ODU 2 1 1 2 12 E Pole mounting kit Additional Installation Requirements The following items are also required to install the ODU E IF cable with two TNC connectors see Section 2 1 3 for details on IF cable types and length E Antenna and RF cable for connecting the antenna to the AU ODU E Grounding cable with an appropriate termination E Installation tools and materials including appropriate means e g a 1 to 4 pole for installing the AU ODU and antenna E An H kit for installation of up to
82. 2 X GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications rrrrrnnrrrnrrrnnnrnnnnn 27 Table 1 16 Base Station 3 5 GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications rrvrnrrrrnnrrnnnrrrnnne 28 Table 2 1 AU ODU Type sccccccccacteececnecassssasetecssancandeecoes tence cnesaeesssneenaudcesazeasdenenstacasstensabecnnaeetes 30 Table 2 2 IF Cables Requirements rrnrrnnnnnornrrrnnannnnvnnrnnnnnnnnrrnrrnnnnnnnnrennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrrnnnennnnnne 32 Table 2 3 Maximum IF Cable Length Double Shielded Cables rrrrrnnnvrnnrnnnrrnnnvrnrrrnnnnnnnnnn 33 Table 2 4 AU ODU N E DE 37 Table 2 5 AU ODU Gonnectors marennnnnrnronnnnnnnnvnennannnvnnnnnnennnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnennnnennnnnnsnenennnnnnenennnnnnne 37 Table 2 6 Power Requirements Base Station Equipment rrrrnannnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnvrrrrnnnvnnvrrnnennnnnnn 41 Tables Te PLEN je 44 Table 2 8 PSU Requirements Configurations with one NPU excluding PSU redundancy 45 Table 2 97 PE E E DE 46 Table 2 10 AU IDU LEDS ssicssinssndaadvucgsstieanendamesdanssncutansndad bedudeqausiimisrautsnadeatdndansianasianaincaoinnidaaidads 48 Table 2 11 NPU Connectors ins ceca cccecssctsiiscontdeasssntceditaccteecandieoe tenuis aceassansncescseeasdneanteenuasaiaid sense 50 Table 2 12 NPU LED os staccgaceasacinanrntanicaeassnntuivudcsxensinnatstacdtapcaduanhwunicuraxadtatisenastannincerinhaeanenniins 50 Table TS A VU EN DE 55 Table 2 14 ODU Power Feeder Connectors rrrnnnvnnnnrnrrnnnannnnr
83. 4 Operation and Administration E Packets Dropped The number of packets dropped from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link identical to Packets Discarded HM Packets Discarded The number of packets discarded from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link identical to Packets Dropped E Average Delay The average packet delay in milliseconds measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds The value is updated every 15 seconds E Delay Variance The variance the standard deviation squared of the packet delay in milliseconds squared measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds The value is updated every 15 seconds E Maximum Delay The maximum packet delay in milliseconds measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds The value is updated every 15 seconds E Data Loss Indicator The percentage of dropped packets out of the total demand measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds The value is updated every 15 seconds DLI 100 Packets Dropped Packets Submitted E CIR Utilization The CIR utilization measured for an RT or NRT connection over the last 15 seconds Not applicable for BE and CG connections k 100 x the minimum between bytes transferred and CIR CIR is calculated for each 1 second interval CIR Utilization equals the average of k over the last 15 seconds and may vary from 0 to 100 The value is updated every 15 seconds
84. 4 7 2 Select Use this option and select an already defined ODU to open the ODU menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected ODU The selected ODU menu includes the following options 4 7 2 1 Show Select this option to view the current value selected option of applicable parameters In addition some general status information is displayed as follows ID Associated Radio Cluster Tx Power ODU Configured Band Admin Status Oper Status HC08 Version CPLD Version Serial Number Temperature Celsius HW Revision HW Configuration Description Max Tx Power The maximum Tx Power supported by the ODU This read only parameter sets the upper limit for the Tx Power parameter 4 7 2 2 Update Select this option to update one or more of the selected ODU s parameters For details on the configurable parameters refer to Section 4 7 4 134 Operation ODU Menu 4 7 2 3 4 7 3 4 7 4 4 7 4 1 4 7 4 2 4 7 4 3 4 7 4 4 Delete Select this option to delete the selected ODU from the database Add Select this option to define a new ODU For details on the configurable parameters refer to Section 4 7 4 ODU Parameters ODU ID A number used to identify the ODU The ODU ID is configurable only when adding a new ODU The available values range from 1 to 24 Associated Radio Cluster The ID of the associated Radio Cluster The available values range from 1 to 6 The va
85. 4 ODUs and 4 antennas that serve a single sector is optionally available NOTE Items marked with an asterisk are available from Alvarion Guidelines for Positioning the AU ODU This section provides key guidelines for selecting the optimal installation locations for the AU ODU and its antenna CAUTION ONLY experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and wherever applicable are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities should install outdoor units and antennas Failure to do so may void the BreezeMAX product warranty and may expose the end user or Service Provider to legal and financial liabilities Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury damage or regulation violations associated with the installation of Outdoor Units or antennas Select the optimal locations for the equipment using the following guidelines E The ODU can be either pole or wall mounted Its location should enable easy access to the unit for installation and testing BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 31 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines ae HM The higher the placement of the antenna the better the achievable link quality E The antenna should be installed so as to provide coverage to all Subscriber Units within its service area NOTE The recommended minimum distance between any two antennas in neighboring sectors is 0 5 meters
86. 49 SU ME eee 158 4 9 1 Show S m uansesanssememmsnn jm hunrdenjadnmdeddinundunsdan de 158 4 9 2 Show Summary BM 161 493 Upgrading SU s IW uusuurmenuaddeienvumbekdsudn enda 161 252 SW Files in Use mani E E 161 4 9 5 Select by NAm Luvuserseassmunndmesiennnneandentendendside 163 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual xvii Contents 4 9 6 Select by MAC Address rrnnrnnnannrnrrnnnannnnvnnnnnnrnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnvennrnnannnnnnrnrnnnsnnnnnnne 163 4 97 VNR 163 4 9 8 Add New Sunne tea etvanteneadesedeeence 183 4 9 9 Clear All Configured SU SW Files rarnnnrrnnnnnnvnnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnrrnrrnnnnnnnnnne 183 4 10S rvic s MEN eee ee 184 4 10 1 Introduction to SQMVICEG wis sivceceei cemented abccnsnssae bende ehpiannteontebeanssaieedaasnbcenehecnetanmabene 184 4 10 2 Introduction to Filtering Features eccseeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeees 191 4 10 3 Common Operations in Services Menu rrrrnnrnnnnnvrnrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrrnnnnernnnn 193 4 10 4 The Services Menu rrnnrnnnnnnnnvvnnrnnnvnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnennnrnnannnnnnrnrnnnnennnrnnntennnenee 193 4 10 5 Defining Service Pr llesuvvvsvosevvmsemmmesusmvennsnsmattnsne 218 4 10 6 Defining Local Permanent Services rrrrnnrnnnnnrnrrrnnnonnnrennrnnnnnnnrrrnrrnnnrennnnee 219 4 10 7 Defining RADIUS Based Services rarnnnrvnnnnnnvnnnnvnnrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnn 219 4 10 8 Pre configured Poll s ruamasgeseiaeean
87. 5 FAX RTCP BW Gulfen 255 BO 068 PFrollbsuLvvuarvssmsoadmesamduqnuvatmaejauquuntusdm 255 B 4 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 Service Profile rrrrnnnnvrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnen 256 BAT Semee Characteristics isere erea ERE R e E ERAEN 256 B 4 2 RTP BW Calculation seansssesaskedustiadesikngsanbneseidkjes spede 256 B 4 3 RTCP BW CG lbuldfonuasssaarmsemmesesanntnuiiastauttjnundd je 256 B 4 4 QoS Profile EET EE 256 B 5 1 POTS Advanced VolP G 711 Service Profile rrrrnnnnvvnnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnner 258 B 5 1 Service Characteristics ae 258 B 5 2 Voice RTP BW Calculation rrrnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnrnrrnnseernnn 258 B 5 3 Voice RTCP BW CA ulfbkuuuuassssnsememb nmeviuge nnee 258 B 5 4 T 38 14 400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculation rerrnnrrrnnnororrrnnnnnnvrnnnrrnnrnnnrrennr 258 B 5 5 FAX RTCP BW Cp nhuassvavegsss RGT 259 BEG 008 Profiles resia a aE EE E AE E aS E ERN 259 E RE EE E OR EE ER RE 261 E ERE E E I A A EET 277 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual xix Figures Figure 1 1 BreezeMAX System Architecture rmrrnnrnnnnnnnnvnnnrrnrrnnnnrnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnernnnnnnnrrrrnnnnennnnnne 4 Figure 2 1 AU ODU HP Pole Installation Using Special Clamps rrrrrrrnnonvrnnrnrnnrnnnrrrrrrnnnrrnnnr 34 Figure 2 2 AU ODU HP Pole Installation Using Metal Band rrnnnnnrrrnnnonnvvnnnnrnnrnnnrrrrrrnnnernnnn 35 Figure 2 3 Bottom Panel of the AU ODU except 2 3 GH
88. 6 4 2 4 6 4 3 Select Use this option and select an already defined Radio Cluster to open the Radio Cluster menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected Radio Cluster The selected Radio Cluster menu includes the following options E Show Select this option to view the current values defined for the selected Radio Cluster s parameters E Update Select this option to update one or more of the selected Radio Cluster s parameters For details on the configurable parameters Refer to Section 4 6 4 HM Delete Select this option to delete the selected Radio Cluster from the database Add Select this option to define a new Radio Cluster For details on the configurable parameters refer to Section 4 6 4 Radio Cluster Parameters Radio Cluster ID A number used to identify the Radio Cluster The Radio Cluster ID is configurable only when adding a new Radio Cluster The available values range from 1 to 6 Name A string of up to 32 printable characters used as the descriptive name of the Radio Cluster This is an optional descriptive parameter The default is an empty string Location A string of up to 255 printable characters used to describe the location of the Radio Cluster This is an optional descriptive parameter BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 131 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 6 4 4 Sector Heading The direction of the geographical sector defined in degree
89. 8 Hybrid VLAN Mode Hybrid VLAN Mode VLAN List Forwarded Packets Exists Only packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN List VLAN List can include up to 16 entries Empty All both untagged and tagged with any VLAN ID Exists Untagged packets and packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN List VLAN List can include up to 15 entries Empty Only untagged frames BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 197 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Note that for each Service Type a maximum of one Service that enables forwarding of untagged packets can be assigned to an SU Forwarding of untagged packets is supported when either Hybrid VLAN Mode is On or Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List is empty It is not possible to define for the same SU two Services of the same Service Type that enable forwarding of untagged packets However the same SU and untagged packets can be associated with two Services of different Service Types excluding the combination of L2 Service and Voice Service 4 10 4 3 1 7 VLAN Classification Mode The VLAN Classification feature enables using VLAN ID in addition to destination MAC address for classification of transparent service downlink traffic before transmission to the destination MAC address The VLAN Classification feature supports applications where multiple VLANs are associated with a single MAC address allowing to assign differe
90. 92 Tables Table 1 1 Number of AU IDUs AU ODUs and Power Feeders Required for Various onfigurations EE ces esaencaagancananeaneddoneasvecenmeaweenciesancee 10 Table 1 2 PSU Requirements Configurations with one NPU excluding PSU redundancy 11 EEE ER 16 Table 1 4 Base Station 2 X GHz Antennas Electrical Specifications rnnrnnnrrrnnvrnvrrnnnnnnnnnn 18 Table 1 5 Base Station 3 5 GHz Antennas Electrical Specifications rrrrrrnnrvrnnrnnnrrnnnrnnnnn 19 Table 1 6 AU IDU to AU ODU Communication rsrnnnnnnvrrnnnnovrrrnnnennvnnnnnnnnvnnnnrnnrrnenernrrrenennnnnnne 20 Table 1 7 Data Communication Ethernet Ports ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeessnaeeeteeaes 20 Table 1 8 Configuration and Management rrnnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrrrnnnernvrrnnnnnnvennnnnnnrnnnerrnrrnnsnennnnee 21 Table 1 9 Environmental Specifications ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 Table 1 10 Standards Compliance General urrnnrnnnnnnnrrnnnnnvvrrnnnennrrnnnnnnnvennnrnnrrnnnerrrrrnnennnnnnne 22 EE SJ 23 Table 1 12 Mechanical Specifications Base Station Equipment rnnnrnnnnvnnnnnnnrrnnnvrnvrrnnnnnnnnnn 24 Table 1 13 Electrical Specifications Base Station Equipment wanrvrnnnnnnnvrnnrvnnrrnnnvnnvrrnnennnnnnn 25 Table 1 14 Connectors Base Station Equipment rerrnnrrnnnrnrvrrnnnnrnvrnnnnnnnvnnnnrnnnrnnnerrrrrnnennnnnnne 26 Table 1 15 Base Station
91. AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual v Legal Rights Limitation WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION NON INFRINGEMENT AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED ALVARION WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS of Liability a ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF USE INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES b TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER NOR SHALL THE AGGR
92. Add New SU Select the Add New SU option to add a new SU to the database The Add New SU sub menu includes the following parameters E SU MAC Address E SW File Name The SW File to be used by the SU Should be either a File Name known to exist in the SU or an SU SW File Name in the NPU E Operation The action to be performed with the specified SW File after the SU connects to the AU None Download Run from Shadow or Set as Main A new SU that attempts to communicate with the base station when the base station operates in Advanced Mode will be registered only if its MAC address exists in the database Clear All Configured SU SW Files Select this option to clear delete the Configured SW File in all Permanent SUs served by the Base Station BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 183 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 10 1 4 10 1 1 184 Services Menu Introduction to Services Services Subscribers and Service Profiles A Service is a virtual connection between a Subscriber s application and the Network Resource The Network Resource could be Internet Content Provider Corporate Network etc The Services are implemented as IEEE 802 16 connections within the wireless domain Each Service can include up to 4 uplink and 4 downlink connections Implementation within the provider s backbone domain depends on the specific backbone network A Subscriber is an entity that may be associated with
93. Base Station Configuration Parameters Device Name Up to 255 printable characters Null Yes Device Location Up to 255 printable characters Null Yes ATPC Enable Disable 1 Disable Enable Yes 2 Enable Disable is temporary until next reset of the NPU or AUs Optimal Uplink RSSI dBm 90 to 60 73 No Operator ID X X X 186 190 0 No X 0 255 Cell ID X X 0 250 No X 0 255 Duplex Mode FDD TDD TDD No Only TDD spplicable to current version DL UL Ratio 1 65 35 50 50 No 2 60 40 3 55 45 4 50 50 5 45 55 6 40 60 7 35 65 See Section 4 4 2 5 2 for limitations External 1PPS Clock 1 Disable Enable No 2 Enable External 16MHz Clock 1 Disable Disable No 2 Enable Base Station Alarms and Traps 226 Operation NPU Parameters Summary Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Traps Display Filter Minimum 1 Critical Info Yes Severity EE 3 Minor 4 Warning 5 Info Traps Display Filter Days 1 31 days 31 days Yes Traps Configuration Admin 1 Disable Enable Yes See 2 Enable Trap Configuration Severity 1 Critical Depends on trap Yes 2 Major 3 Minor 4 Warning 5 Info Trap Configuration Suppression 0 86 400 seconds 0 no Yes Interval dikene kasseres suppression RADIUS General Parameters Shared Secret Up to 16 printable charac
94. Base Station can be defined as Redundant backup to the Master The range is from 1 to 1500 The default is 0 indicating that a Chain Number is not configured yet A valid Chain Number must be configured and this number must be unique in the system to properly support future implementation of chaining GPS Supported This is a read only parameter indicating whether the use of GPS is supported by the Base Station through the Redundant CPLD in the NPU The options are Supported or Not Supported GPS Protocol The GPS Protocol defines the communication protocol with the GPS receiver The available options are None Trimble for Outdoor GPS Receiver and Symmetricom for Indoor GPS Receiver The default is Trimble Time Zone Offset From UTC This is the offset of the local time from UTC Coordinated Universal Time The range is from 12 00 up to 13 00 in 30 minutes resolution The format must be either XX YY or XX YY where YY is either 00 or 30 The default is 02 00 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 109 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 4 6 5 4 4 6 6 4 4 7 110 Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout For initial synchronization a minimum of four satellites must be received properly meeting certain criteria Upon losing the 1PPS clock from the GPS or if the received clock is not considered accurate enough because the number of received satellites dropped below the minimum two satellit
95. Connector 2 x N Type female BS ANT 120 2 X DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 100 x 17x9 5 maximum Connector 2 x N Type female BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 27 Chapter 1 System Description 1 5 10 5 Base Station 3 5 GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications Table 1 16 Base Station 3 5 GHz Antennas Mechanical Specifications Connector N Type female Unit Description Dimensions cm Weight kg BS ANT 60V 3 3 3 8 Mounting kit 2 to 4 pole 50x20x3 1 5 Connector N Type female BS ANT 90V 3 3 3 8 Mounting kit 2 to 4 pole 53 6 x 36 x 3 2 3 Connector N Type female BS ANT 90V 3 3 3 7 Mounting kit 2 to 4 pole 53 6 x 36 x 3 2 3 Connector N Type female BS ANT 120V 3 3 3 8 Mounting kit 0 75 to 2 pole 76 2 x 8 3 x 7 6 2 0 Mechanical tilt 0 to 30 Connector N Type female BS ANT 60 3 5H Mounting kit 2 to 4 pole 48 x 20 x 4 2 Connector N Type female BS ANT 90 3 5H Mounting kit 2 to 4 pole 60 x 25 x 5 5 2 Connector N Type female BS ANT 60 3 5 DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 85 1 x 16 x 6 1 2 maximum Connector 2 x N Type female BS ANT 90 3 5 DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 85 1 x 16 x 6 1 2 maximum Connector 2 x N Type female BS ANT 120 3 5 DP Downtilt Mounting kit 4 to 12 cm pole 68 8 x 17 x 14 5 4 maximum Connector 2 x N Type female Omni ANT 3 4 3 6 Mounting bracket up to 50 mm pole 67 5 tubular 8 diameter
96. DL 89W maximum Rx UL 15W maximum AU ODU HP 3 x GHz from PIU or Power Feeder AVU Tx DL 9OW maximum Rx UL 20W maximum 24W maximum Power Feeder 2W per Channel GPS Adapter from NPU 1 2W maximum Indoor GPS Receiver directly form power source 20W maximum Outdoor GPS Receiver from NPU via GPS Adapter 6W maximum NOTE The PSU s do not supply power to the AU ODUs Up to 6 AU ODUs can be powered directly from the power source via the PIU and the back plane Additional AU ODUs are powered from ODU Power Feeders Example A full 2 x GHz Base Station operating with DL UL ratio of 60 40 with 6 AU IDUs 24 ODUs 4 ODUs are powered via the AU IDUs 20 ODUs are powered by 5 Power Feeders a GPS Adapter and an Outdoor GPS Receiver BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 2 4 Ad 42 Power Consumption of the Base Station including GPS Adapter and Outdoor GPS Receiver excluding the ODUs 16 PIU 65 NPU 1 2 GPS Adapter 6 Outdoor GPS Receiver 24 AVU 6 46 IDU 0 8 PSU Efficiency 481W Excluding the PIU s the total power that should be supplied by PSUs is 465W Since each PSU can support a maximum of 200W we need at least 3 PSUs A fourth PSU will support a 3 1 redundancy When calculating the power requirements associated with the ODUs we should distinguish between the peak power consump
97. DP Port Specifies the UDP port number used by the RADIUS server for accounting transactions Valid values 1 to 65535 The default value is 1813 RFC 2866 requirement Server Status Defines whether this server is Primary or Secondary Each Accounting server can be defined as either Primary or Secondary Only one Accounting server can be defined as Primary However both servers can be defined as Secondary Select Server This option enables selecting an existing Accounting for viewing its status and parameters deleting it from the database or viewing its Statistics counters The selection is based on the server s IP address The available options are E Show Displays current status and parameters For information on displayed details refer to Section 4 4 4 3 1 HM Delete To delete the server from the database E Statistics To display or reset the Statistics Counters for this server The Statistics Counters display traffic information according to the standard RFC 2620 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB as follows BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 105 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Round Trip Time The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Accounting Response and the Accounting Request that matched it from this server Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server This does not include retransmissions Retransmissions The numb
98. EGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS Radio Frequency Interference Statement vi The Subscriber Unit equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device pursuant to ETSI EN 301 489 1 rules and Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial business and industrial environments This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications The Base Station equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device pursuant to ETSI EN 301 489 1 rules and Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in commercial business BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Legal Rights and industrial environments This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operati
99. IU Red Green Power input is out of range or PIU card damaged Chassis is powered by the PIU Green Off Power to PIU is OK PIU is in redundant mode and the chassis is powered from the other PIU Green Green Power to PIU is OK The chassis is powered from the PIU HOT SWAP Off Power from the module to the chassis is not disconnected the PIU is not ready for removal Blue Power from the module to the chassis can be disconnected and the PIU can be safely removed For instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2 2 9 Table 3 6 PSU LEDs LED Status Description PWR ALRM Off Off No power or fatal damage Off Red Power input is out of range or PSU is damaged or PSU is inhibited by NPU Green Off Power is OK and PSU operates properly Table 3 7 AVU LEDs LED Status Description PWR ALRM Off Off No 5V power input Red Red 12V power failed Green Red One or more fans have failed Green Off AVU operates properly BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 77 Chapter 3 Commissioning 323 ODU Power Feeder LEDs To verify the correct operation of the ODU Power Feeder examine the LED indicators located on the front panel of the unit The following table lists the LEDs of the ODU Power Feeder and their associated indications Table 3 8 ODU Power Feeder LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Input power indication E Off ODU Power Feeder is not powered E Green ODU Power Feeder power
100. It is not changeable The currently available Service Type options are 1 L2 2 PPPoE 3 Voice For more details refer to Section 4 10 1 2 VLAN Transparency Mode The VLAN Transparency Mode defines the method of transferring packets to the operator s upstream network When set to On data packets sent from the Base Station to the backbone will be transferred transparently The VPL ID parameter is not applicable to Service Profiles with VLAN Transparency Mode On Also the Forwarding Rule selection parameter is not applicable to transparent Service Profiles All transparent Service Profiles share a single pre configured Forwarding Rule and a pre configured QoS Profile for multicasts For details on these profiles refer to Table 4 20 and Table 4 21 The pre configured Transparent Forwarding Rule can be modified but not deleted BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 201 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 7 4 10 4 4 4 202 E For tagged packets the VPL ID will be their VLAN tag E For untagged packets the VPL ID will be None For packets received from the network the forwarding decision will be according to the packet s VPL ID If the VPL ID is unknown either None or not included in the list of VPL IDs defined for any of the existing non transparent Service Profiles the system will assume this is a transparent VLAN packet if at least one transparent Service is defined and transfer it with the origi
101. Length Double Shielded Cables Cable Maximum Length for AU ODU HP LMR 195 30 meters LMR 240 60 meters LMR 400 150 meters 2 1 4 Pole Mounting the ODU The ODU can be mounted on a 1 to 4 pole using one of the following options E Special clamps and threaded rods are supplied with each unit There are two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit enabling to use the clamps for mounting the unit on diverse pole diameters E The protrusions with grooves on the top backsides of the unit and the protrusion on the bottom backside enable the use of 9 16 wide metal bands not included with the package to secure the unit to a pole NOTE x Install the unit with the bottom panel which includes the LEDs facing downward BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 1 4 1 Pole Mounting the AU ODU HP Using Clamps Figure 2 1 illustrates the method of mounting a High Power AU ODU HP on a pole using the clamps and threaded rods NI Ev V X V X V Figure 2 1 AU ODU HP Pole Installation Using Special Clamps NOTE Ea There is a groove on one end of the threaded rod Insert the threaded rods with the grooves pointing outward as these grooves enable you to use a screwdriver to fasten the rods to the unit fi 34 Installation Installing the AU ODU 2 1 4 2 Pole Mounting the AU
102. MAC addresses of CPEs that are currently included in the Grace License list For each CPE the displayed list includes also the License ID only BW license is applicable in the current version and the expiry date of the grace period Chain Future versions of BreezeMAX will enable chaining of co located Base Stations to fully support intra site synchronization When two or more Base Stations are chained all clocks and additional parameters required to ensure fully Operation Base Station Menu 4 4 6 1 4 4 6 2 4 4 6 3 4 4 6 4 synchronized operation of all sectors are sent from the Master Base Station to other Base Stations The Chain menu includes parameters that must be shared by all Base Stations belonging to the same chain where most of them should be configured only in the Master Base Station they will be read only in other chained Base Stations In the current release chaining is not supported yet and all Base Stations are configured as Master Base Stations The Chain menu includes the following Chain Number In future releases when chaining will be fully supported the Chain Number will be used as a unique identifier of a chain All Base Stations belonging to the same chain should be configured with the same Chain Number The Chain Number can be used by a central management system to guarantee that certain limitations are met in each chain one and only one Base Station should be defined as Master Only one
103. MAX BST AVU Air Ventilation Unit installed Cables Tray kit 2 5 meter DC cable E BMAX BST PIU 1 or 2 per chassis Power Interface Unit s E 2 5 meter DC cable for a redundant PIU One cable is supplied with each chassis E BMAX BST PSU up to 4 per chassis Power Supply Unit s E BMAX BST TDD NPU Network Processing Unit and Monitor cable E BMAX BST AU IDU 4CH up to 6 per chassis Access Unit Indoor Unit s Additional Installation Requirements The following items are also required to install the BST E Ethernet cable straight for connecting the NPU to a Hub Switch NOTE The maximum length of the Ethernet cable is 100m when operating at 100 Mbps and 70m when operating at 1 Gbps E A grounding cable with appropriate terminations for connecting the chassis to the rack or another ground earth connection E For installation in a 21 ETSI rack Two 21 ETSI rack adapters BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 39 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 0 2 40 HM A portable PC for configuring parameters using the Monitor cable supplied with the NPU E Other installation tools and materials BMAX BST SH Chassis Slot Assignments The Base Station chassis comprises 6 3U high slots and 9 6U high slots as shown in Figure 2 5 Cable Tray gt Air Ventillation Unit Figure 2 5 BMAX BST SH Chassis Slot Assignments The Cable Tray the installation kit is supplied with
104. MIR parameter It is used also to prioritize bandwidth allocation to connections where for each QoS Type connections with a shorter CT get higher priority The available options are Short 50 mS Medium 100 mS and Long 200 mS For BE QoS only Short is applicable BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 211 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 7 4 4 10 4 7 5 4 10 4 7 6 4 10 4 7 7 4 10 4 7 8 4 10 4 8 4 10 4 8 1 212 CIR RT and NRT QoS Types CIR is the information transfer rate that the system is committed to transfer under normal conditions The rate is averaged over a minimum increment of time which is defined by the CT parameter The range is from 0 to 12 000 Kbps MIR NRT and BE QoS Types MIR is the maximum information rate that the system will allow for the connection The rate is averaged over a minimum increment of time which is defined by the CT parameter The range is from 1 to 12 000 Kbps MIR cannot be lower than CIR applicable to NRT QoS type Packet Size CG QoS Type The Packet Size parameter defines the amount of data in bytes that is expected for each grant The range is from 64 to 1550 bytes Sample Interval CG QoS Type The Sample Interval parameter defines the time in milliseconds between two successive grants inter arrival time The range is from 5 to 100 milliseconds QoS Profile Class A read only parameter available only in Show me
105. Main HM None Select None to cancel a pending request for another operation an operations will be executed only after the next reset HM Download Select this option to download a specified SW file from the NPU to the Shadow memory of the SU If the specified file already exists in the SU no action will take place E Run from Shadow Select this option to download a specified SW file from the NPU to the Shadow memory of the SU reset the SU and reboot using the Shadow version Note that because the process is controlled by the NPU the SU will continue running from the Shadow version after reset If the specified file already exists as the Shadow version meaning that previously a Download operation was executed for this file name the only actual operation to take place will be to reset and run from Shadow If the specified file is the current Main version no action will take place HM Set as Main Select this option to download a specified SW file from the NPU to the Shadow memory of the SU reset the SU and reboot using the Shadow version and then swap the Main and Shadow SW Version so that the running version which was previously the Shadow version will become the Main version to be used after next reset If the specified file already exists as the running version and it is defined as the Shadow version meaning that previously a Download and Run from Shadow operation was executed for this file name the only actual operation
106. Modular Base Station System Manual 257 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways B 5 B 5 1 Bidet B 5 3 B 5 4 258 1 POTS Advanced VolP G 711 Service Profile Service Characteristics M G 729 codec 20msec sample interval E 1 POTS E T 38 Fax E DSCP priority marking behind the SU is used with the following values 63 RTP traffic 26 RTCP and VolP traffic 0 Data traffic E Single media stream to support Call Waiting Voice RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth for a G 711 call 64 Kbps codec bit rate with RTP and 160 bytes of voice payload is Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 160 bytes 218 bytes Total packet size bits 218 bytes 8 bits per byte 1744 bits PPS 64 Kbps codec bit rate 1280 bits 50 pps Note 1280 bits 160 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call total packet size 1744 bits 50 pps 87 2Kbps Voice RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 87 2 Kbps is 8 72 Kbps T 38 14 400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth with a 20 msec sample interval is as follows BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1 POTS Advanced VolP G 711 Service Profile Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 36 bytes 94 bytes Total packet size bits 94b
107. ODU HP Using Metal Bands Figure 2 2 illustrates the method of mounting a High Power AU ODU HP ona pole using metal bands NE NN Figure 2 2 AU ODU HP Pole Installation Using Metal Band BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 35 l Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 1 5 AU ODU Grounding Screw Impermeability Test Screw Figure 2 3 Bottom Panel of the AU ODU except 2 3 GHz WCS Grounding Screw Impermeability Test Screw Not Used Figure 2 4 Bottom Panel of the AU ODU 2 3 GHz WCS 36 Installation Installing the AU ODU A CAUTION Do not open the impermeability test screw you may impair the sealing of the unit against moisture and humidity Table 2 4 AU ODU LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Power indication E Off Power failure E Green Power to ODU is OK internal 3 3 VDC power supply is OK ALARM IDU ODU communication and E Off IDU ODU communication is OK synthesizer status indication synthesizer is locked E Red IDU ODU communication failure or synthesizer is not locked ETH Not Used Table 2 5 AU ODU Connectors Name Connector Functionality IF TNC jack Connection to the AU IDU ODU Power Feeder Y ANT N Type jack 50 ohm Connection to an external antenna GND Grounding screw Connection to ground earth 2 1 6 Connecting the Cables 2 1 6 1 Connecting the Grounding Cable gt T
108. PU LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Power indication E Off NPU is not powered E Red NPU power failure E Green NPU power is ok ALRM NPU Alarm indication E Off NPU is OK E Red NPU failure BST ALRM Base Station chassis alarm E Off All Base Station modules are OK indication E Red Failure in one or more Base Station modules EXT ALRM External alarm indication E Off No alarm received via the AL IN connector E Red Alarm received via the AL IN connector MASTER Master Slave E Off Secondary NPU backup primary secondary operation indication E Green Primary NPU GPS SYNC GPS IF clock synchronization I Off GPS IF clock synchronization is disabled functionality indication E Green GPS IF clock synchronization is enabled HOT SWAP NPU readiness for hot swap E Off Power to the module is not disconnected the removal NPU is not ready for removal E Blue Power to the module can be disconnected and the NPU can be safely removed For instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2 2 9 76 Commissioning Operation Verification Table 3 5 PIU LEDs LED Status Description PWR MASTER Off Off Chassis is not connected to power Red Off Power is not connected or power input is out of range or PIU card is damaged Chassis is powered by the redundant P
109. Power Supply Unit PSU The single Euro PSU module is a 48 VDC power supply unit Each Base Station chassis can contain up to four PSU modules providing N 1 redundancy configurations The following table displays the number of PSU modules excluding redundant units required for various Base Station configurations Table 2 8 PSU Requirements Configurations with one NPU excluding PSU redundancy Number of AU IDUs Minimum Required Number of PSUs 1 2 1 3 4 2 5 6 3 NOTE x The PSU s do not supply power to the AU ODUs Up to 6 AU ODUs can be powered directly from the power source via the PIU and the back plane Additional AU ODUs are powered from ODU Power Feeders BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines Figure 2 7 PSU Module Front Panel Table 2 9 PSU LEDs LED Status Description PWR ALRM Off Off No power or fatal damage Off Red Power input is out of range or PSU is damaged or PSU is inhibited by NPU Green Off Power is OK and PSU operates properly 46 Installation Installing the Base Station Equipment 2 2 7 Access Unit Indoor Module AU IDU The double Euro Access Unit IDU module contains the wireless MAC and modem and is responsible for the wireless network connection establishment and for bandwidth management Each AU IDU includes four PHY channels that can connect to AU ODUs Figure 2 8 A
110. Receiver The displayed details include E Number Of Received Satellites The number of satellites received by the GPS receiver For proper operation at least four satellites should be received E Longitude The longitude as calculated by the GPS receiver The format is lt xx Deg yy yyy Min A gt where xx is the longitude in degrees yy yyy is in minutes decimal format and A is either N North or S South For example 42 Deg 06 512 Min N Operation Base Station Menu E Latitude The latitude as calculated by the GPS receiver The format is xx Deg yy yyy Min B where xx is the latitude in degrees yy yyy is in minutes decimal format and B is either E East or W West For example 024 Deg 25 290 Min E E Altitude The altitude in meters as calculated by the GPS receiver For example 00048 M HM Calculated Local Date and Time The local date and time using 24 hours clock as calculated using the data received from the GPS receiver and taking into account the configured Time Zone Offset From UTC The display format is hh mm ss dd mm yyyy For example 13 04 23 12 07 2006 E Navigation Processor SW Version The number and date of the Navigation Processor SW Version in the format OxYY 0xZZ dd mm yyyy where XX and YY are the Major and Minor SW Version Numbers in hexadecimal digits respectively For example 0x1A Ox1F 11 3 2006 means that the Major SW Version Number is 1A hex the Minor SW Version Number is 1F hex
111. SI dBm Operator ID Cell ID Duplex Mode DL UL Ratio External 1 PPS Clock gt o o Oo 99 9 External 16 MHz Clock 90 Operation Base Station Menu E Status Information O Slots status displaying for each slot 1 9 the following gt Installed module type or Not Installed for an empty slot gt Operational status OK Fault of an installed module Operational status OK Fault of the AVU module PIU slots status displaying for each PIU slot gt Mode Master Redundant or Not Installed gt Operational status OK Fault of an installed module PSU slots table displaying the status of each slot Not installed OK or Fault E Licenses Status CPEs License Bank status Base Station License Status For details refer to Section 4 4 5 Figure 4 1 Base Station Chassis Slot Assignment 4 4 2 Configuration Select this option to view or configure the general Base Station parameters BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 91 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 4 2 1 4 4 2 2 4 4 2 3 4 4 2 3 1 4 4 2 3 2 92 Device Name The Device Name parameter provides identification information for the Base Station equipment The device name consists of up to 255 printable characters The default Device Name is a null string empty Device Location The Device Location parameter provides location information for the Base Station equipment The loc
112. Table 4 6 Scanning Intermediate Steps Number included Effect on scanned frequencies set None 0 Only Main Frequencies Start Frequency N Main Step as defined above are included in the set 1 Start Frequency is iadded to the set of Main Frequencies All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 125 KHz are added to the scanning set All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 250 KHz are added to the scanning set All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 375 KHz are added to the scanning set All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 500 KHz are added to the scanning set All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 625 KHz are added to the scanning set All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 750 KHz are added to the scanning set O SJ oJ A AJ OJN For a bandwidth of 3 5 MHz All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 875 KHz are added to the scanning set For a bandwidth of 5 MHz All intermediate frequencies defined by Main Frequency 1250 KHz are added to the scanning set For example the Intermediate Steps list 1 2 5 means that the scanned frequencies are Start Frequency Start Frequency 125 KHz Start Frequency 500 KHz Start Frequency N Main Step Start Frequency N Main Step 125 KHz Start Frequency N Main Step 500
113. U IDU Module Front Panel BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 47 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines Table 2 10 AU IDU LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Power indication E Off AU IDU is not powered E Red AU IDU power supply failed low power E Green AU IDU power is OK ALRM Alarm indication E Off AU IDU is OK E Red AU IDU failure WLINK Wireless link status indication E Off No SU is associated E Green At least one SU is associated WACT IDU transmission indication E Off No IDU transmission E Green IDU transmission OK SP Spare Not Used IP IP activity indication E Off No downlink AU to SU IP activity Green blinking Downlink AU to SU IP activity ODU1 ODU4 PWR IDU to ODU Power Indication Off No IDU to ODU power output Red IDU to ODU power output failed Green IDU to ODU power output OK ODU1 ODU4 ALRM IDU to ODU communication status Off IDU ODU communication OK Red IDU ODU communication failure HOT SWAP IDU readiness for hot swap removal For instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2 2 9 Off Power to the module is not disconnected the AU IDU is not ready for removal Blue Power to the module can be disconnected and the AU IDU can be safely removed 48 Installation Installing the Base Station Equipment 2 2 8 Network Processing Unit NPU The NPU module serv
114. U to the Shadow memory of the AU reset the AU and reboot using the Shadow version and then swap the Main and Shadow SW Version so that the running version which was previously the Shadow version will become the Main version to be used after next reset If the specified file already exists as the running version and it is defined as the Shadow version meaning that previously a Download and Run from Shadow operation was executed for this SW File the only actual operation to take place will be to swap the Main and Shadow versions If it is already defined as the Main version no action will take place 4 8 5 2 3 3 SU SW File Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the SUs served by this AU after network entry and the Action to be taken with this file Not applicable for any Permanent SU whose Configured SW File Name is other than None see Section 4 9 7 2 4 2 The SU SW File parameters are 4 8 5 2 3 3 1 Name The Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the SUs served by this AU Should be one of the AU SW Files currently stored in the NPU or None null 4 8 5 2 3 3 2 Action The operation to be performed with the SU SW File None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main Refer to Section 4 9 7 2 4 2 2 for more details on these Actions 146 Operation AU Menu 4 8 5 2 3 4 4 8 5 3 4 8 5 3 1 4 8 5 3 1 1 4 8 5 3 1 2 Clear All Configured SU SW
115. Unit Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE relies on two widely accepted standards PPP and Ethernet PPPoE is a specification for connecting the users on an Ethernet to the Internet through a common broadband medium such as a single DSL line wireless device or cable modem All the users over the Ethernet share a common connection so the Ethernet principles supporting multiple users in a LAN combines with the principles of PPP which apply to serial connections Quadrature Amplitude Modulation A technique used in wireless applications to double the available bandwidth by combining two amplitude modulated signals The two combined signals differ in phase by 90 degrees this technique doubles the bandwidth by combining the two signals at the source before transmission transmitting digital data at a rate of 4 bits per signal change Quality of Service Measure of performance for a transmission system that reflects its transmission quality and service availability Quadrature Phase Shift Keying A data transfer technique used in coaxial cable networks that sends data using modulating signals Four different phases represent data with each signal s information determined by the signal before it For example if a phase stays the same from one signal to the other the information has not changed Remote Authentication Dial In User Service an authentication and accounting system used by many Internet Service Providers ISPs When
116. Us The ODU Power Feeder is used as an additional power source providing power 48 VDC to AU ODU HP High Power ODUs It transfers transparently all signals between the AU IDU and the ODU while injecting DC power received from an external source Each ODU Power Feeder unit can serve up to four High Power ODUs Up to three ODU Power Feeder units can be installed in a 1U high Power Feeder panel The following table displays the number of ODUs and Power Feeder modules required for various radio configurations BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 9 Chapter 1 System Description Table 1 1 Number of AU IDUs AU ODUs and Power Feeders Required for Various Configurations Diversity Mode Number of Sectors Number of ODUs Number of Power AU IDUs Feeders Second Order Diversity 3 6 4 8 1 6 12 2 Fourth Order Diversity 3 12 2 4 16 3 6 24 5 lr 1 2 8 Power Interface Unit PIU The single Euro PIU module is the interface between the Base Station site s DC power source and the Base Station chassis PSUs and external AU ODUs which receive power via the AU IDUs The PIU filters and stabilizes the Base Station input power and protects the system from power problems such as over voltage surge pulses reverse polarity connection and short circuits It also filters high frequency interference radiated emissions and low frequency interference conducted emissions to the
117. Z WCS J rrrrrnnnrrnrrvnnnnnnvvnnrrnnrrnnnernnnn 36 Figure 2 4 Bottom Panel of the AU ODU 2 3 GHz WCS rrnnnnnnvnnnnrrnrnnnnnnnnvnnnrnnnvnnnnrrrrnnnensnnnne 36 Figure 2 5 BMAX BST SH Chassis Slot AssignmentS rnrrnnnnnnrrnnnnonvrrnnnnnnnrnnnernnrnnnrerrrrnerernnnn 40 Figure 2 6 PIU Module Front Panel neoeronrorenannnnnronervvnnnnnnavanvnnnnnenennnnnnnvenenennennnsnnnnenereennn 43 Figure 2 7 PSU Module Front Panel eooorersnonerrnnsvrnnnnnnnvnnnannnvvennnnnnvnnnennnnvnnnnnnvnnenennnnevennnnn 46 Figure 2 8 AU IDU Module Front Panel errrrrrrrnnnvr0eerrrennnnansenvennnnnnrnnnnennnennnrnnnnnnnnnnevenenennn 47 Figure 2 9 NPU Module ge GR 49 Figure 2 10 AVU Drawer Front Panel oeennornrrnsnnnnavnovenvvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnennnnnnennnenennennnnsanannenenennnn 55 Figure 2 11 ODU Power Feeder Front Panel rmrnnnnonnnnnnvvvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnennnnavennnnnnvnennnnnnnenennnnnn 58 Figure 2 12 ODU Power Feeder Rear Panel rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnarnavnnnnnrnrneneennnnn 58 Gr Geom Ackra Front Panel e 62 Figure 2 14 GPS Adapter Rear Panel errrnnnonerrnnnvnonrnnnavonnannnvnnnenannnenvnnnnnennennnnennenensenennennn 62 Figure 4 1 Base Station Chassis Slot Assignment rernnnnvrnnnnnnnrnnnrnnrrrrnnnennrnnnnrnnrnnerrrrrrnnrtennnn 91 Figure 4 2 Filtering Functionality 22 cccccceeeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseneeeeneeeeeeseeeneeeeeeneesseeneneeeeeees 1
118. a aces 88 4 3 5 IN 89 4 36 SU MIOIAU es cactd see cexsaanetaneecechacelauiubendyssnacey E a 89 4 3 7 SEN 89 438 EXT enoe e E E A E E 89 4 4 Base Station Menu ccc saccade etch cates nenindden 90 TT en 90 GUL ERE ER ETT REE NERE 91 443 Alarms and Tips aaserevandsadsesn eee 96 44A RADIUS EE EEE 99 445 LESES iniinis s e 106 EG ge EE EE EE RR ENE NE RE NE 108 Es ET EE EE te dink ean oa edna 110 4 5 NPU Menu ENN EEE 112 4 5 1 re 112 NNN 114 xvi BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Contents 4 5 3 Coal arvavvsegeebrurbenhesmensennntuentmnjtmm t 119 4 5 4 Performance Monna 22542424 area 126 4 6 Radio Cluster Mensen 130 46 1 Show SE pave da Eara E EENE TE E 130 EE ET EE 131 4 63 Adi a E enebarn dad 131 4 6 4 Radio Cluster Parameters rrrrnvnnnnnrnrrnnnnnrnnrnnnannnnvnnnrnnannnnnnrnrnnnnnnnrrnnnennnenne 131 47 ODU Menu ee eee eee eee eee ee 133 4 7 1 Show STINE seen 133 212 SA jr EAEN E E a ERE 134 TT Ads 135 4 7 4 ODU Parameters Lav vamsmsaee eder tenke a Eri 135 4 7 5 Frequency Bands File and Frequency Bands Groups srrrrrrnnnrnnnrnnnrrnnnnrnnnnn 136 48 AU MGI isis escsennsnccanansanncinractannnndecende nratacnuarencwanescncnnnastienaanuestannmsedseeiessniaanaanenatncidtens 138 48 1 Show SIT Eee 138 4 8 2 Upgrading AUSSW Ludsrustmademmlenkeummmn ateitn ddniekrmunnsinse 140 4 8 3 SN SNP ee 140 4 8 4 Sunesen 142 4865 AU S Mee 142 4 8 6 Performance Monitoring u uuustjaigvmielehjniununnebd adm nie 155
119. able for both IP Address and Port The L3 L4 Filtering Rules menu enables defining new L3 L4 Filtering Rule viewing details of previously defined L3 L4 Filtering Rules and removing L3 L4 Filtering Rules from the database It is not possible to edit the parameters of an BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 213 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 8 2 1 existing L3 L4 Filtering Rule The database can hold up to 255 L3 L4 Filtering Rules The configurable L3 L4 Filtering Rule parameters are Rule Name The name of the L3 L4 Rule The L3 L4 Rule Name is a string of 1 to 32 printable characters 4 10 4 8 2 2 IP Address The base IP Address that is used together with the IP Address Mask to define a range of IP addresses A string of 4 decimal numbers where each number is in the range from 1 to 255 separated by dashes An empty entry means Any An Any IP Address means that the filter is defined only by the Protocol field and optionally by the Port and Port Direction for UDP or TCP protocols 4 10 4 8 2 3 IP Address Mask The mask that is used together with the IP Address to define a range of IP addresses A string of 4 decimal numbers where each number is in the range from 1 to 255 separated by dashes In a binary representation the string must comprise a series of contiguous binary 1 s starting from the MSB followed by a series of contiguous binary O s if the range includes more than a
120. agement Port Destination Subnet Mask E Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable 68 Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters of Base Station Table 3 1 Basic NPU Parameters Management Option Parameters DATA port Data Port IP address Data Port Subnet Mask Data Port Gateway Data Port Management VLAN ID Data Port Management Traffic Enable Disable Data Port Speed Authorized Managers per manager IP Address Send Traps Read Community Write Community The following are the guidelines for configuring the basic NPU parameters E All parameters of both ports should be configured Otherwise default values shall be used E If OOB management via a router connected to the Management port is used the parameters should be configured to ensure different subnets for the Data port the Management port local OOB management and the Management Port Destination The Management Port Destination Subnet is the subnet behind a router connected to the Management port NOTE It is highly recommended to use the Management port for local management only Typically the port should be down disconnected CAUTION Do not configure the IP Address of the Management port to 0 0 0 0 as this will cause loss of management connectivity via the Data port E Authorized Manager s must be configured properly to enable remote management using AlvariSTAR or another SNMP based
121. agement of BreezeMAX system components This utility simplifies the installation and maintenance of small size installations by easily enabling the change of settings or firmware upgrade for one Base Station at a time including the managed device s components and associated SUs AlvariCRAFT allows accessing a wide array of monitoring and configuration options including E Device Manager for the selected Base Station including it s NPU AUs and SUs HM Selected unit configuration modification HM Local Service Profiles verification and modification HM Local Service Provisioning E Firmware upgrade for the NPU AUs and SUs E On line performance data monitoring E Export of configuration details to a CSV file E Support for Telnet cut through to the Base Station and http cut through to Gateways behind connected SUs BreezeMAX Service Manager BreezeMAX Service Manager provides centralized management of user authentication and authorization using the industry standard RADIUS protocol The BreezeMAX Service Manager receives from the NPU operating as a NAS the authentication details User Name and Password upon network entry of a new CPE and respond if authentication if verified by matching details in the database by sending properties of the Services that should be granted to the user BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 15 Chapter 1 System Description 1 5 Specifications 1 5
122. an None This menu enables viewing the current AU SW files stored in the NPU and deleting selected file s It also enables defining the Default SW File Name and Default Action for each Operation Mode and deleting the Configured SW Files in all AUs Show Files Select this option to display the AU SW files currently stored in the NPU the Default SW Files and Default Actions For each available SW file the file name and the version are shown Default SW File Standard Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an AU using Standard Operation Mode after installation as well as after each reset Operation AU Menu 4 8 3 2 1 4 8 3 2 2 4 8 3 3 4 8 3 3 1 4 8 3 3 2 4 8 3 4 4 8 3 5 and the Action to be taken with this file Not applicable for any AU whose Configured SW File Name is other than None see SW File on page 145 NOTE The Default SW File Standard option is not applicable to this release that does not support products operating in Standard Operation Mode The Default SW File Standard parameters are Name The Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an AU using Standard Operation Mode after installation as well as after each reset Should be one of the AU SW Files currently stored in the NPU or None null Action The operation to be performed with the Default SW File Standard when an AU using Standard Operation Mode is installed as well as aft
123. and take the module out of the chassis Installing the Base Station Chassis and Modules The indoor equipment should be installed as close as possible to the location where the IF cable s enters the building The location of the indoor equipment should take into account its connection to the power source s and to the base station networking equipment To install the Base Station chassis and modules 1 Attach the Cable Guide to the top panel of the chassis using the screws and washers supplied with the Cable Guide 2 Install the chassis in a 19 cabinet For installation in a 21 cabinet attach suitable ETSI rack adapters to the chassis To provide a sufficient space for the Cable Guide and to allow air flow for preventing over heating leave a free space of at least 1U between the upper covers of the chassis and other units in the cabinet 3 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the ground terminal located on the rear panel of the chassis and firmly tighten the grounding screw Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground connection or to the cabinet if applicable 4 Carefully insert the modules into the relevant slots Secure the modules in their intended locations refer to Section 2 2 9 1 for instructions on modules insertion 5 Place blank covers over all of the unused slots 6 Connect the DATA port of the NPU to the backbone data equipment use a straight Ethernet cable to connect to a hub switch router T
124. and Data Service UL DL Ratio of 65 35 is not supported regardless of Maximum Cell Radius UL DL Ratio of 60 40 is not supported for Maximum Cell Radius of 20 KM or higher E For 5 MHz bandwidth and Data Service UL DL Ratio of 65 35 is not supported for Maximum Cell Radius of 40 KM or higher Operation Base Station Menu A 4 4 2 6 4 4 2 6 1 4 4 2 6 2 For all other combinations of Bandwidth and AU Service Type all DL UL Ratios are supported for all values of Maximum Cell Radius The default is 50 50 A change in the configured DL UL Ratio is applied only after reset CAUTION The DL UL Ratio of all Base Stations in the same coverage area neighboring cells must be set to the same value to ensure optimal performance and avoid uplink saturation Clock The Clock parameters define the source for the main clocks in the system These parameters are applied after reset The Clocks menu enables viewing updating the following parameters External 1PPS Clock The 1PPS Pulse Per Second clock is used to determine the air frame start time Assuming that all systems use the same air frame size and DL UL Ratio then when the 1PPS clock is received from a GPS system this mechanism ensures inter site and intra site synchronization among all sectors preventing cross interference and saturation problems When using the internal 1PPS clock derived from the selected 16 MHz clock source only intra site synchronization
125. annelization disabled Downlink Basic Rate The Basic Rate for all downlinks The default rate is the lowest rate BPSK 1 2 rate 1 Voice Parameters Maximum Number of Voice Calls This parameter sets the upper limit of simultaneous voice calls that will be supported by the AU The range is from O to 300 Voice Calls The default is 50 Operation AU Menu 4 8 5 3 5 2 4 8 6 4 8 6 1 AU Service Type The AU Service Type parameter defines the minimum allocation of symbols in the uplink 5 symbols for typical data only services or 3 symbols for deployments with significant VoIP traffic A minimum allocation of 3 symbols can provide a higher capacity for VoIP calls with a reduced overall throughput for data services The options are Data the default or Voice and Data NOTE In most deployments with both VoIP and Data services it is recommended to use the default Data Service Type Consult with Alvarion s experts whether to use Voice and Data Service Type in certain sectors according to the specific traffic that should be supported AU Service Type can be changed only via the Monitor program not available via SNMP Performance Monitoring The AU Performance menu includes the following options HM Ports Counters HM Burst Error Rate Counters Ports Counters The Ports Counters option enables viewing or resetting the Back Panel and Wireless ports counters The information displayed for each counter is the a
126. any number of devices connected to any number of SUs Each Service associates a certain Service Profile with Subscriber s device s behind a specific SU NOTE The Subscriber entity is not applicable when Services are provisioned using a RADIUS server The Service Profile s properties depend on the Service Type All data Services have the following properties E VLAN ID based Classification Each Service can be associated with up to 16 VLAN IDs enabling creation of VLANs within the wireless domain and differentiation of services to different end users behind the same SU based on VLAN ID classification HM Quality of Service QoS and Priority based Classification Up to 4 uplink and 4 downlink QoS profiles can be assigned to each Service The data will be mapped onto these connections by either IEEE 802 1p or DSCP priority tags This will lead to creation of the corresponding number of Uplink and Downlink connections supporting differentiated services to up to 4 applications based on either IEEE 802 1p or DSCP prioritization schemes In cases where prioritization is not used a single pair of uplink downlink connections is created E Forwarding Rules A Forwarding Rule is assigned to each Service defining various features that define the handling of certain message types in the Operation Services Menu 4 10 1 2 4 10 1 2 1 x 4 10 1 2 2 wireless domain These may include Unicast and Multicast Forwarding rules Qos Prof
127. application BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 69 Chapter 3 Commissioning Ed LA AG 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 70 NOTE If no Authorized Manager is defined in the device it can be managed using SNMP by any station If at least one Authorized Manager is defined the device can be managed only by a station whose parameters match a defined Authorized Manager After the basic NPU parameters have been configured the Base Station can be managed remotely using either Telnet or SNMP based management To enable proper operation of the Base Station and all its components the following parameters must also be configured NOTE The following list includes only parameters that are mandatory for proper operation of the Base Station Configuration of other parameters may be done either at the same time or later Base Station Configuration Parameters E Operator ID M Cell ID E Duplex Mode must be TDD E DL UL Ratio E External 1PPS Clock must be enabled to support 1PPS from GPS E External 16MHz Clock in this release must be disabled RADIUS Parameters RADIUS General Parameters HM Shared Secret RADIUS Authentication At least one Authentication server must be defined to enable RADIUS based provisioning of services HM IP Address Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters of Base Station E UDP Port HM Server Status 3 1 3 3 RADIUS Accounting At least one Accounting server must be def
128. arameters will be applicable only to SUs in the 3 x GHz bands when a SW version supporting APD in FDD mode will be available This menu is not applicable to units in the 2 x GHz bands Base Station ID The Base Station ID is the identifier of the AU to which the SU can connect An SU can be authenticated by an AU only if the Base Station ID and Base Station ID Mask configured in the SU match the Base Station ID configured for the AU After power up the SU will start searching for available AUs in the range defined by the Base Station ID and Base Station ID Mask and will try to connect to the first found AU whose Base Station ID is in the defined range A change in the Base Station ID and Base Station ID Mask will take effect only after resetting the SU BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 171 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 7 3 2 2 4 9 7 3 3 4 9 7 3 3 1 4 9 7 3 3 2 172 The Base Station ID consists of six groups of up to three digits each where the range for each group is 0 to 255 The first three groups define the Operator ID the next two groups define the Cell ID and the sixth group defines the Sector AU ID A change in the Base Station ID is applied only after reset Base Station ID Mask The Base Station ID Mask together with the Base station ID define the AU s that can synchronize with the SU The Base Station ID Mask consists of 6 groups of up to 3 digits each where the range of ea
129. ation name consists of up to 255 printable characters The default Device Location is a null string empty ATPC Parameters BreezeMAX employs an Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC algorithm to dynamically adapt the transmit power of each SU so that it is received by the AU ODU at an optimal level The algorithm is managed by the AU and optimal values are calculated separately for each SU based on the actual level at which it is received by the AU ODU MAP messages transmitted to the SUs include information on the estimated up down power level change required to achieve optimal transmit power level The ATPC menu enables viewing updating the following parameters for all AUs ATPC Enable Disable The ATPC Enable Disable parameter controls whether the ATPC algorithm will be used to determine current optimal transmit level for each SU served by the Base Station The default is Enable NOTE The ATPC algorithm should always be enabled The option to disable it is available to Support certain tests After each reset the Base Station boots with the ATPC enabled disregarding its status before the device was reset Optimal Uplink RSSI The Optimal Uplink RSSI sets the target level at which all transmissions should be received by the AU ODUs for optimal performance Operation Base Station Menu 4 4 2 4 4 4 2 4 1 4 4 2 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 4 2 5 1 A change in the Optimal Uplink RSSI is applied for each AU after reset
130. ay be required for GPS Adapter 1 2W maximum and Outdoor GPS Receiver SW maximum AU IDU 46W maximum 39W typical AU ODU HP 2 x GHz Tx DL 89W maximum 75W typical Rx UL 15W maximum 9W typical AU ODU HP 3 x GHz Tx DL 90W maximum 62W typical Rx UL 20W maximum 14W typical 24W maximum 23W typical ODU Power Feeder Power Source 40 5 to 60 VDC Power Dissipation 2W per channel GPS Adapter 12 VDC from the NPU 1 2W maximum Indoor GPS Receiver Power Source 36 to 72 VDC Power Dissipation 2OW maximum 12W typical Outdoor GPS Receiver 12 VDC from the NPU via the GPS Adapter 6W maximum BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 25 1 5 10 3 Connectors Base station Equipment Table 1 14 Connectors Base Station Equipment Unit Connector Description PIU 48V 3 pin 40A D Type male Amphenol P N 717TWA3W3PHP2V4RRM6 NPU DATA 100 1000Base T RJ 45 with 2 embedded LEDs Cable connection to a PC Crossed Cable connection to a hub Straight MGMT 10 100Base T RJ 45 with 2 embedded LEDs Cable connection to a PC Crossed Cable connection to a hub Straight GPS SYNC IN 15 pin micro D Type jack GPS SYNC OUT 15 pin micro D Type jack ALRM IN 9 pin micro D Type jack ALRM OUT 9 pin micro D Type jack MON 3 pin low profile jack AU IDU ODU 1 ODU 4 4 x TNC jack lightning protected AU ODU HP IF TNC jack lightning
131. ble Disable The Data Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter allows enabling disabling remote management traffic via a router connected to the DATA port This parameter does not affect management traffic via the local subnet defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask If remote management for the Data port is disabled then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager A The local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 123 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 3 3 124 B The local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters C Any subnet reachable via the Gateway of the Management port if defined Note that in this case the Static Route if defined is ignored and the defined Gateway becomes the default Gateway enabling remote management by any PC reachable via the Gateway If remote management is enabled for both the Data Port and the Management port then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager A The local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters B The local subnet of the Data po
132. cable to systems operating in TDD mode BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 153 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 8 5 3 4 1 x 4 8 5 3 4 2 4 8 5 3 4 3 4 8 5 3 4 4 4 8 5 3 5 4 8 5 3 5 1 154 The Multirate menu enables viewing updating the following parameters Multirate Enable Disable The Multirate Enable Disable parameter controls whether the multirate algorithm should be used to determine current optimal rates in both the uplinks and the downlinks The default is Enable NOTE The multirate algorithm should always be enabled The option to disable it is available to enable using a fixed rate to support certain tests After each reset the AU boots with the multirate enabled disregarding its status before the device was reset Uplink Basic Rate The Basic Rate for all uplinks The default rate is the lowest rate BPSK 1 2 rate 1 Minimum Number of Sub Channels This parameter is applicable only if the Uplink Basic Rate is set to BPSK 1 2 rate 1 It enables allowing the Multirate algorithm to use only a fraction of the 16 sub channels available in the uplink This may enable better communication with SUs located at places with marginal link quality The available options are 1 2 4 8 and 16 full bandwidth sub channels A value of 16 means that sub channelization is disabled In the current release 1 and 2 sub channels are not supported The default is 16 sub channels sub ch
133. ccumulated number since the last time the counters were reset The counters are reset each time the AU is reset or upon activating the Reset option NOTE The Back Panel port of the AU is the internal Ethernet port between the AU and the NPU The counters describe the traffic at the Back Panel and Wireless ports as follows E Back Panel Port Counters Data Bytes Received The total number of data bytes received from the Back panel NPU Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Rx The number of bytes in packets discarded due to communication errors between the AU and the NPU BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 155 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 8 6 2 156 Data Bytes Transmitted The total number of data bytes transmitted to the Back Panel NPU Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Tx This count is always 0 No discards HM Wireless Port Counters NOTE Data Bytes Received The total number of data bytes received from the Wireless link MAC management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Rx The number of bytes in packets received from the Wireless link and discarded due to MAC protocol receive errors such as duplicate sequence number wrong sequence number etc not CRC errors Data Bytes Transmitted The total number of data byte
134. ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeeeaes 84 Table 4 2 Default PasswordS sia cccccecassvraasadedeose canteen tedeestees caccieaeestaeGdede ss ne aeetece eae 115 Table 4 3 Frequency B Ndsiaseummmmsminsieseminseblme nt oxansdnededscceansesssscecteatandavacstecsanenannsds 137 Table 4 4 Automatic Association of Channel 1 Upon First Power Up rrrrrrrvronvvvnnnrnnnrnnrrennr 150 xxiv BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Tables Table 4 5 Rates Modulation Schemes and Coding arrvrnrnnnnvrnnnrnnrrrnnnnrnvrnnnnnnnnrnnrrrrrrrnnernnnn 153 Table 4 6 Scanning Intermediate Steps rrrnrnnnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnvnnnnrnnrnnnnnnrnrrennannnnennernnnnnnnnennn 179 Table 4 7 Hybrid VLAN Mode eennnnnnnnnrnnnnnvennrnrnnnnnvnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnrenenrnennnnennnnnnennnnennennnnnnnnennnnnnnen 190 Table 4 8 Hybrid VLAN Mode eennnnnnnnnrnnnnnvennnnrnnnnnvnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnrennrrnnnnnnensnnnnnnnnnennennnsnnnnensnnnnner 197 Table 4 9 Priority Marking Values 2nrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvvvonennvnrnnnnnnnnennnnnannnnnnnennnnnenennnnnnnennnnennennnnnn 205 Table 4 10 Pre Configured Data Service Profiles rrrnnrnnnrnnvrrnnnornvrrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnrrrrrrnnsrennnn 221 Table 4 11 Pre Configured Forwarding Rules for Data Service wwrrrrvrnrrrrrrnnnonvrnnnnannnvennrrrnr 222 Table 4 12 Pre Configured Priority Classifiers for Data Services rrrrnnnrnrrrnnnnnnvvnnnrrnnrrnnrrennr 222 Table 4 13 P
135. ch group is 0 to 255 The first 3 groups form the mask for the Operator ID The next 2 groups form the mask for the Cell ID and the last group forms the mask for the Sector ID A change in the Base Station ID Mask is applied only after reset Phy Standard FDD Parameters The SU Phy menu enables viewing updating the Phy parameters for Standard operation mode These parameters do not affect the operation of the unit when using Advanced Si operation mode For more details refer to Section 4 9 7 3 2 Bandwidth MHz The frequency bandwidth used by the radio A change in the Bandwidth parameter will take effect only after resetting the SU The available options are 1 1 75 MHz 2 3 5 MHz 3 5 MHz 4 7 MHz 5 10 MHz A trial to configure a bandwidth that is not supported by the SU will be rejected Uplink Tx Frequency MHz The Uplink Tx Frequency is the frequency used in the uplink from SU to AU A change in the Uplink Frequency parameter will take effect only after resetting the SU The available values depend on the HW of the SU and the configured Bandwidth for Standard operation mode Operation SU Menu 4 9 7 3 4 4 9 7 3 4 1 4 9 7 3 4 2 4 9 7 3 5 Multirate and ATPC Parameters The Multirate and ATPC mechanism are controlled by the AU except to the option to temporarily control them locally at the SU for testing purposes The Show Multirate and ATPC Status and Parameters option enables viewin
136. col Simplified version of FTP that allows files to be transferred from one computer to another over a network usually without the use of client authentication Time To Live Transmit A unit for measuring the height in rack cabinets 1U 1 75 inches User Datagram Protocol Connectionless transport layer protocol in the TCP IP protocol stack UDP is a simple protocol that exchanges datagrams without acknowledgments or guaranteed delivery requiring that error processing and retransmission be handled by other protocols UDP is defined in RFC 768 Up Link Coordinated Universal Time The reference for the official time used by all countries in the world and it is independent from the time zones The modern implementation of Greenwich Mean Time Virtual Local Area Network A group of devices on one or more LANs that are configured with the same VLAN ID so that they can communicate as if they were attached to the same wire when in fact they are located on a number of different LAN segments Used also to create separation between different user groups Very Large Scale Integration The process of placing thousands or hundreds of thousands of electronic components on a single chip Voice over Internet Protocol Provides an advanced digital communications network that bypasses the traditional public switched telephone system and uses the Internet to transmit voice communication VoIP enables people to use the Internet as the transmission m
137. cond Order Diversity Mode The Show menu includes also the following read only parameters E Tx Power As configured in the Associated ODU E Associated Radio Cluster As configured in the Associated ODU E Uplink Rx Frequency Computed from the configured Downlink Tx Frequency according to the Duplex Separation of the applicable Frequency Band In TDD systems the Uplink Tx Frequency is the same as the Downlink Tx Frequency E Frequency Band The Configured ODU Frequency Band If there is a mismatch between the Configured ODU Frequency Band and its actual band both values will be displayed E Operational Status Multirate Parameters BreezeMAX employs a multirate algorithm to dynamically adapt the modulation scheme and Forward Error Correction FEC coding to actual link conditions The algorithm is managed by the AU taking into account also information received from the served SUs Optimal values are calculated separately for the uplink and downlink for each SU MAP messages transmitted to the SUs include information on the uplink rate that should be used by each SU for its next transmission Operation AU Menu The Basic Rate is the minimum rate to be used by the Multirate algorithm This is also the rate to be used for downlink broadcasts and multicasts Broadcasts and multicasts messages are not acknowledged so that the ARQ mechanism cannot be used and there is no way to guarantee that all intended recipients will
138. condary Each Authentication server can be defined as either Primary or Secondary Only one Authentication server can be defined as Primary However both servers can be defined as Secondary Operation Base Station Menu 4 4 4 2 3 Select Server This option enables selecting an existing Authentication for viewing its status and parameters deleting it from the database or viewing its Statistics counters The selection is based on the server s IP address The available options are E Show Displays current status and parameters For information on displayed details refer to Section 4 4 4 2 1 Delete To delete the server from the database E Statistics To display or reset the Statistics Counters for this server The Statistics Counters display traffic information according to the standard RFC 2618 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB as follows Round Trip Time The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from this server Access Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this server This does not include retransmissions Access Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to this server Access Accepts The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from this server Access Rejects The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid
139. configuration is needed and the Gateway can automatically locate and register with the base station The protocol uses a few simple messages enabling a Voice Gateway to request resources when calls are made and the base station to dynamically allocate them Using the DRAP solution has the following advantages E Maintain telephony toll quality over the wireless network dynamically allocate Continuous Grant CG connections for active calls maintaining the QoS and low jitter needed for toll quality voice services E Allocate CG bandwidth only for the duration of the call the air resources are allocated and released according to the DRAP messages which are based on the VoIP signaling This dynamic allocation ensures efficient use of the air resources E Prevent callers from placing calls if a sector is overloaded the operator can control and limit the maximum number of concurrent calls per wireless sector and per end user voice gateway Thus the operator has complete control of its network and the resources in it Operation Services Menu 4 10 1 3 4 10 1 4 E Automatic support of Codec changing in a VoIP call the DRAP messages update the BreezeMAX equipment on any Codec change or subsequent bandwidth allocation change during the call hence the exact required bandwidth is always provided This is essential in fax transmissions where the call might begin with one Codec and switch to another to accommodate the fax tran
140. d similar Layer 2 Filtering Rules should be defined for these Ethertypes with the broadcast MAC Address and these rules should be added to the applicable Layer 2 Filtering Rules Lists Example 2 Block DHCP Server behind SU To prevent the use of a DHCP server behind an SU define the following L3 L4 Filtering Rule HM IP Address Any empty E Protocol 17 UDP Port 67 the source port of the DHCP server E Port Direction Source This Filtering Rule should be included in the L3 L4 Filtering Rules List of the From Wireless Filtering In addition the following configuration should be defined for the From Wireless Filtering Interface E Active Rule Type Layer 3 4 E Admin Status Enabled E Default Action Deny BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 217 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 11 4 10 4 12 4 10 5 218 MAC Addresses Deny List The MAC Addresses Deny List menu enables viewing and editing the MAC Addresses Deny List This list is used to deny services to MAC Addresses behind SUs Uplink frames whose source MAC address matches any of the entries in the list and downlink frames whose destination MAC address matches any of the entries in the list will be discarded The MAC Addresses Deny List menu also enables viewing and resetting the MAC Addresses Deny List Counters which display for each of the entries in the list the number of frames that were discarded because they match t
141. d later to the NPU using an updated file obtained from Alvarion BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 137 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 8 AU Menu The AU menu includes the following options Show Summary SW Files in NPU Select Following is a detailed description of these options 4 8 1 Show Summary Select this option to view the current status of all AUs For each applicable slot 1 4 7 9 the display includes the following information 138 AU Slot ID Status Installed Not Installed Fault Status only for an installed AU Configured SW File Name The name of the AU SW File that should be used to upgrade an AU after being installed as well as after each reset Should be either None an empty string or one of the AU SW Files available in the NPU This is the SW File defined in the SW Versions Control of the AU see Section 4 8 5 2 3 Configured SW Version The SW Version of the Configured SW File described above Configured Action The operation to be performed with the Configured SW File when the AU is installed as well as after each reset None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main This is the Action defined in SW Versions Control menu of the AU see Section 4 8 5 2 3 SW Download Status only for an installed AU The status of the last SW download operation or None Operation AU Menu E Configured SU SW File Name The name of th
142. d submitted to the Data port Packets Submitted from Slot 2 The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 2 and submitted to the Data port Packets Submitted from Slot 3 The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 3 and submitted to the Data port Packets Submitted from Slot 4 The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 4 and submitted to the Data port Packets Submitted from Slot 7 The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 7 and submitted to the Data port Packets Submitted from Slot 8 The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 8 and submitted to the Data port Packets Submitted from Slot 9 The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 9 and submitted to the Data port Packets Discarded on Tx Always 0 Currently packets are not discarded on Tx Management Port Counters The Management Port option enables viewing or resetting the Management MGMT port counters The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset The counters are reset each time the NPU is reset or upon activating the Reset Counters option The Management Port counters include Packets Received Packets Discarded on Rx Packets Transmitted Packets Discarded on Tx Operation NPU Menu 4 5 4 3 All Counters The All Counte
143. d to any person or firm or reproduced by any means electronic and mechanical without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice The software described in this document is furnished under a license The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license Information in this document is subject to change without notice Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein Any changes or modifications of equipment including opening of the equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd will void equipment warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for It could also void the user s authority to operate the equipment Some of the equipment provided by Alvarion and specified in this manual is manufactured and warranted by third parties All such equipment
144. d with the Configured SW File when the SU is connected as well as after each reset Null do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main SW Download Status The status of the last SW download operation or None SU IDU Type Normal Basic Universal IDU or IDU NG 4D1W Number of Gateways The number of Alvarion Gateways connected to the SU including IDU NG 4D1W if exists Service Fault Status OK or reason for denying services to the SU The reason can be 1 Loop problem A loop was detected on the Ethernet side of the SU An rbNetworkingError Trap will be sent and services to this SU will be denied until resetting the SU from the network NPU side provided the problem no longer exists The problem is detectable through periodical every 5 seconds transmissions to the Ethernet link of SNAP packets with AA AA 03 in the header and the destination MAC address is 00 10 E7 00 00 01 If the SU receives this packet from the Ethernet it BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 159 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration x 160 NOTE means that there is a loop and the SU will send an appropriate message to the NPU Another loop avoidance mechanism that is transparent to the operator is performed by the NPU The NPU scans packets received from the network DATA port and verifies that the SRC MAC in the received packet does not match any of the addresses in the NPU s bridging table
145. ddress MAC Address Control Number a number computed from the MAC Address that can be used for verification purposes User Name SU Name SU Type G gt oO o 99 9 9 Operation Mode Standard for first generation BreezeMAX system or Advanced Si Advanced Self Install for WiMAX ready systems supporting Self Install SU In the current release only Advanced Si mode is applicable Organization Name Address Country SU Status Permanent or Temporary Connected AU Slot ID SUID SU IDU Type Number of Gateways Service Fault Status E Configured SW Details Configured SW File Name Configured SW Version Configured Action E Uplink Downlink Parameters D 9 g Uplink RSSI dBm Uplink SNR dB Uplink Current Rate Downlink RSSI dBm 164 Operation SU Menu Downlink SNR dB Downlink Current Rate E General HW Parameters g Ke o 9 Serial Number RF Card HW Revision Boot Version Cumulative Power On Time hours The cumulative power on time of the SU since first power up Main Card HW Revision Main Card HW Configuration HM SW Versions information Ke Main SW File Name Main SW Version Shadow SW File Name Shadow SW Version Running From Main or Shadow HM MAC Parameters Base Station ID Base Station Mask E Phy Parameters Ke gt Bandwidth MHz Uplink Tx Frequency MHz ATPC Suppo
146. dvanced VoIP G 729 1 POTS T 38 Fax G 729 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval DSCP priority marking 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 1 POTS no Fax G 711 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval no priority marking Operation Services Menu 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 711 1 POTS T 38 Fax G 729 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval DSCP priority marking For more details on defining Service Profiles for Generic 3rd party VoIP devices refer to Appendix B Except for the Basic PPPoE Internet Access pre configured Service Profiles all pre configured Data Service Profiles use L2 Service Type to ensure transport of all L2 and L3 protocols It is recommended to use the L2 Best Effort Internet Access pre configured Service Profile as the Default Data Service Profile in Quick Mode The following tables provide details on the pre configured Service Profiles Forwarding Rules Priority Classifiers and QoS Profiles Table 4 10 Pre Configured Data Service Profiles Name Service Type VPL ID Forwarding Rule Priority Classifier Internet Access L2 L2 Null Internet Access L2 BE Asymmetric Internet Access PPPoE PPPoE 11 Internet Access PPPoE BE Asymmetric Gold Teleworking L2 12 Gold Teleworking Gold Asymmetric Silver Teleworking L2 13 Silver Teleworking Silver Asymmetric Bronze Teleworking L2 14 Bronze Teleworking Bronze Asymmetric Gold LAN to LAN L2 15 Gold LAN to LAN Gold Symmetric Si
147. e Profiles the system will assume this is a transparent VLAN packet if at least one transparent Service is defined and transfer it with the original VLAN tag or untagged if there is no VLAN tag For transparent services VLAN Classification Mode can be set to On to enable downlink classification based on both the MAC Address and VLAN ID to support applications with multiple VLAN IDs per a single MAC address All Services assigned to the same SU must be configured with the same VLAN Classification Mode Either On or Off If VLAN Classification Mode is On only a single VLAN ID can be defined for the Service This means that the allowed combinations are E Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List includes a single VLAN ID E Hybrid VLAN Mode is On and the VLAN List is empty For transparent services it is also possible to configure an Access VLAN to be used with untagged packets received on the Ethernet port of the SU This parameter is applicable only for a transparent service with Hybrid Mode set to On or a transparent service with Hybrid Mode set to Off and an empty VLAN list A maximum of one Access VLAN can be defined per SU Hybrid VLAN Mode of operation enables classification of both tagged and untagged packets or untagged packets only according to the following rules Table 4 7 Hybrid VLAN Mode Hybrid VLAN VLAN List Forwarded Packets Mode Off Exists Only packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN L
148. e supported by the ODU The actually supported range is E 3 5 GHz units 24 to 34 dBm E 2 x GHz units with HCO8 version 134 25 to 36 dBm E 2 x GHz units with HCO8 version 137 new ODU HW ready for 10 MHz bandwidth 30 to 36 dBm The default is 28 dBm will be automatically changed to 30 in new 2 x GHz units with HCO8 version 137 If the Diversity Mode is set to Fourth Order Diversity the Tx Power of the ODUs associated with Channels 2 4 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1 If the Diversity Mode is set to Second Order Diversity the Tx Power of the ODU associated with Channel 2 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1 Channels 3 and 4 are not used in Second Order Diversity Mode NOTE In sectors with diversity either second or fourth order diversity new 2 x GHz AU ODUs with HC08 revision 137 HW ready for 10 MHz bandwidth cannot be connected to the same AU IDU together with older AU ODUs with HC08 version 134 All AU ODUs connected to the same AU IDU must use the same HC08 version Admin Status The transmit on off status of the ODU The default option is Disabled Frequency Bands File and Frequency Bands Groups The Frequency Bands Configuration file defines the characteristics of each of the frequency bands supported by the system These characteristics include Operation ODU Menu E Lowest Downlink Frequency E Highest Downlin
149. e ODU connectors of AU IDUs Additional AU ODU HP units should be powered by ODU Power Feeder s Installation Installing the Base Station Equipment dd Air Ventilation Unit AVU Figure 2 10 AVU Drawer Front Panel The 2U high 84 HP wide AVU includes a 1U high integral chamber for inlet airflow and a 1U high fan tray with an internal alarm module To support a high availability Base Station the fan tray includes 10 brush less fans where 9 fans are sufficient for cooling a fully loaded chassis To further support high availability the chassis can operate with the hot swappable fan tray extracted from it for a period of time sufficient for replacing it up to 10 minutes Table 2 13 AVU LEDs LED Status Description PWR ALRM Off Off No 5V power input Red Red 12V power failed Green Red One or more fans have failed Green Off AVU operates properly If the red ALRM LED is on while the PWR LED is green it indicates a failure of at least one fan Although the Base Station chassis may continue operating with one failed fan it is recommended to replace the AVU as soon as possible To replace an AVU drawer Release the 4 screws securing the AVU to the chassis Using the handle take out the faulty chassis Insert a new AVU drawer and close the screws The replacement should be completed in less than 10 minutes BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 55 Chapter
150. e SU software file that should be used to upgrade an SU upon network entry for all SUs in this sector Not applicable to any SU whose Configured SW File Name is other than None Should be either one of the SU SW Files available in the NPU or an empty string for None E Configured SU SW Version The SW Version of the Configured SU SW File described above E Configured SU Action The operation to be performed with the Configured SU SW File after network entry None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main E Maximum Number of Voice Calls The maximum number of voice calls that can be supported by the AU E Active Voice Calls only for an installed AU The number of currently active voice calls handled by the AU E AU IDU Type only for an installed AU The type of the AU IDU module The options are Two Channels Four Channels Two Channels HP Four Channels HP The HP suffix indicates the AU IDU is capable of supporting higher currents up to 3 5 Ampers of 54 VDC power supply from the PIU via the IF cable to each ODU In the current release all AU IDUs are Four Channels HP E Operation Mode only for an installed AU The air protocol used by the AU The defined operation modes are Standard used in first generation BreezeMAX systems and Advanced Si used in the WiMAX ready systems supporting Self Install SUs In the current release only Advanced Si Operation Mode is applicable
151. e available options are E Show Trap Status E Admin Status E Severity E Suppression Interval Show Traps Status Select this option to view a list of all traps and their parameters For each trap the following details are displayed E Trap ID E Name E Admin Status the default Admin Status for all traps is Enabled E Default Severity E Current Severity E Suppression Interval in seconds The default Suppression Interval is 0 which means no suppression Admin Status The Admin Status menu enables viewing a list of all traps with Admin Status Disabled updating the Admin Status of a selected trap and restoring the Admin Status of all traps to the default Enabled status The Admin Status menu includes the following options BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 97 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 3 4 4 98 E Show Disabled Traps List Displays all traps with Admin Status Disabled the default Admin Status for all traps is Enabled E Update Enables modifying the Admin Status of a selected trap E Restore Defaults Enables restoring the Admin Status of all traps to Enable Severity The Severity menu enables viewing a list of all traps with Severity that differs from the default severity updating the Severity of a selected trap and restoring the Severities of all traps to the default severities The Severity menu includes the following options E Show Traps with Modified Se
152. e counter displays the number of frames matching the Rule accumulated since the last reset The counter will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status Active Rule Type The Active Rule Type parameter defines which of the Filtering Rules List is used The available options are Layer 2 and Layer 3 4 The default option is Layer 2 Admin Status The Admin Status parameter defines whether the filtering mechanism is enabled or disabled The default option is Disabled BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 215 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 9 5 4 10 4 10 216 Default Action The Default Action parameter defines the action to be taken for a frame matching any of the applicable Filtering Rules Deny discard or Allow forward If the Default Action is Allow all frames matching any of the applicable Filtering Rules will be forwarded and all other frames will be discarded If the Default Action is Deny all frames matching any of the applicable Filtering Rules will be discarded and all other frames will be forwarded NOTE L3 L4 Filtering Rules are applicable only to IP packets If the Default Action is Allow non IP packets will be forwarded although they do not match any of the applicable Forwarding Rules The default option is Deny The menu also enables viewing and resetting the Non Matching Counter which displays the total number of frames that did
153. e either Enabled or Disabled Select Disabled to disable the Service 4 10 4 3 1 10Operation Status A read only display of the operational status that is available in the Show menus only Up means that the Service is currently in use 4 10 4 3 2 Performance The Performance sub menu enables viewing and resetting the connections counters of the Service For each connection in each direction the following information is displayed Connection ID and direction Connection Type BE NRT RT or CG QoS Profile Parameters The values of the relevant QoS Profile s parameters Bytes Submitted The number of bytes submitted by upper layers to this connection Bytes Transmitted The number of bytes transmitted to the wireless port through this connection including retransmissions Bytes Retransmitted The number of bytes retransmitted to the wireless port through this connection Bytes Dropped The number of bytes dropped from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link identical to Bytes Discarded Bytes Discarded The number of bytes discarded from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link identical to Bytes Dropped Packets Submitted The number of packets submitted by upper layers to this connection Packets Transmitted The number of packets transmitted to the wireless port through this connection excluding retransmissions BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 199 Chapter
154. e option An SNMP agent incorporated into the NPU enables extensive In Band IB management of the Base Station and all its registered SUs Out Of Band OOB management is supported through a dedicated 10 100 Base T interface A serial RS 232 port supports local configuration monitoring and debugging Two NPU modules can be used to provide a 1 1 redundancy scheme The redundancy mechanism to be supported in future releases will be based on a Master lt gt Slave principle where the slave is in passive mode and is constantly updating all the learning tables and networking parameters of the master card Access Unit AU IDU The double Euro AU IDU module contains the WiMAX ready MAC and modem and is responsible for the wireless network connection establishment and for bandwidth management Each AU IDU connects to the NPU via the back plane In addition each AU IDU connects to all other AU slots via the back plane over a shared bus System Description Base Station Equipment 1 2 4 1 2 5 1 2 5 1 1 25 2 Each AU IDU includes four channels using a common PHY and MAC that can connect to up to four outdoor radio units according to the selected diversity mode refer to Section 1 2 5 below for more details The AU IDU module connects to the AU ODUs via Intermediate Frequency IF cables carrying full duplex data control and management signals between the AU IDU and the AU ODU as well as power 48 VDC and 64 MHz synchroni
155. e wireless link even if they are intended for devices on the wireless link Broadcast Relaying L2 and Voice Service Type The Broadcast Relaying parameter determines whether the AU performs broadcast relaying When the Broadcast Relaying parameter is enabled broadcast packets originating from devices on the wireless link are transmitted by the AU back to the wireless link devices as well as to the backbone If disabled these packets are sent only to the backbone and are not sent back to the wireless link Unknown Forwarding Policy L2 and Voice Services Type The Unknown Forwarding Policy parameter determines the mode of controlling the flow of information from the backbone to the wireless media Select from the following options 1 Reject The AU will transmit unicast packets only to those addresses that the AU knows to exist on the wireless link side 2 Forward Enables the transmission of all packets except unicast packets sent to addresses that the AU recognizes as being on its wired backbone side Multicast VLAN ID The Multicast VLAN ID parameter is applicable only to Services assigned to SUs with SW version below 2 0 The Multicast VLAN ID is the VLAN ID to be attached to mulicast messages in order to enable full support of the VLAN feature by SUs with SW version below 2 0 In SUs with SW version below 2 0 it was necessary to use behind the SU a VLAN switch with binding capability to support multiple VLAN IDs The VLAN sw
156. ecurity Inc The acronym stands for Rivest Shamir and Adelman the inventors of the technique The RSA algorithm is based on the fact that there is no efficient way to factor very large numbers Deducing an RSA key therefore requires an extraordinary amount of computer processing power and time The RSA algorithm has become the de facto standard for industrial strength encryption especially for data sent over the Internet Received Signal Strength Indicator A signal or circuit that indicates the strength of the incoming received signal in a receiver Radio amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment The R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC governs the marketing and use of R amp TTE equipment With the exception of a few categories of equipment the Directive covers all equipment which uses the radio frequency spectrum It also covers all terminal equipment attached to public telecommunication networks BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 271 Glossary RT RTCP RTP SIP SLA SME SNAP 272 Real Time Real Time service is designed to meet the needs of Real Time Variable Bit Rate RT VBR like services characterized by requirements for guaranteed rate and delay such as streaming video or audio These services are dynamic in nature but offer periodic dedicated requests opportunities to meet real time requirements Because the subscriber equipment issues explicit requests the protocol overhead and latency i
157. edium for telephone calls by sending voice data in packets using IP rather than by traditional circuit switched transmissions of the PSTN Virtual Private Link A virtual connection between two points on the network such as a base station and a service provider or corporate network Identified by the VPL ID with functionality that is similar to VLAN ID VLAN on the backbone network BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Glossary VPN WAN WCS WEEE WIMAX Virtual Private Network A private network of computers that s at least partially connected by public lines A good example would be a private office LAN that allows users to log in remotely over the Internet an open public system VPNs use encryption and secure protocols like PPTP to ensure that data transmissions are not intercepted by unauthorized parties Wide Area Network A computer network that spans a relatively large geographical area Wide area networks can be made up of interconnected smaller networks spread throughout a building a state or the entire globe Wireless Communications Services The variety of services available using frequencies in the 2 3 GHz band for general fixed wireless use Waste Electronic and Electrical Equipment The purpose of Directive 2002 96 EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE is as a first priority the prevention of waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE and in addition the reuse rec
158. el use to cover a cell of 360 with 4 sectors using frequency reuse 1 The following figure describes the multi channel use to cover a cell of 360 with 4 sectors using frequency reuse 1 2 Fl F2 Channd 4 F2 1 2 5 3 209 Order Diversity Multiple channel configuration with second order diversity allows coverage of one sector with space diversity by a single AU IDU and two ODUs connected to channels 1 and 2 The same frequency and transmit power are set for both ODUs The two ODUs served by the same AU IDU share a common MAC and modem 8 System Description Base Station Equipment 1 2 5 4 49 Order Diversity Multiple channel configuration with fourth order diversity allows a single sector coverage by a single AU IDU with 4 ODUs In each sector both space and polarization diversities are implemented using dual polarization slant antennas The channels are paired channels 1 and 2 form one pair channels 3 and 4 form the second pair The two ODUs connected to each pair are connected to the same dual polarization antenna The same frequency and transmit power are set for all four ODUs All ODUs served by the same AU IDU share a common MAC and modem Channd 3 Ey Fl The Base station s PIU can support a maximum current of 35 A 40 5 VDC 1 2 6 Power Feeder Using proper design considerations up to six AU ODU HP units can be powered directly from the Base Station via the back panel and AU ID
159. elay of 6 symbols NOTE The actual value that the system will use is a multiple of the the one way delay for a single basic time element N 10 km for a bandwidth of 3 5 MHz or N 7 5 km for a bandwidth of 5 MHz where N is a an integer from 1 to 6 The value configured for the Maximum Cell Radius will be up rounded to the nearest applicable value The default is 20 km Operation AU Menu 4 8 5 3 2 4 8 5 3 2 1 4 8 5 3 3 4 8 5 3 3 1 Phy Parameters The Phy menu enables viewing updating the Bandwidth parameter Bandwidth The frequency bandwidth used by the radio A change in the Bandwidth parameter will take effect only after resetting the AU The Admin Status of all Channels belonging to the same AU must be disabled to enable a configuration change in the Bandwidth parameter The available options are 1 1 75 MHz 2 3 5 MHz 3 5 0 MHz 4 7 MHz 5 10 MHz The current Bandwidth values applicable for systems operating in TDD Mode are 3 5 MHz and 5 MHz The AU will reject any selection of a Bandwidth not supported by it The default is 3 5 MHz Multi Channel Parameters Each AU can include up to 4 Channels with Channels IDs from 1 to 4 corresponding to up to 4 ODU connectors Each ODU connector channel can be connected to an ODU The Multi Channel menu includes the following options E Show Summary E Diversity Mode E Select Following is a description of these options Show Summary Se
160. enabled Bytes Retransmitted The number of unacknowledged bytes that were retransmitted Retransmissions are applicable only to BE and NRT connections provided the ARQ mechanism in the AU is enabled Retransmission Rate Retransmission Rate in percents is defined as 100 Bytes Retransmitted ARQ Enabled Bytes Transmitted NOTE In the current release ARQ mechanism in the AU should not be enabled Burst Error Rate Counters In the downlink each burst uses a single rate and may include data intended for several SUs In the uplink each burst is from a different SU also using a single rate The Burst Error rate Counters option enables viewing or resetting the Burst Error Rate counters The information displayed for each rate in uplink and downlink is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset For each direction uplink downlink the displayed information includes the following statistics for each rate E Total Burst E Error Bursts E Error Rate The counters are reset each time the SU is reset or upon activating the Reset option Operation SU Menu 4 9 7 5 4 9 7 6 4 9 8 4 9 9 Show MAC Addresses Behind SU Select this option to view a list of the MAC Addresses of the devices behind the SU If VLAN behind the SU is used the VLAN ID used by each device is displayed next to its MAC Address Delete This option enables deleting the selected SU from the database
161. eparated by Yes commas where each entry is from 1 to 4094 Null is for No VLAN Up to 16 entries when Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off Up to 15 entries when Hybrid VLAN Mode is On Hybrid VLAN Mode 1 Off Yes 2 On VLAN Classification Mode 1 Off Yes 2 On Access VLAN 1 4094 Yes Admin Status 1 Disabled Yes 2 Enabled Services Service Profiles Parameters Service Profile Name Up to 32 printable characters Yes BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 237 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Service Type Applicable only for new Service Profiles Yes Add 1 L2 2 PPPoE 3 Voice VLAN Transparency Mode 1 Off Yes 2 On VPL ID 0 4094 or null for No VPL ID Yes Priority Marking Mode 1 Transparent Yes 2 802 1p 3 DSCP Priority Marking Value 802 1p 0 7 Yes DSCP 0 63 Forwarding Rule A Forwarding Rule Name up to 32 Yes printable characters that exists in the database Priority Classifier A Priority Classifier Name up to 32 Yes printable characters that exists in the database Maximum Number of Voice 0 50 Yes Calls Services Forwarding Rule Parameters Forwarding Rule Name Up to 32 printable characters Yes Service Type Applicable only for new Service Profiles Yes Add 1 L2 2 PPPoE Unicast Relaying Applicable only for L2 Service
162. er cord to the ODU Power Feeder s DC socket located on the rear panel Connect the other end of the power cord to the 48 VDC power source Connect the IF cable s that should already be connected at the other end to the AU ODU HP s to the appropriate ODU connector s To avoid transmissions at undesired frequencies verify that the frequency and bandwidth parameters are properly configured before connecting the IF cables Installation Installing the GPS Adapter 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 1 1 2 4 1 2 Installing the GPS Adapter Installation Requirements Packing List E A 19 panel can hold also ODU Power Feeder modules E GPS Adapter module including a 2m NPU to GPS Adapter cable and four screws Additional Installation Requirements E A grounding cable with appropriate terminations for connecting the unit s ground terminal to the rack or to a ground connection E For installation in a 21 ETSI rack two 21 ETSI rack adapters E Other installation tools and materials BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 61 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 4 2 The GPS Adapter The GPS Adapter connects the different GPS units to the NPU adapting the different interfaces Future versions may include an internal GPS module that will allow an all in one low cost solution A future optional addition of OCXO in the GPS Adapter box may provide an improved hold over solution when the GPS is not synchronized
163. er each reset None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main Refer to Section 4 8 5 2 3 2 2 for more details on these Actions Default SW File Advanced Si Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an AU using Advanced Si Operation Mode after installation as well as after each reset and the Action to be taken with this file Not applicable for any AU whose Configured SW File Name is other than None see SW File on page 145 The Default SW File Advanced Si parameters are Name The Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an AU using Advanced Si Operation Mode after installation as well as after each reset Should be one of the AU SW Files currently stored in the NPU or None null Action The operation to be performed with the Default SW File Advanced Si when an AU using Advanced Si Operation Mode is installed as well as after each reset None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main Refer to Section 4 8 5 2 3 2 2 for more details on these Actions Delete a File Select this option and enter the name of an existing AU SW file to delete it from the NPU s memory Clear All Configured AU SW Files Select this option to clear delete the AU Configured SW File in all AUs BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 141 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 8 4 4 8 5 4 8 5 1 142 Select Use this opti
164. er of RADIUS Accounting Request packets retransmitted to this server Retransmissions include retries where the Identifier and Acct Delay have been updated as well as those in which they remain the same Response The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server Malformed Responses The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or unknown types are not included Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets containing invalid authenticators received from this server Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This counter is incremented when an Accounting Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Accounting Response a timeout or retransmission Timeouts The number of accounting timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well asa timeout A send to a different server is counted as an Accounting Request as well as a timeout Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the accounting port Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on
165. eration and Administration 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 88 The NPU s Main Menu The Main menu of the NPU Monitor program includes the following options 1 Base Station 2 NPU 3 Radio Cluster 4 ODU 5 AU 6 SU 7 Services X Exit Base Station Menu The Base Station menu enables to view general base station status information to configure general base station parameters and to view active alarms or traps log For details refer to Section 4 4 NPU Menu The NPU menu enables configuring the NPU s DATA and MGMT ports defining authorized managers managing the NPU s SW versions and viewing current status and configurations For details refer to Section 4 5 Radio Cluster Menu The Radio Cluster menu enables viewing the details of existing Radio Clusters defining new Radio Clusters updating the parameters of an existing Radio Cluster and deleting a Radio Cluster from the database For details refer to Section 4 6 ODU Menu The ODU menu enables viewing the status and configuration details of existing ODUs configuring the parameters of new ODUs including pre configuration of ODUs that are not yet installed updating the parameters of existing ODUs and deleting ODUs from the database For details refer to Section 4 7 Operation The NPU s Main Menu 4 3 5 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 AU Menu The AU menu enables configuring the parameters of selected AUs including pre config
166. ernet access via IP or PPPoE tunneling VPNs and Voice over IP Service recognition and multiple classifiers that can be used for generating various service profiles enable operators to offer differentiated SLAs with committed QoS for each service profile BreezeMAX offers an innovative solution for a Self Install CPE including all the features embedded capabilities and supplementary tools that support easy installation by a non professional user and fully automated network entry authentication and services provisioning The elements that enable and support the Self Install solution include E 4 channels Access Unit and high power radios at the Base Station m 274 or 4th order transmit diversity at the Base Station System Description Introducing BreezeMAX m 4 order receive diversity at the Base Station using Maximum Receive Ratio Combining MRRC E Uplink sub channels using OFDMA 16 for increased service efficiency and improved link budget E A high power CPE with an integral antenna array providing 360 degrees coverage with smart selection of Tx and Rx antennas An optional wall window mounted antenna to extend the coverage area E Automatic frequency scanning and best Access Unit Base Station selection algorithms in the CPE E Enhanced Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC and dynamic rate selection multirate optimized for multiple sub channels in the uplink E Centralized CPE authentication and service pr
167. ers of Base Station on page 68 E Operation Verification on page 74 Chapter 3 Commissioning 3 1 Sided Configuring Basic Parameters of Base Station NPU Parameters Required for Management After completing the installation process as described in the preceding chapter some basic NPU parameters must be configured using the Monitor application via the MON port of the NPU These parameters are necessary to enable remote management using SNMP or Telnet If the NPU is in the default factory configuration or if the IP parameters of either the Data or Management port are known you may configure the parameters using Telnet You may also use AlvariCRAFT provided you know the IP parameters of one port and the Authorized Managers list in the NPU is either empty default or includes the IP address of the AlvariCRAFT station Refer to Chapter 4 for information on how to access the Monitor application either via the MON port or via Telnet and how to use it NOTE The default Installer password is installer Refer to the AlvariCRAFT User Manual for information on how to use it The basic parameters are listed in Table 3 1 Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the applicable parameters Table 3 1 Basic NPU Parameters Management Option Parameters MGMT port E Management Port IP address E Management Port Subnet Mask E Management Port Gateway E Management Port Destination Subnet HM Man
168. ervices Name Type CIR Kbps MIR Kbps CT BE 64 Best Effort NA 64 Medium BE 128 Best Effort NA 128 Medium RT 6 Real Time 6 NA Short RT 11 Real Time 11 NA Short 224 Operation Services Menu Table 4 19 Pre Configured CG QoS Profile for Generic non DRAP VolP Services Name Type Packet Size Bytes Sample Interval msec CG 38 Continuous Grant 94 20 CG 47 Continuous Grant 117 20 CG 88 Continuous Grant 218 20 CG 108 Continuous Grant 270 20 The following tables provide details on the pre configured Profiles used for Transparent Services VLAN Transparency Mode is ON Table 4 20 Pre Configured Forwarding Rule for Transparent Services Name Service Unicast Broadcas Unknown Multicast Multicast Type Relaying t Relaying forwarding QoS VLAN Policy Transparent L2 Enable Enable Forward Transpar Null ent NOTE x The name of the Transparent Forwarding Rule cannot be edited Table 4 21 Pre Configured QoS Profile for Transparent Services Name Type CIR Kbps MIR Kbps CT Transparent Best Effort NA 128 Long BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 225 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 11 NPU Parameters Summary Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated
169. es the local 1PPS clock will be generated using the available 16 MHz clock After a certain time defined by the Hold Over Passed Timeout parameters described below it is assumed that due to clock drifts there might be interferences among sectors belonging to the Base Station and sectors belonging to neighboring Base Stations If the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout parameter is set to Enable the Base Station will stop transmitting after this timeout unless the number of properly received satellites has increased again to four or more to prevent interferences to the sectors belonging to other Base Stations If it is set to Disable transmissions will continue indefinitely at the expense of potential interferences to sectors belonging to other Base Stations The default is Disable Hold Over indefinitely Hold Over Passed Timeout Min This parameter defines the Hold Over timeout after which there might be interferences to other sectors When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is enabled transmissions will stop after this timeout When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is disabled this timeout is used to generate a trap indicating that there might be interferences to neighboring sectors The range is from 0 to 2880 minutes The default is 30 minutes GPS Info The GPS Info menu displays read only information received from the GPS receiver when available Currently this information is available only from the Outdoor GPS
170. es as the central processing unit that manages the base station s components and the SUs served by it It also aggregates the traffic from the AU modules and transfers it to the IP backbone through a dedicated Gigabit Fast Ethernet interface ALRM I PAR ast pg Q MASTER Figure 2 9 NPU Module Front Panel BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines Table 2 11 NPU Connectors Name Connector Functionality DATA 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Connection to the backbone Cable connection to a with 2 embedded LEDs hub switch router Straight MGMT 10 100Base T RJ 45 Connection to OOB management with 2 embedded LEDS Cable connection to a PC Crossed Cable connection to a hub switch router Straight GPS SYNC IN 15 pin micro D Type jack Connection to a GPS Adapter or in the future to another NPU that supplies synchronization signals GPS SYNC OUT 15 pin micro D Type jack Not used currently Supply of synchronization signals to another unit ALRM IN 9 pin micro D Type jack Not used currently Connections to external alarm indicators 3 alarm inputs NC or NO ALRM OUT 9 pin micro D Type jack Not used currently Connections for activation of external devices 4 dry contact pairs MON 3 pin low profile jack Access for debugging and configuration using the Monitor program Table 2 12 NPU LEDs Name Descrip
171. et Uplink Basic Rate 1 BPSK 1 2 BPSK 1 2 Yes 2 BPSK 3 4 not applicable for TDD 3 QPSK 1 2 4 QPSK 3 4 5 QAM16 1 2 6 QAM16 3 4 7 QAM64 2 3 8 QAM64 3 4 Minimum Number of 1 2 4 8 16 16 Yes Sub Channels 1 and 2 not supported in current release Downlink Basic Rate 1 BPSK 1 2 BPSK 1 2 Yes 2 BPSK 3 4 not applicable for TDD 3 QPSK 1 2 4 QPSK 3 4 5 QAM16 1 2 6 QAM16 3 4 7 QAM64 2 3 8 QAM64 3 4 AU Voice Parameters Maximum Number of Voice 0 300 50 Yes Calls 232 Operation NPU Parameters Summary Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated AU Service Type 1 Data Data No 2 Voice and Data Available only via Monitor SU SW Files in NPU Default SW File Standard Not applicable for current release Name A name of an SU SW File that exist in the Yes NPU Action 0 None Yes 1 Load 2 Run from Shadow 3 Set as Main SU SW Files in NPU Default SW File Advanced Si Name A name of an SU SW File that exist in the Yes NPU Action 0 None Yes 1 Load 2 Run from Shadow 3 Set as Main SU Unit Control Parameters SU Status 1 Permanent Permanent Yes 2 Temporary SW File Name A name of an SU SW File that exist in the Yes NPU SW File Action 0 None Yes 1 Load 2 Run from Shadow 3 Set as Main SU Registration Parameters Name Read only U
172. etwork surveillance monitoring and configuration capabilities that they require in order to effectively manage the BWA network while keeping the resources and expenses at a minimum AlvariSTAR is designed to offer the network s OA amp M staff with a unified scalable and distributable network management system AlvariSTAR system uses a distributed client server architecture which provides the service provider with a robust scalable and fully redundant network management system in which all single points of failure can be avoided AlvariSTAR provides the following BWA network management functionality E Device Discovery E Device Inventory E Topology E Fault Management E Configuration Management E Service Management E Data Collection E Performance Monitoring E Device embedded software upgrade E Security Management E Northbound interface to other Network Management Systems Embedded with the entire knowledge base of BWA network operations AlvariSTAR is a unique state of the art power multiplier in the hands of the service provider that enables the provisioning of satisfied customers AlvariSTAR System Description Management Systems 1 4 2 1 4 3 dramatically extends the abilities of the service provider to provide a rich portfolio of services and to support rapid customer base expansion AlvariCRAFT Alvarion s AlvariCRAFT is an SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol application designed for on line man
173. external power source Each Base Station chassis contains two slots for an optional 1 1 PIU redundancy One PIU is sufficient to support a fully populated chassis Two PIU modules provide redundant power feeding two input sources while avoiding current flow between the two input sources Power Supply Unit PSU The single Euro PSU module is a 48 VDC power supply unit Each Base Station chassis can contain up to four PSU modules providing N 1 redundancy configurations Table 1 2 displays the number of PSU modules excluding redundant units required for various Base Station configurations without NPU redundancy one NPU System Description Base Station Equipment Table 1 2 PSU Requirements Configurations with one NPU excluding PSU redundancy ER 1 2 10 1 2 10 1 Number of AU IDUs Minimum Required Number of PSUs 1 2 1 3 4 2 5 6 3 Air Ventilation Unit AVU The 2U high AVU includes a 1U high integral chamber for inlet airflow and a 1U high fan tray with an internal alarm module To support high availability Base Station the fan tray includes 10 brush less fans where 9 fans are sufficient for cooling a fully loaded chassis A failure in any of the fans is indicated by both the front panel LEDs and a trap that is sent to the management system To further support high availability the chassis may operate with the hot swappable fan tray extracted from it
174. fice Home Office A term that refers to the small or home office environment and the business culture that surrounds it Typically it refers to an office or business with ten or fewer computers and or employees Source Subscriber Unit Transmission Control Protocol Connection oriented transport layer protocol that provides reliable full duplex data transmission TCP is the part of the TCP IP suite of protocols that is responsible for forming data connections between nodes that are reliable as opposed to IP which is connectionless and unreliable Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A set of protocols developed by the U S Department of Defense to allow communication between dissimilar networks and systems over long distances TCP IP is the de facto standard for data transmission over networks including the Internet Time Division Duplex is a duplexing technique dividing a radio channel in time to allow downlink operation during part of the frame period and uplink operation in the remainder of the frame period Time Division Multiplexing Technique in which information from multiple channels can be allocated bandwidth on a single link based on pre assigned time slots Bandwidth is allocated to each channel regardless of whether the station has data to transmit BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 273 Glossary TFTP Tx UDP UL UTC VLAN VLSI VoIP VPL 274 Trivial File Transfer Proto
175. fined frequency f1 N 0 875 2 The Downlink Frequencies of all Channels of the same AU should belong to the same Frequency Bands Group see Section 4 7 5 E Admin Status The Admin Status must be disabled to enable changes in the Configured ODU Frequency Band of an associated ODU If the Configured ODU Frequency Band differs from the actual band supported by the ODU a BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 151 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 8 5 3 4 152 mismatch trap will be sent by the AU upon trying to associate it with a Channel and the association will be rejected The Admin Status of all Channels belonging to the same AU must be disabled to enable a configuration change in the Bandwidth parameter If the Diversity Mode is set to Fourth Order Diversity the Downlink Tx Frequency and Admin Status of Channels 2 4 are not configurable they are set automatically to the same values configured for Channel 1 The Tx Power of the ODUs associated with Channels 2 4 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1 If the Diversity Mode is set to Second Order Diversity the Downlink Tx Frequency and Admin Status of Channel 2 are not configurable they are set automatically to the same values configured for Channel 1 The Tx Power of the ODU associated with Channel 2 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1 Channels 3 and 4 are not used in Se
176. for a period of time sufficient for replacing it up 10 minutes GPS GPS is used to synchronize the air link frames of Intra site and Inter site located sectors to ensure that in all sectors the air frame will start at the same time and that all sectors will switch from transmit downlink to receive uplink at the same time This synchronization is necessary to prevent Intra site and Inter site sectors interference and saturation assuming that all sectors are operating with the same frame size and with the same DL UL ratio The GPS clock required is 1PPS with accuracy of 10 and maximum jitter of 100ns These GPS clock requirements can be reached by indoor or outdoor installed GPS unit when it is synchronized to at least 4 satellites Two types of GPS Receivers are available from Alvarion HM Indoor GPS Receiver with an outdoor antenna HM Outdoor GPS Receiver A GPS Adapter is required to provide the interface between the NPU and the GPS Receiver Indoor GPS Receiver The Indoor GPS Receiver comprises a GPS receiver integrated with a stable OCXO oscillator within a unit designed for mounting in a standard 19 inch rack An up BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 11 Chapter 1 System Description 1 2 10 2 1 2 10 3 La Lad to 50 meter coaxial cable connects it to an active antenna The indoor installed GPS system is able to provide up to 40 hours of clock holdover with a maximal drift of 50 microseconds
177. g 207 Unit Control AU 144 NPU 114 SU 167 Unknown Forwarding Policy 207 Update General Service Parameters 194 ODU 134 Uplink Tx Frequency SU Phy Standard FDD Parameters 172 Uplink Basic Rate AU 154 Uplink QoS Profiles 209 Uplink Upper Priority Limits 209 V VLAN Classification Mode 198 VLAN List 197 VLAN Transparency Mode 201 Voice Parameters AU 154 Voice Service 186 Voice Networking Gateways SU 173 VoIP 1V Pre Configured Profile 220 VoIP 2V Pre Configured Profile 220 VPL ID 202 W Write Community Authorized Manager 125 288 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual
178. g backup file types can be created E Full The entire Base Station configuration excluding Passwords and basic IP parameters of the MGMT and DATA ports IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway E Profiles All the profiles associated with services Service Profiles Forwarding Rules Priority Classifiers QoS Profiles E Profiles and Services All the profiles and configurations associated with service General Service parameters Subscribers Services Service Profiles Forwarding Rules Priority Classifiers QoS Profiles E Filtering All the configurations of Filtering Rules Interface Filtering and MAC Address Deny List E Traps The configuration parameters for all traps Upon selecting the backup type option you will be requested to confirm the request After confirmation a message is displayed indicating that the backup file creation is in process Upon successful completion of the process a completion message will be displayed If a backup file of the same type already exists in the NPU you will be asked whether to overwrite the existing file If there was an error in the process of creating a backup file an error message will be displayed specifying the reason BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 117 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration gt 4 5 2 6 118 To upload download the Backup File After the backup file has been created it can be uploaded using a DOS based TFTP Client app
179. g standards for the computer and electronics industry In particular the IEEE 802 standards for local area networks are widely followed A QoS method A three bit value that can be placed inside an 802 1Q frame tag Also known as WIMAX A group of broadband wireless communications standards for metropolitan area networks MANs developed by a working group of the IEEE The IEEE 802 1Q standard defines the operation of VLAN Bridges that permit the definition operation and administration of Virtual LAN topologies within a Bridged LAN infrastructure The 802 1Q specification establishes a standard method for inserting VLAN membership information into Ethernet frames A tag field containing VLAN and or 802 1p priority information can be inserted into an Ethernet frame carrying VLAN membership information A Local Area Network protocol suite commonly known as Ethernet Ethernet uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access bus with Collision Detection CSMA CD This method allows users to share the network cable However only one station can use the cable at a time A variety of physical medium dependent protocols are supported BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 265 Glossary IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11g IETF IF IP IPsec ISP 266 The IEEE 802 11b also referred to as 802 11 High Rate or Wi Fi An extension to 802 11 standard for wireless Ethernet networks that applies to wireless LANS and provides 11 Mbps t
180. g the current status of the applicable parameters The Set Rates option can be used to set uplink and downlink rates per SU only when Multirate is disabled Show The Show option enables viewing the current status of the following parameters E Uplink RSSI dBm E Uplink SNR dB E Uplink Rate E Downlink RSSI dBm E Downlink SNR dB E Downlink Rate E ATPC Support E Tx Power dBm Set Rates The Set Rates option is available only when the Multirate algorithm is disabled in the AU see Section 4 8 5 3 4 allowing to set the Uplink Current Rate and the Downlink Current Rate to any of the available values The defaults are the last rates used by the Multirate algorithm before it was disabled For SUs that join the cell when the Multirate algorithm is disabled the defaults are the applicable Basic Rates For the available Rate values see Table 4 5 Voice Networking Gateways The Voice Networking Gateways option enables viewing details on the Voice Networking Gateways connected to the SU This is applicable only for Alvarion s Gateways supporting the DRAP protocol For each Gateway the following details are provided BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 173 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 7 3 6 4 9 7 3 6 1 4 9 7 3 6 2 174 E Gateway Type E IP Address E VLAN ID E Number Of Active Calls applicable only for Voice Gateways The following gateways are currently available from Alvari
181. grading to a new SW version is controlled by the NPU and is performed using one of the SU SW files installed in the NPU If the specified SU SW file does not exist in the SU it will be downloaded to the SU and the requested operation will be executed as described below If it already exists in the SU then actual loading is not necessary The following options are available in the SW Version Control menu E Show SW Versions E SW File 4 9 7 2 4 1 Show SW Versions Select this option to view the following information E Configured SW the version to be used network entry Details Configured SW File Name Configured SW Version Configured Action HM SW Versions in SU Main SW File Name Main SW Version Shadow SW File Name Shadow SW Version Running From Main or Shadow 168 Operation SU Menu E Available Versions in NPU The available SU SW File Names and the SW Version of each file 4 9 7 2 4 2 SW File Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the SU after network and the Action to be taken with this file 4 9 7 2 4 2 1 Name The Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the SU after network entry Should be one of the SU SW Files currently stored in the NPU or None null 4 9 7 2 4 2 2 Action The operation to be performed with the SW File after network entry of the SU None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as
182. hat is defined as such in the database is provisioned with the permanent Service s defined for it in the database if any The Services are provisioned based on the SU s MAC Address A Temporary SU not defined as Permanent in the database will be authenticated and provisioned with the Service s defined for it by the RADIUS Authentication server The authentication and service provisioning are based on the SU Name User Name and User Password The SU will be added to the database as a Temporary SU BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 187 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration If rejected by the RADIUS Authentication server or RADIUS Authentication server is not available then the service provisioning for a temporary SU depends on Service Mode In Advanced Service Mode the SU will be rejected no services In Quick Service Mode the SU will be able to use default services based on the Default Service Profile s provided it uses the quick User Password quickynikinyoky It is possible to define up to two Default Service Profiles one for PPPoE services and one for L2 or Voice services note that L2 service can support also Voice services The SU will be added to the database as a Temporary SU The quickynikinyoky User Password will be sent by the SU in the following cases A quickynikinyoky is the User Password configured in the SU B Anew SU with a null User Name and User Password The SU will
183. he Grounding screw marked is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit To connect the grounding cable 1 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding screw and tighten the grounding screw firmly 2 Connect the other end of the grounding cable to a good ground earth connection BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 37 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 1 6 2 Connecting the Antenna Cable gt To connect the RF cable 1 Connect one end of the coaxial RF cable to the RF connector marked Y located on the bottom panel of the unit 2 Connect the other end of the RF cable to the antenna 3 The RF connectors should be properly sealed to protect against rain and moisture 2 1 6 3 Connecting the IF Cable gt To connect the IF cable 1 Connect one end of the coaxial IF cable to the IF connector on the bottom panel of the unit 2 Verify that the length of the IF cable is sufficient to reach the AU IDU Power Feeder See IF cable length limitation in Section 2 1 3 3 The IF cable connector should be properly sealed to protect against rain and moisture 4 Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment 38 Installation Installing the Base Station Equipment 2 2 Pad 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 Installing the Base Station Equipment BST Installation Requirements Packing List E Base Station Chassis BMAX BST SH Base Station Chassis B
184. he entry accumulated since the last reset XML File Parsing Errors This option is not applicable in current version Defining Service Profiles The process of defining completely new Service Profiles should be done from bottom up as each entity in the process is defined using one or more lower level entities To define a new Service Profile from scratch 1 Define the QoS profiles that should be available for the required Priority Classifier Uplink Downlink QoS Profiles and for the required Forwarding Rule Multicast QoS Profile 2 Define the Priority Classifier that should be available for the required Service Profile All QoS Profiles required for the Uplink Downlink QoS profiles list must be defined in advance 3 Define the Forwarding Rule that should be available for the required Service Profile The QoS Profile required for the Multicast QoS Profile parameter must be defined in advance 4 Define the Service Profile The required Priority Classifier and Forwarding Rule must be defined in advance 5 Once there are various QoS Profiles Priority Classifiers and Forwarding Rules in the database you can skip one or more of the steps 1 to 3 Operation Services Menu 4 10 6 Defining Local Permanent Services gt To define a new Service from scratch 1 Verify that the necessary Service Profile s are available in the database 2 Define the relevant Subscriber 3 Verify that the applicable SU is defi
185. he maximum BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 53 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 54 length of the Ethernet cable is 100m when operating at 100 Mbps and 70m when operating at 1 Gbps 7 Ifthe MGMT port will be used for remote management connect it to the appropriate data equipment use a straight Ethernet cable to connect toa hub switch router The maximum length of the Ethernet cable is 100m 8 Connect the DC power cable to the power jack of the PIU module If a redundant PIU is installed connect a DC power cable also to the second PIU module Connect the power cord s to the 48 VDC power source s as follows Connect the black wire to the 48 VDC contact of the power source Connect the red wire to the Return contact Connect the ground wire to the ground 9 For AU ODUs that connect directly to AU IDUs Connect the IF cable s already connected at the other end to the AU ODU s to the proper channels ODU 1 to ODU 4 connectors of the applicable AU IDU module s If only a single AU ODU per AU IDU is used connect the IF cable s to the appropriate ODU 1 connector s To avoid transmissions at undesired frequencies verify that the frequency and bandwidth parameters are properly configured before connecting the IF cables For AU ODU that are powered by a Power Feeder Refer to Section 2 3 3 CAUTION A maximum of six AU ODU HP units can be powered directly from the Base Station via th
186. he software version is upgraded these pre configured Profiles will not be installed again in the NPU This is to prevent configuration problems from occurring if the modified Profiles differ from the factory loaded Profiles Note that upon resetting to NPU to its default configuration Set Factory Defaults pre configured Profiles that were modified are not affected The pre configured Service Profiles are 220 Internet Access L2 for basic Internet Access service with Best Effort QoS utilizing L2 Service Type This is the recommended Default Service Profile for Quick Mode Internet Access PPPoE for basic Internet Access service with Best Effort QoS utilizing PPPoE Service Type Gold Silver and Bronze Teleworking for teleworking applications with different QoS requirements The pre configured Teleworking Services are asymmetric DL Rate gt UL Rate Gold Silver and Bronze LAN to LAN for LAN to LAN applications with different QoS requirements The pre configured LAN to LAN Services are symmetric DL rate UL rate VoIP Service Profiles for DRAP based gateways Two pre configured VoIP service Profiles are defined VoIP 1V for gateways with a single POTS interface and VoIP 2V for fully supporting gateways for 2 POTS interfaces Service Profiles for Generic non DRAP VoIP Devices 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 1 POTS no Fax G 729 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval no priority marking 1 POTS A
187. hentication Dial In User Service enables operators to manage a single database of users supporting authentication verifying user name and password as well as configuration information detailing the type of service to deliver to the user and the traffic that the user transmitted and received for billing proposes RADIUS is a protocol for carrying authentication authorization and configuration information between a Network Access Server NAS which desires to authenticate its links and a shared Authentication server A Network Access Server operates as a client of RADIUS The client is responsible for passing user information to designated RADIUS server s and then acting on the response RADIUS servers are responsible for receiving user connection requests authenticating the user and then returning all configuration information necessary for the client to deliver service to the user In BreezeMAX systems a RADIUS NAS is implemented in each Base Station Transactions between the client and RADIUS server are authenticated using Password Authentication Protocol PAP through encryption based on RSA Message Digest Algorithm MD5 and a Shared Secret which is never sent over the network The Access Request is submitted to the RADIUS server via the network If no response is returned within a length of time the request is re sent a number of times Once the RADIUS server receives the request it validates the sending client A request from a
188. hest available for the applicable priority type 7 for 802 1p 63 for DSCP BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 239 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Downlink QoS Profiles Up to four QoS Profile Names separated Yes by commas where each name up to 32 printable characters is a name of a QoS Profile that exists in the database The number of entries in the list must be identical to number of entries in Downlink Priority Ranges list Services QoS Profiles Parameters QoS Profile Name Up to 32 printable characters Yes QoS Type 2 RT Yes 3 NRT 4 BE CT 1 Short Yes 2 Medium 3 Long CIR Kbps Applicable to RT and NRT Yes 0 12 000 MIR Kbps Applicable to NRT and BE Yes 1 12 000 MIR cannot be lower than CIR NRT Packet Size Bytes Applicable to CG Yes 64 1550 Bytes Sample Interval msec Applicable to CG Yes 5 100 milliseconds L2 Filtering Rules Parameters L2 Filtering Rule Name Up to 32 printable characters Yes MAC Address MAC address or null for Any Yes MAC Address Mask MAC address Yes MAC Address Direction 1 Source Yes 2 Destination Ethertype 4 hexadecimal digits or null for Any Yes L3 L4 Filtering Rules Parameters 240 Operation NPU Parameters Summary Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Paramete
189. ibes how to load new software files using TFTP and how to switch to a new software version in BreezeMAX units E Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways Describes the principles of defining Service Profiles for 3rd party generic non DRAP based VoIP devices E Glossary A listing of commonly used terms E Index Contents Chapter 1 System Description 1 1 Introducing BreezeMAX uasaunuanuenueenumemnenmenbr minnene 2 1 2 Base Station Equipment meennnsvrrnnnnnnnernnnannannennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnneenunnnnnnnennnnnen 5 1 2 1 Base Station Chassis cccscccccesseccceeessecceeeeseeeneesseeeeeeenseeneeeeneeeeesseeeeeenenesenens 5 1 2 2 Network Processing Unit NPU 2000 ccceceeeeeeneecetee ee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeseeneeeeeeeeenees 5 1 2 3 Access GT 6 NG A EE 7 1 2 5 Base Station Radio Configurations rrnrrnnnnrnnrrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnrnrnnnnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnennn 7 FT Se 9 1 2 7 Power Interface Unit PIU cece ceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneseeeeeemeeeeesessceeeeeeeeeenes 10 1 2 8 Power Supply Unit PSU mmmsrerernrovonornannvvevnnnnnannnennnvnvnnansnvnnnennnnenennnnnenntennnnen 10 PZR eNtilation Unit AVU eeerrrrnsnannnnrenernvnnnnnnnnenenenernnnnnnnenenenennennnsnnnnenenereennn 11 I KER EN EE 11 1 3 Networking Equipment essssnnnnenennannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnennersnnnnnnnnnsnennnnnnnnnnnnnnn 12 1 3 1 DUET 6004 Access Gateway
190. icense Bank Status Select this option to view the current status of the CPEs Licenses Bank if available The displayed information includes E License ID The relevant license type In the current version only a BW Band Width license type is available E License Value The specific details of the relevant licenses In the current version all BW licenses are Unlimited E License Count The number of currently available licenses balance Each time a license is granted to a specific CPE the License Count is decremented by one Show Base Station Licenses Select this option to view the current Base Station Licenses if applicable The displayed information includes the License ID and License Value for each BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 107 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 4 5 3 4 4 6 108 applicable license Currently the applicable license that may be available is Unlimited Bandwidth for all CPEs License ID BW License Value Unlimited Show Temporary Grace Licenses and Show Grace Licenses The aggregate uplink and downlink MIR in all the services allocated to an L model CPE should not exceed 2 Mbps If the aggregate MIR in the services assigned to such a CPE exceeds this limit the Network Service Provider has a 30 days grace period During the grace period the assigned services are provided to the CPE At any time during the 30 days grace period the Network Service Operator can l
191. ices not provided a guaranteed level of system performance as relates to downtime or uptime a specified level of customer support and what software or hardware will be provided and for what fee Small and Medium sized Enterprises SMEs are small scale entrepreneurial private enterprises they are usually defined as having less than 250 employees but most have far fewer Sub Network Access Protocol BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Glossary SNMP SNR SOHO SRC SU TCP TCP IP TDD TDM Simple Network Management Protocol A network management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control network devices and to manage configurations statistics collection performance and security SNMP works by sending messages called protocol data units PDUs to different parts of a network SNMP compliant devices called agents store data about themselves in Management Information Bases MIBs and return this data to the SNMP requesters Signal to Noise Ratio The ratio of the amplitude of a desired analog or digital data signal to the amplitude of noise in a transmission channel at a specific point in time SNR is typically expressed logarithmically in decibels dB SNR measures the quality of a transmission channel or a signal over a network channel The greater the ratio the easier it is to identify and subsequently isolate and eliminate the effects of noise SNR also is abbreviated as S N Small Of
192. idth To be on the safe side allocate 10 of the RTP bandwidth to RTCP E VoIP Signaling Cisco states that its IP Phones generate approximately 150 bps signaling traffic without L2 overhead To be on the safe side assume 2 Kbps of VoIP Signaling traffic for each POTS interface E Fax Fax services are assumed to be based on T 38 Fax Relay Protocol Header is assumed to be 58 bytes same as for RTP E Data Data traffic may include ARP DHCP TFTP SNMP HTTP and other management protocols The recommended default bandwidth value is up to 64 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Introduction Kbps if a Best Effort connection is used for this traffic If a Continuous Grant service is used for all VoIP related traffic a lower bandwidth will be allocated to Data traffic Note that the use of bandwidth consuming protocols when an active call is present should be avoided BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 251 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways B 2 B 2 1 B 2 2 Bud B 2 4 252 1 POTS Basic VolP G 729 Service Profile Service Characteristics E G 729 codec 20msec sample interval E 1 POTS E No Fax E Priority marking behind the SU is not used All VoIP related traffic is classified onto a single Continuous Grant CG connection E Multiple media streams to support Call Waiting If the traffic exceeds the BW allocated to the CG connection the SU may request to
193. iediereieanloreetedesnekiatad coeds necexyantdaee 70 31 24 Chain parametelS crenn a A AE EO EAER A REE ENS 71 3 1 5 Radio Cluster ve eee andet 71 AO a EN EE ere 71 o EE EE TE 72 TMS 73 3 2 Operation VerileaNana 2asssasossangteesneeesunetededmeannenie 74 3 21 AV ODU LEDS airet aa a an er iaa dea EE EEEE a ees 74 PENNEN trener nsee rnent 74 3 2 3 ODU Power Feeder LEDS rrnnnnnnvnnnnvnnrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnennnvnnrnnnnnrrnrnnnsnnnnrnnennnannnnnrr 78 3 24 GPSAdapter LEDS eee 78 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual XV Contents 3 2 5 Verifying the Ethernet Connection rxrrrnnannrrrrnnnonnvrnnnnnnnvnnnrnrnrrnnnernnrrnneennnnnnesnn 79 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 1 BreezeMAX System Management rrnnnnnvnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 82 4 2 The Monitor Pr qgra mauuaaacnaanssmanmmsimmmmvaiaumnadjreidmien nk 84 4 2 1 Accessing the Monitor Program e evxxrnnnnnnnnvnvnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnerernnnsnnnenenenrennnnnnnn 84 422 Using the Monitor Program usaaasssimsisemmmmeamdueennimnmnseiee 85 4 3 The NPU S Main Menu ssssssssssnsunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnnm 88 4 3 1 Base Station MENU vssictenrexconcdiatnacteataiowtcesdastdneniceceietansidnadedetemeigenueeuccmedtect 88 452 NPU MENU iridia na aa E AEEA EE E a Ra 88 4 3 3 Radio Cluster Menu svsnmsanneneepeaussnmdnnetekennumaneenedeun dnne 88 A SoA ODU Menu arien E AE E E ea
194. ield LOAWG 20AWG wire 4 Attach suitable terminal rings to the side that connects to the power source Installing the ODU Power Feeder The ODU Power Feeder should be installed as close as possible to the location where the IF cable s enters the building The location of the ODU Power Feeder should take into account its connection to the power source and to the Base Station equipment BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 59 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines gt 60 To install the ODU Power Feeder The panel is supplied with blank covers Release the nuts on the rear side of the panels to remove the blank cover s you want to replace with ODU Power Feeder module s Attach the ODU Power Feeder module s to the panel using the four screws supplied with each module Place the panel with the ODU Power Feeder module s on a shelf desk or install it in a 19 cabinet next to the Base Station equipment For installation in a 21 cabinet attach suitable ETSI rack adapters to the chassis Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding screw located on the rear panel of each ODU Power Feeder module and firmly tighten the grounding screw Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable s to a ground earth connection or to the cabinet if applicable Connect the IDU connector s to the appropriate ODU connector s of the AU IDU s using the short 0 5 meter IF cables supplied with the module Connect the pow
195. ignal from GPS Receiver is detected E Red 1PPS signal is not detected Active GPS ODU ODU GPS selection indication E Green indicates that the selected GPS Receiver is ODU Outdoor E Off ODU GPS Receiver is not selected Active GPS IDU IDU GPS selection indication E Green indicates that the selected GPS Receiver is IDU Indoor E Off IDU GPS Receiver is not selected Active GPS INT INT GPS selection indication E Green indicates that the selected GPS Receiver is INT Internal Internal is not supported in current release E Off INT GPS Receiver is not selected INT CLOCK Internal clock source indication Il Green Internal 16MHz clock is ok not supported in current release E Red Internal clock is not available or clock failure 2 4 3 Installing the GPS Adapter gt To install the GPS Adapter 1 The GPS Adapter is installed on the 1U high panel that can be used also for installation of ODU Power Feeder modules The panel is supplied with blank BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 63 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 64 covers Release the nuts on the rear side of the panel to remove the blank cover you want to replace with the GPS Adapter Attach the GPS Adapter module to the panel using the four screws supplied with it Place the panel with the GPS Adapter and optionally ODU Power Feeders on a shelf desk or install it in a 19 cabinet next
196. il Budet B 3 3 B 3 4 254 1 POTS Advanced VolP G 729 Service Profile Service Characteristics M G 729 codec 20msec sample interval E 1 POTS E T 38 Fax E DSCP priority marking behind the SU is used with the following values 63 RTP traffic 26 RTCP and VolP traffic 0 Data traffic E Single media stream to support Call Waiting Voice RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth for a G 729 call 8 Kbps codec bit rate with RTP and 20 bytes of voice payload is Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 20 bytes 78 bytes Total packet size bits 78 bytes 8 bits per byte 624 bits PPS Packets Per Second 8 Kbps codec bit rate 160 bits 50 pps Note 160 bits 20 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call Total packet size 624 bits 50 pps 31 2 Kbps Voice RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 31 2 Kbps is 3 12 Kbps T 38 14 400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth with a 20 msec sample interval is as follows BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1 POTS Advanced VolP G 729 Service Profile Bud B 3 6 B 3 6 1 B 3 6 2 B 3 6 3 Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 36 bytes 94 bytes Total packet size bits 94bytes 8 bits per byte 752 bits PPS 14 4 Kbps bit rate
197. ile for Multicasts and Unknown Address Forwarding Policy The available features depend on the Service Type The data may be switched only between the Services that share the same Forwarding Rule In all other respects the service functions as a standard Bridge E Aggregation Several Services in the Wireless Domain may be aggregated into a single Virtual Private Link VPL in the backbone domain E Priority Marking Ethernet frames transmitted to the backbone may be marked with a configurable priority DSCP or IEEE 802 1p enabling the upstream network to handle the traffic accordingly E Auto configuration The Ethernet Addresses of the Subscribers PCs are automatically learnt just as in a standard Bridge For each Ethernet Address it also learns the VLAN behind the SU it belongs to Currently the following Service types are supported E L2 layer 2 Data Service E PPPoE Data Service HM Voice Service Service Types L2 Service L2 Layer 2 service transports Layer 2 Ethernet frames between the subscriber s site and the Network Resource located behind the provider s backbone and or between the subscriber s sites It is assumed that the backbone either supports encapsulation of the Layer 2 frames e g over ATM or routes the frames according to the applicable Layer 3 protocol which could be different from IP The Network Resource is assumed to be a corporate network NOTE An L2 Service supports also DRAP based Voice Service as
198. in the entire range defined by the BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask parameters The Preferred BST AU ID and Preferred BST AU ID Mask consist of 6 groups of up to 3 digits each where the range of each group is 0 to 255 The first 3 groups form the base address mask for the Operator ID The next 2 groups form the base address mask for the Cell ID and the last group forms the base address mask for the Sector ID The range defined by these two parameters must be within the range defined by the BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask 4 9 7 3 10 2 3 BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask These two parameters define the overall range for scanning in order to find the best AU The SU will initially scan the range defined by the Preferred BST AU ID and Preferred BST AU ID Mask if applicable If no AU is found within this range BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 177 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 7 3 11 4 9 7 3 11 1 4 9 7 3 11 2 178 the SU will continue searching in the entire range defined by the BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask parameters The BST AU ID and BST AU ID Mask consist of 6 groups of up to 3 digits each where the range of each group is 0 to 255 The first 3 groups form the base address mask for the Operator ID The next 2 groups form the base address mask for the Cell ID and the last group forms the base address mask for the Sector ID Radio Parameters Advanced Si The Radio Parameters menu enables viewing a
199. in the module into its intended slot 2 Press the handle down until you hear the locking click and the red button is released 3 Secure the module in place by closing the screw at the top of the front panel Ejecting Modules To eject a module with hot swap support NPU AU IDU new PIU 1 Release the screws at the top and the bottom of the front panel 2 Press the handles red button until the handles are unlocked 3 Wait until the blue HOT SWAP LED turns on indicationg that the module has been disconnected and can be removed CAUTION In a PIU with HOT SWAP LED disconnect power from the PIU module only after it is taken out from the chassis or after the HOT SWAP LED is turned on 4 Press the handles down the upper handle up the lower handle until the module is unlocked firmly hold the handles and take the module out of the chassis To eject a PSU or a PIU without HOT SWAP support Installation Installing the Base Station Equipment al CAUTION In a PIU without HOT SWAP LED disconnect power from the PIU module before ejecting it from the chassis Before disconnecting the power cable from the PIU the power source must be disconnected to avoid irreversible damage due to a potential excessively high transient current 1 Release the screw at the top of the front panel 2 Press the handle s red button until the handle is unlocked 3 Press the handle up until the module is unlocked firmly hold the handle
200. indication E Green Internal 16MHz clock is ok not supported in current release E Red Internal clock is not available or clock failure Er ae Verifying the Ethernet Connection After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet verify that the Ethernet Integrity Indicator which is the yellow LED embedded in the DATA port connector is on This indicates that the unit is connected to an Ethernet segment The Ethernet Activity Indicator which is the green embedded LED should blink whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the DATA port BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Administration In This Chapter BreezeMAX System Management on page 82 The Monitor Program on page 84 The NPU s Main Menu on page 88 Base Station Menu on page 90 NPU Menu on page 112 Radio Cluster Menu on page 130 ODU Menu on page 133 AU Menu on page 138 SU Menu on page 158 Services Menu on page 184 NPU Parameters Summary on page 226 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 1 82 BreezeMAX System Management All BreezeMAX system components associated with a Base Station are managed via the Base Station s NPU module The other system components AUs and SUs are not accessed directly each configuration change or status enquiry is sent to the NPU that communicates with other system components NOTE The
201. ined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters and from the local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable The Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter allows enabling disabling remote management traffic via a router connected to the Management port This parameter does not affect management traffic via the local subnet defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask If remote management for the Management port is disabled then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager A The local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters B The local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters C Any subnet reachable via the default Gateway of the Data port if Data Port Gateway is defined BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 121 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration x 4 5 3 2 4 5 3 2 1 4 5 3 2 2 122 If remote management is enabled for both the Data Port and the Management port then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager A The local subnet of
202. ined to enable RADIUS based accounting E IP Address E UDP Port HM Server Status 3 1 4 Chain parameters E Chain Number MH GPS Protocol E Time Zone Offset From UTC 3 1 5 Radio Cluster E Radio Cluster ID Verify that all required Radio Cluster IDs are defined 3 1 6 ODU Define the necessary ODUs For each ODU configure the following E ODU ID E Associated Radio Cluster E Configured ODU Frequency Band E Tx Power E Admin Status Enable when completing the configuration process BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 71 Chapter 3 Commissioning Sida 3 1 7 1 3 1 7 2 3 1 7 2 1 3 1 7 2 2 3 1 7 3 3 1 7 4 3 1 7 5 ia AU SW Files in NPU Default SW File Advanced Si E Name E Action The following must be configured for each AU Unit Control SW Versions Control SW File E Name E Action SU SW File E Name E Action MAC Parameters E Sector ID E Maximum Cell Radius km Phy Parameters E Bandwidth Multi Channel Parameters E Diversity Mode The following parameters must be configured for each channel used if Diversity Mode is No Diversity Otherwise only Channel 1 needs to be configured E Associated ODU Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters of Base Station 3 1 7 6 3 1 7 7 2 18 3 1 8 1 E Downlink Tx Frequency MHz E Admin Status Enable when completing the configuration process Multirate Parameters E Uplink Basic Rate E Minimu
203. ing from the wireless network will be replaced by the VPL ID The guidelines that should be followed when defining VPL ID are E Several Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID However the following rules must be met Any number of L2 and or VoIP Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule Any number of PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule Any number of L2 VoIP and PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided that all L2 Voice Service Profiles use the same Forwarding Rule A and all PPPoE Service Profiles use the same Forwarding Rule B where A and B are different The VLAN Transparency Mode defines the method of transferring packets to the operator s upstream network When set to On data packets sent from the Base Station to the backbone will be transferred transparently The VPL ID parameter is not applicable to Service Profiles with VLAN Transparency Mode On BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 189 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E For tagged packets the VPL ID will be their VLAN tag E For untagged packets the VPL ID will be None For packets received from the network the forwarding decision will be according to the packet s VPL ID If the VPL ID is unknown either None or not included in the list of VPL IDs defined for any of the existing non transparent Servic
204. io Cluster ID 1 6 Yes Name Up to 32 printable characters Null Yes Location 0 to 255 printable characters Null Yes Sector Heading 0 359 degrees 0 Yes Sector Beam Width 0 359 degrees 90 Yes ODU Parameters ODU ID 1 24 Yes BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 229 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Associated Radio Cluster 1 6 Yes must be a defined Radio cluster ID Configured ODU Frequency According to loaded Frequency Bands file 0 Not Defined Yes Band Tx Power dBm 13 50 dBm in increments of 0 25 28 Yes Actual range depends on ODU Type 3 5 GHz units 24 to 34 dBm 2 x GHz units with HCO8 version 134 25 to 36 dBm 2 x GHz units with HCO8 version 137 30 to 36 dBm Admin Status 1 Disable Disable Yes 2 Enable AU SW Files in NPU Default SW File Standard Not applicable for current release Name A name of an AU SW File that exist in the Yes NPU Action 0 None Yes 1 Load 2 Run from Shadow 3 Set as Main AU SW Files in NPU Default SW File Advanced Si Name A name of an AU SW File that exist in the Yes NPU Action 0 None Yes 1 Load 2 Run from Shadow 3 Set as Main AU Unit Control SW Versions Control SW File Name A name of an AU SW File that exist in the Yes NPU 230 Operation
205. ionally the Base Station chassis contains an air convection and ventilation fan tray AVU 1 2 2 Network Processing Unit NPU The Network Processing Unit is the heart of the BreezeMAX Base Station The NPU module serves as the central processing unit that manages the base station s components and the SUs served by it It also aggregates the traffic from the AU modules and transfers it to the IP Backbone through a dedicated Gigabit Fast Ethernet interface The NPU main functions are BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 5 Chapter 1 System Description Ls E Aggregate backbone Ethernet connectivity via a 100 1000 Base T network interface E Traffic classification and connection establishment initiation HM Policy based data switching HM Service Level Agreements management E RADIUS NAS enabling centralized SUs authentication and a services authorization by RADIUS server s wo ha B E Centralized agent in the Base Station to manage all cell site s x AUs and all registered SUs E Base Station overall operation control including AU diagnostic and control PSU monitoring AVU management and redundancy support E Alarms management including external alarm inputs and activation of external devices future option E Synchronization including GPS antenna interface clock and IF reference generation and distribution to the Base Station modules as well as to other collocated Base Station chassis futur
206. is OK ODU PWR 1 4 Output power indications E Off AU ODU HP is not connected E Red Power output problem short or overload E Green AU ODU HP is connected and powered 3 2 4 GPS Adapter LEDs To verify the correct operation of the GPS Adapter examine the LED indicators located on the front panel of the unit The following table lists the LEDs of the GPS Adapter and their associated indications Table 3 9 GPS Adapter LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Input power indication E Off Power input failure E Green 12 VDC power supply from NPU is OK 1PPS 1PPS signal indication E Blinking Green 1PPS signal from GPS Receiver is detected E Red 11PPS signal is not detected Active GPS ODU ODU GPS selection indication E Green indicates that the selected GPS Receiver is ODU Outdoor E Off ODU GPS Receiver is not selected Active GPS IDU IDU GPS selection indication E Green indicates that the selected GPS Receiver is IDU Indoor E Off IDU GPS Receiver is not selected 78 Commissioning Operation Verification Table 3 9 GPS Adapter LEDs Name Description Functionality Active GPS INT INT GPS selection indication E Green indicates that the selected GPS Receiver is INT Internal Internal is not supported in current release E Off INT GPS Receiver is not selected INT CLOCK Internal clock source
207. ist VLAN List can include up to 16 entries Empty All both untagged and tagged with any VLAN ID On Exists Untagged packets and packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN List VLAN List can include up to 15 entries Empty Only untagged frames 190 Operation Services Menu 4 10 2 The guidelines that should be followed when defining VLAN IDs and related parameters are E A specific VLAN ID behind a certain SU can be associated only with a single Service of a certain Service Type It is not possible to define two Services of the same Service Type for the same SU and VLAN ID However the same SU and VLAN ID can be associated with two Services of different Service Types excluding the combination of L2 Service and Voice Service For each Service Type a maximum of one Service that enables forwarding of untagged packets can be assigned to an SU Forwarding of untagged packets is supported when either Hybrid VLAN Mode is On or Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List is empty It is not possible to define for the same SU two Services of the same Service Type that enable forwarding of untagged packets However the same SU and untagged packets can be associated with two Services of different Service Types excluding the combination of L2 Service and Voice Service The maximum total number of VLAN IDs behind the same SU is 16 15 when there is a Service with Hybrid VLAN Mode On is assigned to
208. itch was responsible for duplicating all the packets to the correct ports according to the multicast connection this required switch pre configuration If a VLAN switch with binding capability was not used only a single VLAN ID behind the SU could be supported and this VLAN ID has to be identical to the multicast VLAN ID In the current version all packets received from the wireless port over a multicast connection are transmitted by the SU several times to the Ethernet port each time with a different VLAN ID taken from the VLAN ID list supplied by the NPU BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 207 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 5 7 4 10 4 5 8 4 10 4 6 4 10 4 6 1 4 10 4 6 2 208 Available values are in the range of 0 to 4094 or null empty string for No Multicast VLAN ID Refer to Section 4 10 1 5 for guidelines regarding configuration of Multicast VLAN ID Multicast QoS Profile The Multicast QoS Profile is the QoS Profile to be used for mulicast and broadcast messages The QoS Profile must be one of the names that exist in the database after being defined using the QoS Profile menu Forwarding Rule Class A read only parameter available only in Show menu Currently the Class of all Forwarding Rules is Local Priority Classifiers L2 and PPPoE Service Type The Priority Classifier defines the QoS Profiles to be allocated to users sessions differentiated by DSCP or 802 1p prior
209. ity classifiers Priority Classifiers are not applicable to Voice Service Profiles Each Priority Classifier can define up to 4 uplink and 4 downlink QoS profiles NOTE DSCP based Priority Classifiers are applicable only to IP or ARP traffic It is not applicable to PPPoE and other Ethernet type traffic If a Priority Classifier is not applicable for a certain traffic e g DSCP based profile with PPPoE traffic or 802 1p based profile with traffic that do not use VLAN tags no prioritization scheme will be in effect and quality of service will be determined by the first QoS Profile in the applicable lists The Priority Classifier menu enables viewing all Priority Classifiers in the database defining new Priority Classifiers editing details of previously defined Priority Classifiers and removing Priority Classifiers from the database The Priority Classifiers database can hold up to 255 Priority Classifiers The Priority Classifier s parameters are Priority Classifier Name A Priority Classifier Name consists of up to 32 printable characters Priority Type The prioritization mechanism used by the Priority Classifier The available options are Operation Services Menu 4 10 4 6 3 4 10 4 6 4 4 10 4 6 5 4 10 4 6 6 4 10 4 6 7 1 DSCP 2 802 1p Uplink Upper Priority Limits The Uplink Upper Priority Limits parameter enables to define up to four ranges where each range may be assigned a different QoS Pr
210. ive We re on your wavelength BreezeMAX TDD Modular Base Station SW Version 4 0 2 March 2007 P N 214508 Document History Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued First Release New Product Manual SW Version 4 0 1 October 2006 Output power range of 2 x GHz AU ODUs Section 1 5 1 Section 2 1 Section 4 7 4 4 Control range of new 2 x GHz AU ODU units HCO8 version 137 is 30 36 dBm If diversity is used all ODUs connected to the same AU IDU must use the same HCO8 version SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006 Available AU ODU units Section 1 5 1 Section 1 5 10 1 Section 2 1 1 1 Optimal Uplink RSSI Section 4 4 2 3 2 Added AU ODU HP 2 3 Extended WCS Updated range and default value In version 4 0 2 this parameter is not updated in run time reset required SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006 SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006 DL UL Ratio Section 4 4 2 5 2 Updated combinations of Sub Channelizations Bandwidth AU Service Type and Maximum Cell Radius for which certain DL UL Ratios are not available SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006 Rate BPSK 3 4 removed Section 1 5 1 Section 4 8 5 3 4 Section 4 9 7 3 4 Rate BPSK 3 4 is not available in TDD systems according to standard SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006 ARQ Enable Disable Section 4 8 5 3 1 2 In the current release ARQ should not be enabled SW Version 4 0 2 December 2006
211. k Frequency E Step resolution E Duplex Separation the difference between downlink Tx and uplink Rx frequencies In systems operating in TDD mode the Duplex Separation is 0 HM Group ID In certain cases an AU can be connected to ODUs using different Frequency Bands The Group ID defines the Frequency Bands Group which includes all the Frequency Bands that can be used by the same AU An AU cannot be associated with two or more ODUs that use Frequency Bands belonging to different Groups In the current release the following Frequency Bands are supported Table 4 3 Frequency Bands ID Frequency Group ID Downlink Frequency Resolution Duplex Band Range Separation 12 2 3 2 3GHz 5 2300 2360 MHz 125 KHz 0 13 2 5A 2 5GHz 6 2496 2602 MHz 125 KHz 0 14 2 5B 2 5GHz 6 2590 2690 MHz 125 KHz 0 15 3 4a 3 5GHz TDD 7 3399 5 3455 MHz 125 KHz 0 16 3 4b 3 5GHz TDD 7 3445 3500 MHz 125 KHz 0 17 3 5a TDD 3 5GHz TDD 7 3500 3555 MHz 125 KHz 0 18 3 5b TDD 3 5GHz TDD 7 3545 3600 MHz 125 KHz 0 Note that the Frequency Bands File includes additional Frequency Bands for systems that support FDD Duplex Mode and are not applicable to the current release This mechanism allows adding new frequency bands without modifying the software by simply loading a new Frequency Bands File when the supporting hardware becomes available The file will be either a part of the NPU s software or loade
212. k layer address that is required for every port or device that connects to a LAN Other devices in the network use these addresses to locate specific ports in the network and to create and update routing tables and data structures MAC addresses are 6bytes long and are controlled by the IEEE Metropolitan Area Network A data network designed for a town or city In terms of geographic breadth MANs are larger than local area networks LANs but smaller than wide area networks WANs Multipoint Communications Systems Applications licensed at 2500 MHz in Canada A wide variety of applications are possible including one way and two way transmission and a diversity of distribution capacities A Message Digest algorithm developed by RSA Laboratories used for creating unforgeable digital signatures MD5 produces an 128 bit 16 byte message digest Most existing software applications that handle certificates only support MDS BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 267 Glossary MIB MIR MMDS MRRC NA NAS NAT NIC NIU NLOS NMS 268 Management Information Base A database of objects that can be monitored by a network management system SNMP uses standardized MIB formats that allow any SNMP tools to monitor any device defined by a MIB Maximum Information Rate Specifies the maximum rate of information that can be available to a user The MIR is used by the traffic policing mechanism to prevent users from
213. kets arriving from the wireless link From Wireless Filtering using a set of either Layer 2 or Layer 3 Layer 4 Filtering Rules Discarding packets to from specific MAC addresses MAC Address Deny List This is applicable to MAC Addresses behind SUs The following figure describes the filtering functionality Figure 4 2 Filtering Functionality The filtering definition process includes the following steps 1 192 Defining list s of Filtering Rules Each Filtering Rule defines a combination of values for certain packet fields Filtering Rules can be of 2 types Layer 2 Filtering Rules using fields of the Ethernet frame and Layer 3 Layer 4 Filtering Rules using fields of the IP and or UDP TCP headers Associating each Interface From Network From Wireless Link with a set of either Layer 2 or Layer 3 Layer 4 filters from the relevant Filtering Rules lists and defining the action to be taken upon receiving a packet that matches any of the selected Filtering Rules Allow forward or Deny discard Operation Services Menu 4 10 3 4 10 3 1 4 10 3 2 4 10 3 3 4 10 3 4 4 10 3 5 4 10 4 Common Operations in Services Menu Except for the General submenu all submenus available in the Services menu enable viewing editing deleting and adding applicable entities such as Subscribers Services Service Profiles etc Some or all of the following options are available in all submenus of the Services menu
214. lass 5 switch over V5 2 to its Voice Gateways DUET 6004 Access Gateway The DUET 6004 is a carrier grade V5 2 to SIP gateway connecting a Class 5 switch over V5 2 to Alvarion s SIP stand alone Voice Gateways VG 1D1V and VF 1D2V or Voice Gateway IDUs IDU 1D1V and IDU 1D2V A Local Exchange LE with the DUET 6004 support basic and advanced telephony services as CLASS services IN services and others The DUET can be System Description Management Systems either collocated with the BreezeMAX Base Station or installed at the LE premises concentrating the traffic of many Base Stations The LE switch provides the call processing billing and administrative functions while the DUET provides the signaling translation and media conversion E Signaling Translation converting the V5 2 signaling into SIP commands and vice versa E Media Conversion converting media formats such as PCM to G 729A and others It also provides additional media related services such as Echo Canceling and others E Outbound SIP Proxy The DUET operates as outbound SIP proxy for the Voice Gateways All outbound calls from the user agents are sent to the DUET Note that the DUET does not support SIP to SIP calls and all calls are always passed to the switch via the V5 2 interface E Registration Processing registration requests of the SIP Voice Gateways connected to the BreezeMAX CPE The DUET complies with the V5 2 interface standard second edi
215. lect this option to view the following information for each Channel E Channel 1 4 E Associated ODU BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 149 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E Downlink Tx Frequency MHz E Uplink Rx Frequency MHz Applicable only to Channels associated with a defined ODU Computed using the rules defined in the Frequency Bands Configuration File E Admin Status Enabled Disabled HM Tx Power Applicable only to Channels associated with a defined ODU The Tx Power in dBm configured in the ODU E Associated Radio Cluster Applicable only to Channels associated with a defined ODU The Associated Radio Cluster defined in the ODU Upon first power up of the Base Station the channels are defined automatically as follows E Associated ODU Channel 1 of all AUs is automatically associated with an ODU Table 4 4 Automatic Association of Channel 1 Upon First Power Up AU Slot ID ODU ID AU Slot 1 1 AU Slot 2 AU Slot 3 AU Slot 4 AU Slot 7 AU Slot 8 NN OO oO AJ w AU Slot 9 For all other Channels 2 4 the Associated ODU is NA E Downlink Tx Frequency MHz 3551 750 E Admin Status Enabled for Channel 1 Disabled for all other Channels 2 4 4 8 5 3 3 2 Diversity Mode The Diversity Mode of the AU For details on diversity modes refer to Base Station Radio Configurations on page 7 150 Operation AU Men
216. les The Forwarding Rule defines the features that affect forwarding and relaying of data Data in L2 and Voice services may be switched only between the Services that share the same Forwarding Rule Data in PPPoE service can pass only between the subscriber and an Access Concentrator behind the Base Station The Forwarding Rule menu enables viewing all Forwarding Rules in the database defining new Forwarding Rules editing details of previously defined Forwarding Rules and removing Forwarding Rules from the database The Forwarding Rules database can hold up to 255 Forwarding Rules The Forwarding Rule s parameters are Forwarding Rule Name A Forwarding Rule Name consists of up to 32 printable characters Service Type The Service Type for which the Forwarding Rule is defined The Service Type parameter is configurable only when defining a new Service Profile Add It is not changeable The currently available Service Type options are 1 L2 2 PPPOE Operation Services Menu 4 10 4 5 3 4 10 4 5 4 4 10 4 5 5 4 10 4 5 6 3 Voice For more details refer to Section 4 10 1 2 Unicast Relaying L2 and Voice Service Type The Unicast Relaying parameter determines whether the AU performs unicast relaying When the Unicast Relaying parameter is enabled unicast packets originating from devices on the wireless link can be transmitted back to the wireless link devices If disabled these packets are not sent to th
217. lex Mode The operation mode of the system TDD or FDD BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 93 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration x 4 4 2 5 2 94 NOTE In systems that support only a single mode of operation any attempt to change the Duplex Mode to a mode that is not supported will be rejected If there is a mismatch between the configured value and the mode supported by the AUs a suitable error message and trap will be sent and the system will not become operational until proper configuration is completed The default is TDD In the current release only TDD mode is supported and the Duplex Mode should not be changed A change in the configured Duplex Mode is applied only after reset DL UL Ratio Applicable only when the Duplex Mode is set to TDD Defines the ratio of transmit Down Link time to receive Up Link time in percents The available values are 1 65 35 2 60 40 3 55 45 4 50 50 5 45 55 6 40 60 7 35 65 When Sub channelization is enabled Uplink Basic Rate BPSK 1 2 and Minimum Number of Sub Channels is other than 16 some DL UL Ratios are not supported for certain combinations of Bandwidth AU Service Type and Maximum Cell Radius E For 3 5 MHz bandwidth and Data Service UL DL Ratios of 65 35 and 60 40 are not supported regardless of Maximum Cell Radius UL DL Ratio of 55 45 is not supported for Maximum Cell Radius of 30 KM or higher E For 3 5 MHz bandwidth and Voice
218. lication to a target directory To upload the file use the command tftp i lt Port IP address gt get lt file name gt lt destination address gt The default file name is E Full backup res E Profiles profiles res E Profiles and Services profiles srvcs res E Filtering filtering res E Traps traps config res The file is encrypted and cannot be edited However it can be downloaded to other NPU s using a DOS based TFTP Client application with the command tftp i lt Port IP address gt put lt file name gt The target NPU will decrypt the backup file extract all the configuration files and databases and will store them replacing existing files databases The NPU should be reset to apply the downloaded configuration NOTE To avoid loss of connectivity behind a router the basic IP parameters of the MGMT and DATA ports IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway are not changed when loading a Full backup file to the NPU The values of these parameters configured in the target NPU before the loading process are maintained Monitor Inactivity Timeout The Monitor Inactivity Timeout parameter determines the amount of inactive time following which the unit automatically exits the Monitor program The time out duration can range from 0 to 60 minutes 0 means no inactivity timeout The default value is 10 minutes Operation NPU Menu 4 5 3 Configuration The NPU Configuration menu enables viewing and
219. lue must be that of an already defined Radio Cluster Configured ODU Frequency Band The Configured ODU Frequency Band will be modified through the use of Frequency Bands Configuration file see Section 4 7 5 The available values are the list numbers from the displayed list of available Frequency Bands The Configured ODU Frequency Band can be updated only if the ODU is not associated with any AU Channel or if the Admin Status of the associated AU Channel is Disabled Compatibility between the Configured ODU Frequency Band and its actual band is verified by the AU upon trying to associate the ODU with a Channel If the Configured ODU Frequency Band differs from the actual band supported by the ODU a mismatch trap will be sent by the AU upon trying to associate it with a Channel and the association will be rejected Tx Power The Tx Power parameter defines the power level of the transmitted signal at the antenna port of the ODU BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 135 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 4 7 4 5 4 7 5 136 The range is from 13 to 50 dBm using a 0 25 dBm resolution If the entered value is not compatible with the installed ODU a trap will be issued If the entered value is below the minimum supported by the ODU the actual power will be set to the minimum supported by the unit If the entered value is above the maximum supported by the ODU the power will be changed to the maximum valu
220. lver LAN to LAN L2 16 Silver LAN to LAN Silver Symmetric Bronze LAN to LAN L2 17 Bronze LAN to LAN Bronze Symmetric In all pre configured Data Service Profiles the Priority Marking Mode is set to Transparent and the Maximum Number of Voice Calls is 0 VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation taking into account the considerations described in Section 4 10 1 5 As Internet Access L2 is the recommended Default Data Service Profile a VPL ID None is used to ensure availability of basic data services in Quick Mode BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 221 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 11 Pre Configured Forwarding Rules for Data Service Name Service Unicast Broadcast Unknown Multicast QoS Multicast Type relaying Relaying forwarding VLAN Policy Internet Access L2 L2 Disable Disable Forward BE 750 Null Internet Access PPPoE Disable Disable Forward BE 750 Null PPPoE hard coded hard coded hard coded Gold Teleworking L2 Disable Disable Forward NRT 1500 1750 Null Silver Teleworking L2 Disable Disable Forward NRT 1000 1150 Null Bronze Teleworking L2 Disable Disable Forward NRT 750 850 Null Gold LAN to LAN L2 Enable Enable Forward NRT 1500 1750 Null Silver LAN to LAN L2 Enable Enable Forward NRT 1000 1150 Null Bronze LAN to LAN L2 Enable Enable F
221. m Number of Sub Channels only for Uplink Basic Rate of BPSK 1 2 E Downlink Basic Rate Voice Parameters E Maximum Number of Voice Calls HM AU Service Type SU SW Files in NPU Default SW File Advanced Si E Name E Action BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 73 l Chapter 3 Commissioning 3 2 Operation Verification The following sections describe how to verify the correct functioning of the Outdoor Units Indoor Units Ethernet connection and data connectivity 3 2 1 AU ODU LEDs To verify the correct operation of the AU ODU examine the LED indicators located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications NOTE x Verifying the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit using the LEDs as described below is only possible after the configuration of basic parameters has been completed Table 3 2 AU ODU LEDs Name Description Functionality PWR Power indication E Off Power failure E Green Power to ODU is OK internal 3 3 VDC power supply is OK ALARM IDU ODU communication E Off IDU ODU communication is OK and synthesizer status synthesizer is locked indication E Red IDU ODU communication failure or synthesizer is not locked ETH Not Used 32 2 Base Station LEDs To verify the correct operation of the Base Station equipment examine the LED indicators located on the front panels of the
222. n a network Using DHCP to manage IP addresses simplifies client configuration and efficiently utilizes IP addresses A group of subminiature switches mounted in a Dual Inline Package compatible with standard integrated circuit sockets Down Link Disk Operating System Dynamic Resources Allocation Protocol Differentiated Service Code Point AKA DiffServ An alternate use for the ToS byte in IP packets Six bits of this byte are being reallocated for use as the DSCP field where each DSCP specifies a particular per hop behavior that is applied to the packet See DSCP Data Loss Indicator Excess Information Rate Specifies the excess rate above the committed rate of information that can be available to a user The EIR is used by the traffic policing mechanism to prevent users from sending excess traffic to the network EIR MIR CIR Equavalent Isotropic Radiated Power The apparent power transmitted towards the receiver if it is assumed that the signal is radiated equally in all directions The EIRP is equal to the power in dBm at the antenna port plus the power gained from the directivity of the antenna in dBi BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 263 Glossary EMC ETSI FCC FDD FEC FFT FTP G 711 G 723 1 264 Electro Magnetic Compatibility The capability of equipment or systems to be used in their intended environment within designed efficiency levels without causing or receiving deg
223. n the already assigned transparent Services Services using a Service Profile with VLAN Transparency Mode On Several Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID However the following rules must be met Operation Services Menu 4 10 4 4 5 E Any number of L2 and or VoIP Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule E Any number of PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule E Any number of L2 VoIP and PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID provided that all L2 Voice Service Profiles use the same Forwarding Rule A and all PPPoE Service Profiles use the same Forwarding Rule B where A and B are different Available values are in the range of 0 to 4094 or null empty string for No VPL ID A value of 4095 is displayed for No VPL ID Priority Marking Mode In some cases the network operator may want to use the BreezeMAX system for marking QoS classes in order to provide network wide QoS and enable the upstream network to handle the traffic accordingly Within the BreezeMAX system frames can be classified to QoS classes using Priority Classifiers based on either a DSCP header or 802 1p tag This applies only in cases where an external networking device marks the applicable fields BreezeMAX also enables marking data transmitted to the backbone network with either DSCP or 802 1p values where the marking is done per
224. n version in each one of the upgraded system elements HM SU s Select the SU that should be upgraded Select Unit Control gt SW Versions Control gt Set as Main and enter the name of the new SU SW file The unit will reset automatically and will use the new version after power up Repeat the process for all SUs that should be upgraded AU s Select the AU that should be upgraded Select Unit Control gt SW Versions Control gt Set as Main and enter the name of the new AU SW file The unit will reset automatically After power up the unit will use the new version Repeat the process for all AUs that should be upgraded NPU Select Unit Control gt SW Versions Control gt Run from Shadow The system will reset automatically After power up the NPU will run from the new version that at this stage is still marked as the Shadow Version To switch versions select Unit Control gt SW Versions Control gt Set as Main BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 247 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VolP Gateways In This Appendix Introduction on page B 250 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 Service Profile on page B 252 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 729 Service Profile on page B 254 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 Service Profile on page B 256 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 711 Service Profile on page B 258 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways B 1 Bull B 1 2
225. nal VLAN tag or untagged if there is no VLAN tag NOTE The combination of VLAN Transparency Service On Hybrid VLAN Mode Off and an empty VLAN List means that all packets are forwarded This combination should be used only if the Service Provider can ensure that there will not be conflicts between VLAN IDs used by devices behind the SU and existing VPL IDs When set to Off data packets sent from the Base Station to the backbone will be transferred with a VLAN tag according to the VPL ID The VLAN ID in tagged frames arriving from the wireless network will be replaced by the VPL ID For packets received from the network the forwarding decision will be according to the Forwarding Rule defined in the Service Profile with a matching VPL ID To avoid conflicts a transparent Service Profile cannot be assigned to a Service if the Service s VLAN ID list includes a VLAN ID that is equal to any of the already assigned VPL IDs NOTE The combination VLAN Transparency Mode On Hybrid VLAN Mode On and an empty VLAN List means that only untagged frames should be forwarded Such a Service cannot be assigned if there is an assigned non transparent Service with VPL ID None VPL ID A Virtual Private Link ID to be used in the backbone behind the Base Station The VPL ID parameter is applicable only to Service Profiles with VLAN Transparency Mode Off To avoid conflicts it is not allowed to define a VPL ID that is identical to any of the VLAN IDs i
226. nced Self Install Operation Mode These Default SW File Names and Default Actions are applicable to all SUs in the Base Station using the specified Operation Mode However they are not applicable to any SU served by an AU in which the SU SW File see Section 4 8 5 2 3 3 is other than None null They are also not applicable to any Permanent SU whose Configured SW File Name see Section 4 9 7 2 4 2 is other than None null This menu enables viewing the current SU SW files stored in the NPU and deleting selected file s It also enables defining the Default SW File Name and Default Action for each Operation Mode Show Files Select this option to display the SU SW files currently stored in the NPU For each available SW file the file name and the version number are displayed BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 161 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 4 2 4 9 4 2 1 4 9 4 2 2 4 9 4 3 4 9 4 3 1 162 In addition the Default SU SW File Name if defined and Default Action for each Operation Mode are also displayed Default SW File Standard Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Standard Operation Mode after network entry and the Action to be taken with this file Not applicable to any SU served by an AU in which the SU SW File see Section 4 8 5 2 3 3 is other than None null They are also not applicable to any Permanent SU whose Configured
227. nd updated the bandwidth frequency scanning and antenna parameters The Radio Parameters menu includes the following options E Bandwidth E Frequency Scanning Bandwidth MHz The frequency bandwidth used by the radio A change in the Bandwidth parameter will take effect only after resetting the SU The available options are 1 1 75 MHz 2 3 5 MHz 3 5 MHz 4 7 MHz 5 10 MHz A trial to configure a bandwidth that is not supported by the SU will be rejected Frequency Scanning The list of frequencies that participate in the scanning process includes a set of frequencies belonging to the scanning range and or a set of up to 10 discrete frequencies The frequencies belonging to the scanning range are defined by Start Downlink Rx Frequency End Downlink Rx Frequency Main Step and Intermediate Steps The set of frequencies to be scanned is defined as follows The Main Frequencies are defined by the Start Frequency End Frequency and Main Step using the formula F N Start Frequency N Main Step with End Operation SU Menu Frequency as the upper limit F 1 Start Frequency Main Step F2 Start Frequency 2 Main Step The Intermediate Steps can be used to define additional frequencies using a finer resolution The Intermediate Steps includes a list of up to 8 entries represented by numbers from 1 to 8 or 0 none for no Intermediate Steps The intermediate steps are defined as follows
228. ned 4 Use existing Subscriber Name SU MAC Address and Service Profile Name to define the required Service Once there are various Subscribers and SUs in the database you can skip one or more of the steps 2 to 3 4 10 7 Defining RADIUS Based Services 1 Verify that the necessary Service Profiles are available in the database of the relevant Base Station s 2 The Users List of the server must include the default User Name and Password of the NPU both are KeepAliveUserNameAndPassword 3 The format of the each Service in the ID Filter in the RADIUS Authentication server s is n v h a c The ID Filter may include up to 5 Services separated by Ps sO n Service Profile Name v lt VLAN List gt v lt gt is an empty VLAN list h ON or OFF indicating the configured Hybrid VLAN Mode od 9 9 a lt OFF or ON VLAN ID gt indicating the configured Access VLAN Mode and the Access VLAN ID for Access VLAN ON c ON OFF indicating the configured VLAN Classification Mode Example 1 n be_96 v lt 2 4 5 gt h ON a lt ON 100 gt c ON Example 2 n be_128 v lt 22 gt h OFF a lt OFF gt c OFF BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 219 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 8 Pre configured Profiles At manufacturing stage each NPU is configured with a set of pre configured Profiles Certain parameters of these Profiles may be modified to reflect specific implementation requirements When t
229. nent Services services that are defined in the NPU s database and are provisioned to Permanent SUs The Subscribers database in the NPU can hold up to 1024 Subscribers The configurable Subscriber s parameters are Subscriber Name This is the name of the subscriber which must be unique for the entire network A Subscriber Name consists of up to 32 printable characters First Name An optional parameter for information purposes A First Name consists of up to 50 printable characters Last Name An optional parameter for information purposes A Last Name consists of up to 50 printable characters Description An optional parameter for information purposes A Description consists of up to 50 printable characters Admin Status The administrative status of the Subscriber can be either Enabled or Disabled Select Disabled to disable all services to the Subscriber BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 195 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 10 4 3 4 10 4 3 1 4 10 4 3 1 1 Services There are two types of Services A Permanent Service is defined locally in the database of the Base Station and it defines a Service to be provisioned to a Permanent SU A Temporary Service can only be granted to a Temporary SU Typically Temporary Services are provided by a RADIUS Authentication Server A Temporary Service may also be granted by the Base Station based on the Default Service Profiles when a RADIUS
230. new SW files to the unit s FLASH memory can be performed by a simple loading procedure using a TFTP application Upgrade packages can be obtained from the Technical Support section of Alvarion s web site http www alvarion com Before performing an upgrade procedure be sure you have the most recent instructions and that the correct SW files are available in your computer If you are loading new SU AU SW files verify that no more than two SU AU SW files exist in the NPU If there are three SU AU SW files in the unit one of them must be deleted before loading a new SU AU SW file To view the current SU AU SW files in NPU Select SU AU gt SW Files in NPU gt Show Files To delete an SU AU SW file from NPU Select SU AU gt SW Files in NPU gt Delete a File and enter the name of the file to be deleted BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual File Loading Procedure A 2 x File Loading Procedure To load software files Verify that you have IP connectivity from your computer to the NPU either the MGMT or the DATA port To verify the connection ping the unit s IP address and verify that PING replies are being received To perform the upgrade use a DOS TFTP utility with the following syntax tftp i hostaddress put sourcefile where i stands for binary mode and hostaddress is the IP address of the unit to be upgraded NPU The put command instructs the PC client to send a file to the hostaddress sou
231. ng From Main or Shadow HM MAC Parameters Ke gt gt Ke Base Station ID Operator ID Cell ID Sector ID Operator ID as defined in the Base Station Cell menu Cell ID as defined in the Base Station Cell menu Sector ID ARQ Enable Disable Maximum Cell Radius km HM Multirate Parameters Multirate Enable Disable Uplink Basic Rate Downlink Basic Rate BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 143 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 8 5 2 4 8 5 2 1 4 8 5 2 2 4 8 5 2 3 144 Minimum Number of Sub Channels HM ATPC Parameters as defined in the Base Station Cell menu ATPC Enable Disable Optimal Uplink RSSI dBm E Voice Parameters Maximum Number of Voice Calls Active Voice Calls Unit Control The AU Unit Control menu enables resetting the AU and managing the SW versions of the module The Unit Control menu includes the following options E Reset E Set Factory Defaults E SW Version Control Reset Unit Select this option to reset the unit To avoid unintentional reset you will be prompted to confirm the reset request Changes to some of the configurable parameters are applied only after reset Refer to Section 4 11 for information on which parameters are changeable in run time and which changes are applied only after reset Set Factory Defaults Select this option to set the AU parameters to their factory default values Refer t
232. nitor program The available actions depend on the access level password used for accessing the program Administrator Read Write permissions for all parameters The default password is admin Installer Read only permission for the Services menu Read Write permissions for all other options excluding the Change Password option The default password is installer Monitor Read only permissions for all parameters The default password is monitor BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 85 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 86 E Each menu or submenu specifies the unit type BreezeMAX NPU the IP address of the port used for accessing the Monitor program when using the MON port there is no IP address the running SW version and a description of the menu E Each menu or submenu displays a list of numbered options To access an option enter the number of the required option at the gt prompt and press the Enter key E At any point in the program you can use the Esc key to return to the previous menu one level up without applying any change E The first selectable item in most menus is the Show option enabling to view the current configuration of the applicable parameters For some menus some additional status information is displayed For certain parameters an updated value is applied only after reset or after entering a specific command In these parameters the configured value may differ f
233. nmoqgteednennja 220 4 11NPU Parameters Summary sssccncicccescccsssctccincncstecncnscnecaneantecnnsensntioeanteeceienancseeevsansenies 226 Appendix A Software Upgrade AT Before VOU Statt saved inana inaen kannaa uai Eaua 244 A 2 File Loading Procedure sssassnssunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnana 245 A 3 Completing the Software Upgrade Switching Versions snvrrrrrnrnnnnnnnnvnvnvernnnnn 247 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VolP Gateways B INTFOGUCTION Lacemesemmuvuinmieumi mme nae anne 250 B 1 1 Fer 250 B 1 2 General ASsumphons vunne nd vade EREE AEE 250 B 2 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 Service Profile rrnnnnnnvrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnennnnnnen 252 B 2 1 Service Characteristics varamenn k en onkceneesonsaaned seeeatuencrmnennueieanete 252 B 2 2 RTP BW Calculation rs as 252 B 2 3 RTOP BW Calculation sssrinin eet a a naa EEN 252 xviii BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Contents B 2 4 QoS Profile spede 252 B 3 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 729 Service Profile rrrrrrrrnnnvvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnner 254 B 3 1 Service Characteristics vumasuusmnnmimuerivmnunnddevi inn 254 B 3 2 Voice RTP BW Calculation ladd 254 B 3 3 Voice RTCP BW Calculation s rrnrrrnnnonvrrnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnrrnnnerrrrrnnnnennrnnnennnnnnnereen 254 B 3 4 T 38 14 400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculation errrnrrrnnnorrrrrrnnonnnrvnnrnnnrnnnrernnr 254 B 3
234. nnmnne ene 30 2 1 1 AU ODU Installation Requirements rrrnnnnnnvnnnrnnnvnnnnvnrrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnennnrnnrnnnnnrr 30 2 1 2 Guidelines for Positioning the AU ODU rarrnnrvnnnnnnnvnnnrnnvnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnanennnrr 31 72 eC PE 32 2 124 Pole Mounting the ODU issiima n a EERE 33 FE cr a eds saanesnnigusenysarieatndgae mthape en iostens eteeantes 36 2 1 6 Connecting the GaDleSivcccesccessccasescantiexecnvacestcds haven seideenePensediendaeantbeer va eteeenenteeee 37 2 2 Installing the Base Station Equipment rrnnnvvnnnnnnvnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnn 39 2 2 1 BST Installation Requirements rrsrnvrrvnnnonnvvnnnnnnnvnnenvrrrnnnnernrrnnnennnrnnnernnrnnnnenn 39 2 2 2 BMAX BST SH Chassis Slot Assignments ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeneeeees 40 2 2 3 Power REQUIRGINGNS ssdecceccesadtadsycadencecess cash ceectdcagiwcata ties eAcsnseacsuaceemtecets dead ices 41 2 2 4 HOT SWAP PN 42 2 2 5 Power Interface Unit PIU Lzeseaussusesastestumtemnadtedkemindsdijee 42 2 2 6 Power Supply Unit PSU ass 45 2 2 7 Access Unit Indoor Module AU IDU ranonrennnnnrnnnnnnnnvenennnnnnnnnnnrnnnnennrrrnnnnnnne 47 2 2 8 Network Processing Unit NPU save dressene 49 2 2 9 Using the Hot Swap Injector Ejector Handles rrnnrnnnnnnrrnnnnonnvrnnnnnnnvnnnnrnnrnnnnenr 51 2 2 10 Installing the Base Station Chassis and Modules rrnnvrrnnrrnnrrnnnorrrrrnnnnenvnnnenn 53 xiv BreezeMAX Modular Base Sta
235. nnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnvrnrnnnnernnrrnnsnnnnenne 58 Table 2 15 ODU Power Feeder LEDS rrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnvnnrrnnnannnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnvnnnnrnnrnnsnnnnnrannennnnenne 59 Table 2 16 GPS Adapter COnnectors cccccccccsssssceceeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeessecneeeeeeeeeesssssniaeeeeeseneeses 62 Table 2 17 GPS Adapter LEDS sunne cates cccetesastsccesvacanss Qactscadussccnsedensss ceesenencimeaseseceeuatseridentdeas 63 Table 2 18 NPU to GPS Adapter Cable Pin Out nnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnvnnrnnnnnnnnrrnnennnnenne 65 Table 2 19 GPS Adapter to Outdoor GPS Receiver Cable Pin Out rrrrnrrrrrrrnnnnrnrrererrrrnnnnnnnn 66 Table 3 1 Basic NPU Parameters sasasesauva rtdeneusununakgermmnaeadupind e 68 Table 3 2 CEOD E E DII 74 Table 3 3 AU IDU LEDS sincss cawnrsisinasnudgsinicanatianessaussneusentenauashtus vanesinnsnsvestidearsttensianwiiiatentansiateamiieds 75 Table 3 4 NPULEDE iornncvas taaanncnnnscsensntenscenatrasapabuasinanpttninewantensbtuin tiadsaxauteapnitiasasdataeiathendedasiinnnds 76 Table3 5 PU EDS 4unassdenekdmmiaenstakaualmannfansgrjedmjanausmansnjvdivie 77 Table 3 6 PSU LEDS eee 77 Table 3 7 AVU LEDS see SG 77 Table 3 8 ODU Power Feeder LEDS rrrnnannnnrvnnnnnnnvnnnrnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnrnnrnnnnennnrrnnennnnenne 78 Table 3 9 GPS Adapter LEDS assesses inccecis cedar csacescnsayvaiotencgedecadvate uiecanayedeeedcaacy Aeaevutesancesaeceesecens 78 Table 4 1 COM Port Configuration cccc
236. nt Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters Management Port Gateway The Gateway IP address of the Management port The default is 0 0 0 0 meaning no default gateway Operation NPU Menu 4 5 3 1 4 4 5 3 1 5 ell laa Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet as The Destination Subnet parameters define a Static Route which is an IP subnet of stations that can manage the device when connected via a router to the Management port The Static Route is applicable only when remote management is enabled for both the Management and Data ports i e when both Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable and Data Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameters are set to Enable The default is 0 0 0 0 for both parameters meaning no Static Route In a binary representation 32 bits the subnet mask must comprise a series of contiguous binary 1 s starting from the MSB followed by a series of contiguous binary O s NOTE The Management Port Gateway Destination Subnet and Destination Subnet Mask are grouped together Exiting the configuration process e g by pressing the Esc key after configuring just the first one or two parameters in this group will discard the changes made The subnet that is used as the Static Route for remote management via the Management port defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters must differ from the local subnet of the Management port def
237. nt services to different VLANs VLAN Classification Mode can be set to On only if the following conditions are met E The VLAN Transparency Mode of the applicable Service Profile is set to On E A single VLAN ID is defined for the Service This means that the allowed combinations are Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List includes a single VLAN ID Hybrid VLAN Mode is On and the VLAN List is empty HM All Services assigned to the same SU must be configured with the same VLAN Classification Mode Either On or Off 4 10 4 3 1 8 Access VLAN The Access VLAN parameter enables defining a VLAN ID to be used with untagged packets received on the Ethernet port of the SU This parameter is applicable only for a transparent service VLAN Transparency Mode is On with Hybrid Mode set to On or a transparent service with Hybrid Mode set to Off and an empty VLAN list A tag with the defined Access VLAN will be added by the NPU to untagged packets in the uplink The tag will be removed by the NPU from packets in the downlink For a multicast connection the NPU will send in addition to the VLAN list the single Access VLAN The SU will be responsible to remove the Access VLAN if it is received on a multicast connection A maximum of one Access VLAN can be defined per SU 198 Operation Services Menu The range is from 1 to 4094 or null for no Access VLAN 4 10 4 3 1 9 Admin Status The administrative status of the Service can b
238. nu Currently the Class of all QoS Profiles is Local Filtering Rules The Filtering Rules menu enables defining L2 Filtering Rules and L3 L4 Filtering Rules L2 Filtering Rules An L2 Layer 2 Filtering Rule includes the MAC Address and Ethertype A range of MAC Addresses can be defined for either the Source or Destination MAC Address field It is possible to define Any for either the MAC Address or Ethertype field but not for both fields The L2 Filtering Rules menu enables defining new L2 Filtering Rule viewing details of previously defined L2 Filtering Rules and removing L2 Filtering Rules from the database It is not possible to edit the parameters of an existing L2 Filtering Rule The database can hold up to 255 L2 Filtering Rules Operation Services Menu The configurable L2 Filtering Rule parameters are 4 10 4 8 1 1 Rule Name The name of the L2 Rule The L2 Rule Name is a string of 1 to 32 printable characters 4 10 4 8 1 2 MAC Address The base MAC Address that is used together with the MAC Address Mask to define a range of MAC addresses A string of 6 octets where each octet is represented by two hexadecimal numbers separated by dashes An empty entry means Any An Any MAC Address means that the filter is defined only by the Ethertype field 4 10 4 8 1 3 MAC Address Mask The mask that is used together with the MAC Address to define a range of MAC addresses A string of 6 octets where each
239. o Section 4 11 for information on the factory default values of these parameters The parameters will revert to their default values after the next reset SW Versions Control The AU can contain two SW versions E Main Each time the AU resets it will reboot using the version defined as Main Operation AU Menu 4 8 5 2 3 1 4 8 5 2 3 2 E Shadow Normally the Shadow version is the backup version Each time a new SW File is downloaded to the AU it will be stored as a Shadow version replacing the previous Shadow Version The process of upgrading to a new SW version is controlled by the NPU and is performed using one of the AU SW files installed in the NPU If the specified AU SW file does not exist in the AU it will be downloaded to the AU and the requested operation will be executed as described below If it already exists in the AU then actual loading is not necessary The following options are available in the SW Version Control menu Show Versions Select this option to view the following information HM Versions in AU Main SW File Name Main SW Version Shadow SW File Name Shadow SW Version oC Oo Running From Main or Shadow E Available Versions in NPU The available AU SW file names and the SW version of each file SW File Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the AU after installation as well as after each reset and the Action to be taken with thi
240. o Negotiation Option 123 Gateway 123 IP Address 122 Management Traffic Enable Disable 123 Management VLAN 123 Parameters 122 Speed 123 Subnet Mask 122 Data Port Counters 127 Days 96 DC Power Cable ODU Power Feeder 59 Debug Stream 126 Default Action Interface Filtering 216 Default L2 Voice Service Profile 195 Default PPPoE Service Profile 195 Default SW File Adv Si AU 141 SU 162 Default SW File Std AU 140 SU 162 Defining Local Service Profiles 218 Defining Local Services 219 Delete Accounting Server 105 AU SW File in NPU 141 Authentication Server 103 ODU 135 SU 183 SU SW File 163 Dest Subnet 121 Dest Subnet Mask 121 Device Location 92 Device Name 92 Discrete Frequencies 179 DL UL Ratio 94 Downlink Tx Frequency Channel 151 Downlink Basic Rate AU 154 Downlink QoS Profiles 209 Downlink Upper Priority Limits 209 DRAP Description 186 DRAP TTL Retries 125 DSCP Marking Mode 204 Duplex Mode 93 Duplex Parameters 93 Duplicate Sessions 188 Duplicate SU Name 160 E Eject AU IDU 52 NPU 52 PIU with HOT SWAP 52 PIU without HOT SWAP 52 PSU 52 Enable Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices SU 175 End Downlink Rx Frequency 180 Ethernet Port SU 174 Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation SU 174 Ethernet Port Speed and Duplex su 175 Ethertype L2 Filtering Rule 213 External 16MHz Clock 95 External 1PPS Clock 95 280 BreezeMAX Modular Base S
241. oad to the CPE the required permanent license for unlimited bandwidth If a license was not loaded during this grace period the following will happen E During the first 3 days defined as a temporary grace period the Network Service Provider may change the services assigned to the CPE so that the aggregate MIR is no longer above 2 Mbps The CPE will be removed from the list of Temporary Grace Licenses and will return to its previous status E After expiry of the 3 days temporary grace period the CPE is moved to the Grace Licenses list After expiry of the full 30 days grace period the CPE is moved to a list of Grace Period Expired CPEs even if during the grace period the services assigned to them were changed so that the aggregate MIR is no longer above 2 Mbps A CPE that was moved to the Grace Period Expired list will remain in this list for 3 months A CPE that is included in this list cannot be cannot be granted another grace period Any attempt to assign to ita service that will bring the aggregate MIR to a value above 2 Mbps will be rejected The Show Temporary Grace Licenses option displays a table that includes the MAC addresses of CPEs that are currently included in the Temporary Grace License list For each CPE the displayed list includes also the License ID only BW license is applicable in the current version and the expiry date of the temporary grace period The Show Grace Licenses option displays a table that includes the
242. octet is represented by two hexadecimal numbers separated by dashes In a binary representation the string must comprise a series of contiguous binary l s starting from the MSB followed by a series of contiguous binary O s if the range includes more than a single address The MAC Address Mask parameter is not applicable for an Any MAC Address 4 10 4 8 1 4 MAC Address Direction The direction Source or Destination of the MAC Address Indicates whether the range defined by the MAC Address and MAC Address Mask is for the Source MAC Address field or the Destination MAC Address field in the Ethernet frame The MAC Address Direction parameter is not applicable to Any MAC Address 4 10 4 8 1 5 Ethertype 4 10 4 8 2 The Ethertype of the Ethernet frame The Ethertype is defined by 4 hexadecimal digits An empty entry means Any and is applicable only if a MAC Address range is defined the combination of Any for both the MAC Address and Ethertype is not allowed L3 L4 Filtering Rules An L3 L4 Layer 3 Layer 4 Filtering Rule includes the IP Address and Protocol A range of IP Addresses can be defined for either the Source or Destination IP Address field It is possible to define Any for either the IP Address or Protocol field but not for both fields If the specified Protocol is either TCP 6 or UDP 17 either the Source or Destination Port can be defined It is also possible to define Any Port The direction is applic
243. ofile for uplink communication The list includes up to 4 numbers separated by commas where each number must be higher than its predecessor and the last number must be the highest available for the applicable priority type 7 for 802 1p 63 for DSCP Examples for acceptable lists DSCP Priority 10 30 50 63 21 42 63 20 63 63 802 1p Priority 2 4 6 7 1 5 7 6 7 7 A ranges list of 21 42 63 means that packets with a priority from 0 to 21 will be transmitted using the first QoS Profile defined in the Uplink QoS Profiles list see below packets with a priority from 22 to 42 will be transmitted using the second QoS Profile defined in the Uplink QoS Profiles list and packets with a priority higher than 42 43 63 will be transmitted using the third Uplink QoS Profile A ranges list that includes a single entry 63 for DSCP and 7 for 802 1p means that priority based classification is not used Uplink QoS Profiles The Uplink QoS Profiles parameter enables to define up to four QoS Profiles where each entry is the QoS Profile associated with the applicable entry in the Uplink Upper Priority Limits list The list includes up to four QoS Profile Names where each name must be one of the names that exist in the database after being defined using the QoS Profile menu Each entry in the Uplink QoS Profiles list is associated with the applicable entry in the Uplink Priority Ranges list Downlink Upper Priority Limits The DownLink
244. on E IDU NG 4D1W A Networking Gateway that serves also as an SU IDU supporting 4 data ports and 1 Wireless LAN port E VG 1D1V A stand alone external Voice Gateway supporting 1 data port and 1 POTS port E VG 1D2V A stand alone external Voice Gateway supporting 1 data port and 2 POTS ports Ethernet Port The Ethernet Port menu enables configuration of the Ethernet port operation mode speed and duplex Show The Show option enables viewing the configured and actual operation modes E Current Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation E Current Ethernet Port Speed and Duplex E Configured Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation E Configured Ethernet Port Speed and Duplex NA if Configured Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation is set to Enable E Ethernet Port Link Status Up or Down Update Select the Update option to change the Ethernet Port parameters E Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation Enable or Disable Operation SU Menu 4 9 7 3 7 4 9 7 3 8 x 4 9 7 3 8 1 4 9 7 3 8 2 4 9 7 3 8 3 E Ethernet Port Speed and Duplex Available only if the configured Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation is set to Disable The available options are 10 Half 10 Full 100 Half and 100 Full Installer Password The Installer Password option enables viewing the current Installer Password and configuring a new password The Installer Password is used for accessing the SU s Monitor Installer program locally using Telnet via the SU s Ethernet
245. on and select a slot to access the AU Slot f menu that will enable managing and configuring the AU in the selected slot or pre configuring the AU that will be installed in the slot at a later time The available AU slot IDs are 1 4 7 9 AU Slot Menu The AU Slot menu enables managing and configuring the AU in the selected slot or pre configuring the AU that will be installed in the slot at a later time The AU Slot menu includes the following options E Show E Unit Control E Configuration E Performance Monitoring Show Select this option to view the current value selected option of applicable parameters In addition some general status information is shown as follows E General Status and Operation Parameters IDU Serial Number IDU IF Card HW Revision IDU IF Card HW Configuration IDU Boot Version IDU Main Card HW Revision IDU Main Card HW Configuration IDU Temperature Celsius IDU Type Cumulative Power On Time hours The cumulative power on time of the IDU since first power up Operation AU Menu D Ke Operation Mode Standard or Advanced Si Diversity Mode Service Type BH SW Files and Versions 9 Oo Oo 9 99999959 Configured SW File Name Configured SW Version Configured Operation Configured SU SW File Name Configured SU SW Version Configured SU Operation Main SW File Name Main SW Version Shadow SW File Name Shadow SW Version Runni
246. on of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user s own expense FCC Radiation Hazard Warning Base Station To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in Section 1 1307 and 2 1091 of FCC Rules the antenna used for this transmitter must be fixed mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 2 meter from all persons and must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Indoor CPE To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in Section 1 1307and 2 1091 of FCC Rules the antenna used for this transmitter must be kept at a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Outdoor CPE To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in Section 1 1307 and 2 1091 of FCC Rules the antenna be used for this transmitter must be fixed mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 120 cm from all persons and must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter R amp TTE Compliance Statement This equipment complies with the appropriate essential requirements of Article 3 of the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Safety Considerations General For the following safety considerations Instrument mean
247. ontinue using it for authentication accounting transactions The RADIUS menu includes three sub menus E General Parameters E Authentication E Accounting General Parameters The General Parameters menu enables viewing and modifying parameters that affect the communication with all RADIUS servers These parameters include E Shared Secret E Retry Interval sec E Maximum Number of Retries E Keep Alive Timeout sec Shared Secret Shared Secret is the key used for encrypting the User name and Password transmitted to the RADIUS server s For security and control reasons the Shared Secret option is available only for users with Administration access rights using the Administrator Password to access the program The Shared Secret cannot be changed using SNMP For the same security reasons the Shared Secret is displayed as a series of asterisks and when defining it for the first time or updating it the user is prompted to re enter the new Shared Secret for confirmation NOTE For security reasons the Shared Secret does not change after performing the Set Factory Defaults operation For the same reason the Shared Secret cannot be configured using SNMP and it is not included in backup configuration files Valid Shared Secret Up to 16 printable characters case sensitive Operation Base Station Menu 4 4 4 1 2 4 4 4 1 3 4 4 4 1 4 4 4 4 2 The default Shared Secret is null Shared Secret must be defined
248. operly installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and national codes it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna mast when using external antenna are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges In any event Alvarion is not liable for any injury damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation grounding or lightning protection Disposal of Electronic and Electrical Waste H Disposal of Electronic and Electrical Waste Pursuant to the WEEE EU Directive electronic and electrical waste must not be disposed of with unsorted waste Please contact your local recycling authority for disposal of this product BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual ix Legal Rights Important Notice This user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose disclose
249. or invalid received from this server Access Challenges The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from this server Malformed Access Responses The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response Access Accept Access Challenge or Access Reject packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Signature attributes or unknown types are not included Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Signature attributes received from this server BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 103 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 4 4 3 4 4 4 3 1 104 Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This counter is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject or Access Challenge a timeout or retransmission Timeouts The number of authentication timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as wellasa timeout Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server
250. order to meet the delay and jitter requirements of the underlying service Service parameters include Packet Size unsolicited grant size and Sampling Rate grant interval Operation Services Menu 4 10 4 7 1 4 10 4 7 2 4 10 4 7 3 The priorities of allocating bandwidth to connections are in accordance with the QoS Type of the connections in the following order 1 CG 2 RT 3 NRT 4 BE For each of the RT NRT and BE connection there is a second level of priorities according to the Committed Time CT where connections with CT Short gets the highest priority and connections with CT Long gets the lowest priority The QoS Profile menu enables viewing all QoS Profiles in the database defining new QoS Profiles editing details of previously defined QoS Profiles and removing QoS Profiles from the database The QoS Profiles database can hold up to 255 QoS Profiles The available QoS Profile parameters depend on the QoS Type The QoS Profile s parameters are QoS Profile Name A QoS Profile Name consists of up to 32 printable characters QoS Type The QoS Type that defines the QoS parameters that are applicable to the service The available options are 1 CG Continuous Grant 2 RT Real Time 3 NRT Non real time 4 BE Best Effort CT RT NRT and BE QoS Types The CT Committed Time parameter defines the time window over which the information rate is averaged to ensure compliance with the CIR or
251. orward NRT 750 850 Null Multicast VLANs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation taking into account the considerations described in Section 4 10 1 5 Table 4 12 Pre Configured Priority Classifiers for Data Services Name Type Uplink Uplink QoS Downlink Downlink QoS Priority Profiles Priority Ranges Profiles Ranges BE Asymmetric 802 1p 7 BE 96 7 BE 750 Gold Asymmetric 802 1p T NRT 128 192 7 NRT 1500 1750 Silver Asymmetric 802 1p T NRT 96 128 7 NRT 1000 1150 Bronze Asymmetric 802 1p 7 NRT 96 128 7 NRT 750 850 Gold Symmetric 802 1p 7 NRT 1500 1750 7 NRT 1500 1750 Silver Symmetric 802 1p 7 NRT 1000 1150 7 NRT 1000 1150 Bronze Symmetric 802 1p 7 NRT 750 850 7 NRT 750 850 Table 4 13 Pre Configured QoS Profiles for Data Services Name Type CIR Kbps MIR Kbps CT BE 96 Best Effort NA 96 Medium BE 750 Best Effort NA 750 Medium NRT 96 128 Non Real Time 96 128 Medium 222 Operation Services Menu Table 4 13 Pre Configured QoS Profiles for Data Services Name Type CIR Kbps MIR Kbps CT NRT 128 192 Non Real Time 128 192 Medium NRT 750 850 Non Real Time 750 850 Medium NRT 1000 1150 Non Real Time 1000 1150 Medium NRT 1500 1750 Non Real Time 1500 1750 Medium Table 4 14 Pre Configured
252. ovisioning using either a commercial RADIUS server or an entry level BreezeMAX Service Manager server available from Alvarion HM Centralized Service Profiles distribution to ensure location free service availability and fully controlled service provisioning HM A suite of features and support tools to enable fast and simple installation according to various business models The system operates in Time Division Duplex TDD and is currently available in the 2 3 GHz WCS 2 5 GHz MMDS and MCS and 3 5 GHz frequency bands The actual operating frequencies used by the system can be configured according to applicable radio regulations license conditions and specific deployment considerations A BreezeMAX system comprises the following E Customer Premise Equipment CPE BreezeMAX Subscriber Units and Alvarion s Voice Networking Gateways E Base Station BST Equipment BreezeMAX Base Station equipment including the modular Base Station Outdoor Radio Units GPS Receiver and other components BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 3 Chapter 1 System Description E Networking Equipment Standard switches routers and other networking equipment supporting connections to the backbone and or Internet E Management Systems SNMP based Management RADIUS server s and other Operation Support Systems Indoor Self Installed Hm VOI Gateway Gateway Wireless Networking XD Figure 1 1 BreezeMAX Sy
253. ow frequency interference conducted emissions to the external power source Each Base Station chassis contains two slots for an optional 1 1 PIU redundancy One PIU is sufficient to support a fully populated chassis Two PIU modules provide redundant power feeding two input sources while avoiding current flow between the two input sources Installation Installing the Base Station Equipment 2210 M A s T E R y J Figure 2 6 PIU Module Front Panel NOTE x The HOT SWAP blue LED does not exist in first generation PIUS CAUTION A In a first generation PIU without HOT SWAP LED disconnect power from the PIU module before inserting ejecting it to from the chassis Before disconnecting the power cable from the PIU the power source must be disconnected to avoid irreversible damage due to a potential excessively high transient current In a second generation PIU with HOT SWAP LED disconnect power from the PIU module only after it is taken out from the chassis or after the HOT SWAP LED is turned on Connect power to the PIU only after it is fully inserted into the chassis BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 43 Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines Table 2 7 PIU LEDs PWR and MASTER PIU Status LEDs PWR MASTER Off Off Chassis is not connected to power Red Off Power is not connected or power input is out of range or PIU card is damaged
254. parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty Trade Names Alvarion BreezeCOM WALKair WALKnet BreezeNET BreezeACCESS BreezeMANAGE BreezeLINK BreezeCONFIG BreezeMAX AlvariSTAR AlvariCRAFT BreezeLITE MGW eMGW and or other products and or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners Statement of Conditions The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Alvarion Ltd shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it Warranties and Disclaimers All Alvarion Ltd Alvarion products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions Exclusive Warranty a Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible media on which any software is installed under normal use and
255. platform operating in Time Division Duplex TDD mode It leverages Alvarion s market leading knowledge of Broadband Wireless Access BWA industry leadership proven field experience and core technologies including many years of experience with OFDM technology Built from the ground up based on the IEEE 802 16 ETSI HIPERMAN standards BreezeMAX is designed specifically to meet the unique requirements of the wireless Metropolitan Area Network MAN environment and to deliver broadband access services to a wide range of customers including residential SOHO SME and multi tenant customers Its Media Access Control MAC protocol was designed for point to multipoint broadband wireless access applications providing a very efficient use of the wireless spectrum and supporting difficult user environments The access and bandwidth allocation mechanisms accommodate hundreds of subscriber units per channel with subscriber units that may support different services to multiple end users The system uses OFDM radio technology which is robust in adverse channel conditions and enables operation in non line of sight links This allows easy installation and improves coverage while maintaining a high level of spectral efficiency Modulation and coding can be adapted per burst ever striving to achieve a balance between robustness and efficiency in accordance with prevailing link conditions BreezeMAX supports a wide range of network services including Int
256. polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHS BS ANT 120 2 X DP 2 x 13 dBi minimum in the 2 3 2 7 GHz band 120 AZ x 8 EL sector antenna dual slant 45 polarization compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHS 18 System Description Specifications 1 5 3 Base Station 3 5 GHz Antennas Optional Table 1 5 Base Station 3 5 GHz Antennas Electrical Specifications Item Description BS ANT 60V 3 3 3 8 16 5 dBi minimum in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 60 AZ x 10 EL vertical polarization compliant with ESTI EN 302 085 V 1 1 2 2001 02 CS2 BS ANT 90V 3 3 3 8 15 dBi typical in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 90 AZ x 9 EL vertical polarization compliant with ESTI EN 302 085 V 1 1 2 2001 02 CSI CS2 CS3 BS ANT 90V 3 3 3 7 15 dBi typical in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 90 AZ x 7 EL vertical polarization compliant with ESTI EN 302 085 V 1 1 2 2001 02 CSI CS2 CS3 BS ANT 120V 3 3 3 8 14 dBi typical in the 3 3 3 7 GHz band 120 AZ x 6 7 EL vertical polarization compliant with ESTI EN 302 085 V 1 2 3 2005 09 CS1 BS ANT 60 3 5H 16 dBi typical in the 3 4 3 6 GHz band 60 AZ x 9 EL horizontal polarization compliant with EN 302 085 V1 1 1 CS3 BS ANT 90 3 5H 14 dBi typical in the 3 4 3 6 GHz band 85 AZ x 9 EL horizontal polarization compliant with EN 302 085 V1 1 1 CS3 BS ANT 60 3 5 DP 2 x 16 5 dBi minimum in the 3 3 3 8 GHz band 65 AZ x 7
257. provide the requested services IPsec can be used to protect one or more paths between a pair of hosts between a pair of security gateways or between a security gateway and a host Internet Service Provider BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Glossary ITU T LAN LED LVDS MAC MAC Address MAN MCS MD5 International Telecommunication Union Telecommunications An intergovernmental organization through which public and private organizations develop telecommunications The ITU was founded in 1865 and became a United Nations agency in 1947 It is responsible for adopting international treaties regulations and standards governing telecommunications The standardization functions were formerly performed by a group within the ITU called CCITT but after a 1992 reorganization the CCITT no longer exists as a separate entity Local area Network A computer network limited to a small geographical area such as a single building The network typically links PCs as well as shared resources such as printers Light Emitting Diode Low Voltage Differential Signaling A low noise low power low amplitude method for high speed gigabits per second data transmission over copper wire Media Access Control The lower of the two sub layers of the data link layer defined by the IEEE The MAC sub layer handles access to shared media such as whether token passing or contention will be used Standardized data lin
258. radation due to unintentional EMI Electro Magnetic Interference EMC generally encompasses all of the electromagnetic disciplines European Telecommunications Standards Institute A non profit organization producing voluntary telecommunications standards used throughout Europe some of which have been adopted by the EC as the technical base for Directives or Regulations Federal Communications Commission A U S government agency that supervises licenses and controls electronic and electromagnetic transmission standards Frequency Division Duplex Full duplex operation by using a pair of frequencies one for transmission and one for reception Forward Error Correction A method of communicating data that can corrects errors in transmission on the receiving end Prior to transmission the data is put through a predetermined algorithm that adds extra bits specifically for error correction to any character or code block If the transmission is received in error the correction bits are used to check and repair the data Fast Fourier Transform An algorithm for converting data from the time domain to the frequency domain often used in signal processing File Transfer Protocol A protocol for exchanging files over the Internet FTP uses the Internet s TCP IP protocols to enable data transfer A 64 Kbps PCM voice coding technique Described in the ITU T standard in its G series recommendations A compression technique that can be
259. ransmission with a fallback to 5 5 2 and 1 Mbps in the 2 4 GHz band An extension to 802 11 standard for wireless Ethernet networks that applies to wireless LANs and provides 20 Mbps in the 2 4 GHz band Internet Engineering Task Force One of the task forces of the IAB Internet Architecture Board formally called the Internet Activities Board which is the technical body that oversees the development of the Internet suite of protocols commonly referred to as TCP IP The IETF is responsible for solving short term engineering needs of the Internet Intermediate Frequency Radio communications systems modulate a carrier frequency with a baseband signal in order to achieve radio transmission In many cases the carrier is not modulated directly Instead a lower IF signal is modulated and processed At a later circuit stage the IF signal is converted up to the transmission frequency band Internet Protocol The standard that defines how data is transmitted over the Internet IP bundles data including e mail faxes voice calls and messages and other types into packets in order to transmit it over public and private networks Security Architecture for IP Network IP Control Protocol IPCP and IPv6 Control Protocol IPsec provides security services at the IP layer by enabling a system to select required security protocols determine the algorithm s to use for the service s and put in place any cryptographic keys required to
260. rcefile is the name of the SW file in the PC Client For example to load the file npu_2_0_1_15 to the NPU whose IP address is 172 17 31 215 use the following command tftp i 172 17 31 215 put npu 2 0 1 15 NOTE It is recommended to upgrade all system elements with the latest software version Nevertheless it is possible to upgrade each unit separately and independently 3 Following a successful completion of the file loading process the Transfer successful DOS message is displayed The unit decompresses the loaded file and checks the integrity of the new version The new version replaces the previous shadow version only after verification If verification tests fail the loaded version will be rejected The unit will reject a file if either the file name or the version number matches the current Main versions Check that the loaded versions exist in the unit To view the current NPU SW Versions in the unit Select Unit Control gt SW Versions Control gt Show Versions BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 245 Appendix A Software Upgrade gt To view the current NPU SW Versions in the unit Select SU AU gt SW Files in NPU gt Show Files 246 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Completing the Software Upgrade Switching Versions A 3 Completing the Software Upgrade Switching Versions After verifying successful upload of all software files set the new version as the mai
261. re Configured QoS Profiles for Data Services wrrrrrrrnrrrrnvnnrrrvrvrrnnnrnvervrrrrrnnnnnn 222 Table 4 14 Pre Configured Voice Service Profiles for DRAP based Gateways 08 223 Table 4 15 Pre Configured Service Profiles for Generic non DRAP VoIP Services 223 Table 4 16 Pre Configured Forwarding Rule for Voice Services rrrrrrrnrrrrrrnnnnnnvvnnnrrnnrnnnrrennn 224 Table 4 17 Pre Configured Priority Classifiers for Generic non DRAP VoIP Service 224 Table 4 18 Pre Configured BE and RT QoS Profile for Voice Services rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnnnnn 224 Table 4 19 Pre Configured CG QoS Profile for Generic non DRAP VoIP Services 225 Table 4 20 Pre Configured Forwarding Rule for Transparent Services rrrarnvrvrnnnrnnnrnnrrennr 225 Table 4 21 Pre Configured QoS Profile for Transparent Services mmrrnrrrnrarnnvrnnrrrvrrrnnernnnr 225 Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary rrrrvrnnnonvrrrnnnnnnvrnnnnnnrrnnnrnnnrrnnnnennrnnenernnvenerernn 226 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual XXV Chapter 1 System Description In This Chapter E Introducing BreezeMAX on page 2 E Base Station Equipment on page 5 E Networking Equipment on page 12 E Management Systems on page 13 E Specifications on page 16 Chapter 1 System Description ud Introducing BreezeMAX BreezeMAX TDD BreezeMAX is Alvarion s WiMAX ready
262. receive them properly In addition multicasts and broadcasts are sent to multiple recipients with different link qualities Therefore it is preferable to use a relatively low rate for these transmissions thus reducing the probability of errors and increasing the likelihood that all intended recipients will receive them properly In the uplink this is the rate to be used by SUs for non scheduled transmissions such as during the contention period The Basic Rate is also the initial rate to be used by the algorithm for each new SU that joins the cell when the Multirate algorithm is enabled When the Multirate algorithm is disabled communication with connected SUs will continue using the last uplink and downlink rates selected by the Multirate algorithm The Set Rates option in the SU see Section 4 9 7 3 4 2 which becomes available only when the Multirate algorithm is disabled in the AU enables setting the Uplink Current Rate and the Downlink Current Rate to any of the values listed in Table 4 5 The multirate algorithm chooses dynamically between several rates These are also the rates that can be configured for the Basic Rate parameters Table 4 5 Rates Modulation Schemes and Coding No Rate 1 BPSK 1 2 BPSK 3 4 not applicable for TDD systems QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 QAM16 1 2 QAM16 3 4 QAM64 2 3 oo NIOJ a AJOJN QAM64 3 4 NOTE x Rate 2 BPSK 3 4 is not appli
263. ring Rules List 215 Menu 215 Interface Type 166 Intermediate Scanning Steps 180 Internet Access L2 Pre Configured Profile 220 Internet Access PPPoE Pre Configured Profile 220 IP Address Accounting Server 105 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 281 Index Authentication Server 102 Authorized Managers 125 Data Port 122 L3 L4 Filtering Rule 214 Management Port 120 IP Address Direction L3 L4 Filtering Rule 214 IP Address Mask L3 L4 Filtering Rule 214 K Keep Alive Timeout 101 L L2 Filtering Rules Ethertype 213 MAC Address 213 MAC Address Direction 213 MAC Address Mask 213 Menu 212 Rule Name 213 L2 Filtering Rules List 215 L2 Service 185 L3 L4 Filtering Rules IP Address 214 IP Address Direction 214 IP Address Mask 214 Menu 213 Port 214 Port Direction 214 Protocol 214 Rule Name 214 L3 L4 Filtering Rules List 215 Last Name 195 Latitude 111 LEDs AU IDU 48 AU ODU 37 AVU 55 GPS Adapter 63 NPU 50 ODU Power Feeder 59 PIU 44 PSU 46 Longitude 110 Loop 159 M MAC Standard FDD Parameters su 171 MAC Address L2 Filtering Rule 213 MAC Address Control Number 164 MAC Address Direction L2 Filtering Rule 213 MAC Address Mask L2 Filtering Rule 213 MAC Addresses Deny List 218 MAC Parameters AU 147 Management Port Dest Subnet 121 Dest Subnet Mask 121 Gateway 120 IP Address 120 Management Traffic Enable Disable 121 Parameters 120
264. rom the actual value If the configured value differs from the actual value both values will be displayed where the first one is the configured value and the second is the actual value For example Bandwidth MHz 5 3 5 means that the configured bandwidth to be applied after the next reset is 5 MHz and the current actual bandwidth is 3 5 MHz For certain parameters the actual values may not be available such as when pre configuring an AU that is not yet installed For these parameters a value of NA Not Available will be displayed E The Update Add options will display all applicable parameters line by line allowing to conveniently edit all of them The current value is displayed for each parameter To keep the current value press Enter To change it enter a new value and press Enter E Press the Tab key for context sensitive help text where applicable E If an erroneous value was entered the reason of the error or help text will be displayed and the parameter entry text will be displayed again E Many menus include a Select By option enabling to get a sub menu for a selected entity according to the selection criteria E Ifthe Monitor program is not used for 10 minutes the session will be automatically terminated Operation The Monitor Program E Select the Exit option in the Main menu to exit the program and terminate the session BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 87 Chapter 4 Op
265. rs Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated L3 L4 Filtering Rule Name Up to 32 printable characters Yes IP Address IP address or null for Any Yes IP Address Mask IP address Yes IP Address Direction 1 Source Yes 2 Destination Protocol 0 254 or null for Any Yes Port 0 65534 or null for Any Yes Port Direction 1 Source Yes 2 Destination From Wireless Filtering From Network Filtering Parameters L2 Filtering Rules List Add L2 Filtering Rule ID Yes L3 L4 Filtering Rules List Add L3 L4 Filtering Rule ID Yes Active Filtering Rule Type 1 Layer 2 Layer 2 Yes 2 Layer 3 4 Admin Status 1 Disabled Disabled Yes 2 Enabled Default Action 1 Deny Deny Yes 2 Allow MAC Address Deny List Add MAC address of a device behind SU Yes BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 241 Appendix A Software Upgrade In This Appendix E Before you Start on page 244 E File Loading Procedure on page 245 E Completing the Software Upgrade Switching Versions on page 247 Appendix A Software Upgrade A 1 x 244 Before you Start NOTE This section describes software upgrades using the Monitor program The upgrade procedure can also be performed using AlvariSTAR For instructions on using AlvariSTAR for software upgrade refer to The Software Upgrade Manager section in the AlvariSTAR User Manual Loading of
266. rs option enables viewing or resetting both the Data DATA port and Management MGMT port counters BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 129 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 6 4 6 1 130 Radio Cluster Menu Radio Cluster is a logical entity used to describe and support management of the Base Station s elements associated with specific geographical sectors A Radio Cluster represents one or several ODUs that serve through their directional antennas the same geographical sector Up to a maximum of six Radio Clusters can be defined per Base Station representing a cell coverage using 6 x 60 antennas The Radio Cluster s must be defined prior to defining the relevant ODU s AU s and AU Channel s The Radio Cluster menu includes the following options E Show Summary E Select E Add Show Summary Select this option to view the current status of all defined Radio Clusters For each defined Radio Cluster the display includes the following information E ID Radio Cluster ID 1 6 E Name The string that is used as the descriptive name of the Radio Cluster E Location The string that is used as the descriptive location of the Radio Cluster E Sector Heading The direction angle from the north of the geographical sector E Sector Beam Width The beam width of the antenna s used in the geographical sector Operation Radio Cluster Menu 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 6 4 4 6 4 1 4
267. rt TX Power dBm Estimated Distance from BS m The accuracy is from several hundreds of meters for line of sight links to 1500 meters for non line of sight links BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 165 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 166 E Bridging Parameters Enable Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices Maximum Number of Supported Devices Bridge Aging Time minutes Si CPE Parameters Antenna Selection The antenna configured locally in the Si CPE gt Internal 1 6 gt External 7 gt Automatic 8 Interface Type Ethernet or USB Smart Card Status Installed Not Installed Fault Frequency Scanning Parameters Bandwidth MHz Start Downlink Rx Frequency End Downlink Rx Frequency Scanning Main Step Scanning Intermediate Steps Configured and Actual Oo OD 9 9 Ge Q Discrete Frequencies if exist E Best BST AU Parameters Best BST AU Support Preferred BST AU ID Preferred BST AU ID Mask Selected BST AU ID Selected Downlink Rx Frequency gt 999959 BST AU ID Operation SU Menu 4 9 7 2 4 9 7 2 1 4 9 7 2 2 4 9 7 2 3 BST AU ID Mask Best BST AU Table includes details of all applicable BST AUs BST AU ID Downlink Rx Frequency SNR dB Rx Antenna Unit Control The SU Unit Control menu enables defining the SU s status resetting the SU and managing the SW versions of the unit The Unit Control menu incl
268. rt defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters C Any subnet reachable via the default Gateway of the Data port if Data Port Gateway is defined D The remote Static Route subnet defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters reachable via the Gateway of the Management port NOTE To prevent the undesired situation where remote management traffic is unintentionally disabled in both the Management and Data ports the Management Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter will be automatically forced to Enabled upon disabling the Data Port Management Traffic and vice versa The Data Port Management Traffic Enable Disable parameter is available only in the Monitor program It is not available when using SNMP Authorized Managers The Authorized Managers submenu enables defining the properties of management stations that are allowed to manage the Base Station using SNMP including all its components and the SUs associated with it NOTE If no Authorized Manager is defined in the device it can be managed using SNMP by any station with the default Read and Write Communities If at least one Authorized Manager is defined the device can be managed only by a station whose parameters match a defined Authorized Manager The Authorized Manager submenu includes the following options Operation NPU Menu 4 5 3 3 1 4 5 3 3 2 4 5 3 3 3 4 5 3 3 3
269. s 125 Show MAC Addresses Behind SU 183 Show Summary AU 138 Multi Channel 149 ODU 133 Radio Cluster 130 su 158 SUs by AU 161 Show Traps Log 96 Signal Processor SW Version 111 Silver LAN to LAN Pre Configured Profile 220 Silver Teleworking Pre Configured Profile 220 Smart Card Status 166 Software Upgrade 243 Speed Data Port 123 Start Downlink Rx Frequency 180 Statistics Accounting 105 Authentication 103 Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout 110 SU Add New SU 183 Address 171 Bandwidth Phy Standard FDD Parameters 172 Bandwidth Radio Parameters Advanced Si 178 Base Station ID MAC Standard FDD Parameters 171 Base Station ID Mask MAC Standard FDD Parameters 172 Bridge Aging Time 175 Bridging Parameters 175 Clear All Configured SU SW Files 183 Configuration Menu 170 Configured Operation 159 Configured SW File Name 159 Configured SW Version 159 Country 171 Default SW File Adv Si 162 Default SW File Std 162 Delete 183 Delete SW File 163 Duplicate SU Name 160 Ethernet Port 174 Ethernet Port Auto Negotiation 174 Ethernet Port Speed and Duplex 175 IDU Type 159 Installer Password 175 Loop 159 MAC Standard FDD Parameters 171 Menu 158 Multirate and ATPC Parameters 173 Number of Gateways 159 286 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Index Operation Mode 164 Organization Name 171 Performance Monitoring 181 Phy Standard FDD Parameters 172 Registra
270. s PIU PSU includes a single handle at the bottom of the front panel The bottom injector ejector handle of the NPU and AU IDU modules includes a micro switch to support hot swap control Second generation PIU modules also support hot swap as indicated by the HOT SWAP blue LED Inserting Modules To insert a module with hot swap support NPU AU IDU PIU 1 Firmly push in the module into its intended slot slot 5 for the NPU slot 1 4 7 9 for AU IDU 2 Press the handles up the upper handle if available down the lower handle simultaneously until you hear the locking click and the red buttons are released The blue HOT SWAP LED will briefly turn on only in AU and NPU indicating that the module is being powered up CAUTION In a PIU with HOT SWAP LED connect power to the PIU only after it is fully inserted into the chassis 3 Secure the module in place by closing the screws at the top and bottom of the front panel BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Chapter 2 Installation Guidelines 2 2 9 2 gt 52 NOTE If a module is fully inserted without properly locking the handles it will become operational However in this state the hot swap mechanism is not supported A warning message trap will be sent To insert a PSU or a PIU without HOT SWAP support CAUTION In a PIU without HOT SWAP LED disconnect power from the PIU module before inserting it to the chassis 1 Firmly push
271. s file 4 8 5 2 3 2 1 Name The Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the AU after installation as well as after each reset Should be one of the AU SW Files currently stored in the NPU or None null 4 8 5 2 3 2 2 Action The operation to be performed with the SW File when the AU is installed as well as after each reset None do not load Load load to Shadow Run from Shadow or Set as Main BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 145 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E None Select None to cancel a pending request for another operation an operation will be executed only after the next reset E Download Select this option to download the specified SW File to the Shadow memory of the AU If the file already exists in the AU no action will take place E Run from Shadow Select this option to download the specified SW File from the NPU to the Shadow memory of the AU reset the AU and reboot using the Shadow version Note that because the process is controlled by the NPU the AU will continue running from the Shadow version after reset If the specified file already exists as the Shadow version meaning that previously a Download operation was executed for this SW File the only actual operation to take place will be to reset and run from Shadow If the specified file already exists as the Main version no action will take place HM Set as Main Select this option to download the SW File from the NP
272. s from the north This is an optional descriptive parameter The values range is from 0 to 359 degrees from north The default value is 0 degrees from north 4 6 4 5 Sector Beam Width The beam width in degrees of the antenna s used in the geographical sector This is an optional descriptive parameter The values range is from 0 to 359 degrees The default value is 90 degrees 132 Operation ODU Menu 4 7 4 7 1 ODU Menu The ODU s must be defined prior to defining the relevant AU s and AU Channel s The ODU menu includes the following options E Show Summary E Select M Add Show Summary Select this option to view the current status of all defined ODUs For each defined ODU the display includes the following information E ID ODU ID 1 24 E Associated Radio Cluster The ID 1 6 defined for the associated Radio Cluster E Tx Power The defined Tx Power in dBm units E ODU Configured Band The radio band configured for the ODU E Admin Status Enabled or Disabled For details on the parameters refer to Section 4 7 4 Upon first power up of the Base Station 7 ODUs are defined automatically with ODU IDs from 1 to 7 The parameters of these automatically created ODUs are E Associated Radio Cluster NA HM Tx Power 28 dBm E ODU Configured Band Not Defined E Admin Status Enabled BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 133 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration
273. s increased but capacity is granted only according to the real needs of the connection Service parameters include CIR and CT RTP Control Protocol A protocol that monitors the QoS of an RTP connection and conveys information about the on going session Real Time Protocol An Internet protocol for transmitting real time data such as audio and video RTP itself does not guarantee real time delivery of data but it does provide mechanisms for the sending and receiving applications to support streaming data Typically RTP runs on top of the UDP protocol although the specification is general enough to support other transport protocols Receive Session Initiation Protocol An application layer control IETF protocol that can establish modify and terminate multimedia sessions such as Internet telephony calls VoIP SIP can also invite participants to already existing sessions such as multicast conferences Media can be added to and removed from an existing session SIP transparently supports name mapping and redirection services which supports personal mobility users can maintain a single externally visible identifier regardless of their network location Service Level Agreement A contract between a service provider and the end user which stipulates and commits the service provider to a required level of service An SLA relates to issues such as specified level of service support options enforcement or penalty provisions for serv
274. s the BreezeMAX units components and their cables Grounding Base Station chassis Power Feeders and outdoor units are required to be bonded to protective grounding using the bonding stud or screw provided with each unit BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual vii Legal Rights Safety Considerations DC Powered Equipment BST amp Power Feeder A CAUTION ATTENTION Risk of electric shock and energy Risque de d charge lectrique et hazard Disconnecting one Power Interface Unit d electrocution La d connection d un seul PIU disconnects only one PIU module To module d alimentation PIU n isole pas isolate the Base Station completely disconnect compl tement la Station de Base Pour cela il both PIUs faut imp rativement d brancher les deux modules d alimentation PIU Restricted Access Area The DC powered equipment should only be installed ina Restricted Access Area Installation Codes The equipment must be installed according to the latest edition of the country national electrical codes For North America equipment must be installed in accordance with the US National Electrical Code and the Canadian Electrical Code Overcurrent Protection A readily accessible Listed branch circuit overcurrent protective device rated 40A for the modular Base Station or 20A for the Power Feeder must be incorporated in the building wiring CAUTION This equipment is designed to permit connection between the earthed
275. s transmitted to the Wireless link MAC Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Tx The number of bytes in packets discarded due to congestion in the wireless medium ARQ Enabled Bytes Transmitted The number of bytes transmitted over BE and NRT connections Applicable only if the ARQ mechanism is enabled Bytes Retransmitted The number of unacknowledged bytes that were retransmitted Retransmissions are applicable only to BE and NRT connections provided the ARQ mechanism is enabled Retransmission Rate Retransmission Rate in percents is defined as 100 Bytes Retransmitted ARQ Enabled Bytes Transmitted In the current release ARQ should not be enabled Burst Error Rate Counters The Burst Error rate Counters option enables selecting a specific SU by its MAC address for viewing or resetting the Burst Error Rate counters for the applicable downlink The information displayed for each rate in the uplink is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset The downlink counters can be viewed in the applicable SU menu For each rate the displayed information for the uplink includes Operation AU Menu E Total Burst E Error Bursts E Error Rate The counters are reset each time the AU is reset or upon activating the Reset option BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 157 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 4 9
276. send its MAC Address as User Name with User Password quickynikinyoky In this case the SU may receive specific services from the RADIUS Authentication server based on these credentials C Null blank User Password non null User Name RADIUS Authorization and Accounting servers may be implemented in the same server are required for proper service provisioning A Base Station will reject an SU if its name User Name is identical to that of another SU that is already served by the Base Station However several SUs connected to different Base Stations may be authenticated and provisioned with services by a RADIUS server even if they use the same User Name and User Password The maximum number of duplicate SUs using the same User Name and User Password that may be authenticated by the Authentication server Duplicate Sessions is configured in the RADIUS Accounting server The service provisioning information sent by the RADIUS Authentication server to the Base Station includes for each service up to a maximum of 5 services per SU the name of the Service Profile and VLAN parameters In addition the authentication message includes also the Session Timeout and Termination Action If the Termination Action is Default the Session services to the SU will be terminated If the Termination Action is RADIUS request the Base Station will try to re authenticate the user If the service configuration in the Authentication server has been changed
277. ser Name NA Organization Name Read only NA Address Read only NA Country Read only NA BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 233 Chapter 4 Operation and Administ ration Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated SU MAC Standard FDD Param eters Base Station ID X X X X X X X 0 255 No Base Station ID Mask X X X X X X X 0 255 No SU Phy Standard FDD Parameters Bandwidth MHz 1 1 75 2 3 5 3 5 4 7 5 10 Only values supported by the SU will be accepted No Uplink Tx Frequency MHz Depends on the SU s HW and the configured Bandwidth No SU Multirate and ATPC Parameters Uplink Rate Applicable only if Multirate in AU is disabled 1 BPSK 1 2 2 BPSK 3 4 not applicable for TDD 3 QPSK 1 2 4 QPSK 3 4 5 QAM16 1 2 6 QAM16 3 4 7 QAM64 2 3 8 QAM64 3 4 New SU Uplink Basic Rate Connected SU Last used rate Yes 234 Operation NPU Parameters Summary Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Downlink Rate Applicable only if Multirate in AU is New SU Yes disabled Downlink Basic Rate 1 BPSK 1 2 2 BPSK 3 4 not licable for TDD POP St Inohabpliasie 9 Last used rate
278. server from the database The parameters of an existing server cannot be updated to modify the parameters of a server it must first be deleted and then defined again through the Add Server option The Authentication menu includes the following options BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 101 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 4 4 2 1 4 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 2 2 1 4 4 4 2 2 2 4 4 4 2 2 3 102 E Show All HM Add Server HM Select Server Show All Select this option to view the current status and parameters of all defined Authentication servers For each defined Authentication server the following details are displayed E IP Address E UDP Port E Server Status Primary or Secondary E Operation Status Up or Down according to the keep alive mechanism E Activity Status Active or Standby indicates whether this is the server currently in use for authentication purposes Add Server Select this option to define a new Authentication server Up to two Authentication servers can be defined You will be prompted to configure the following parameters IP Address The IP address of the Authentication server The default is null IP address must be defined UDP Port Specifies the UDP port number used by the RADIUS server for authentication transactions Valid values 1 to 65535 The default value is 1812 RFC 2865 requirement Server Status Defines whether this server is Primary or Se
279. service is very similar to the Real Time polling service except that connections may utilize random access transmit opportunities for sending bandwidth requests These Non Real Time Variable Bit Rate services such as file transfer and Internet access with a minimum guaranteed rate are characterized by requirement for a guaranteed rate but can tolerate longer delays and are rather insensitive to jitter QoS Profile parameters include Committed Information Rate CIR Committed Time CT and Maximum Information Rate MIR that limits the rate so that bandwidth intensive services will not expand to occupy the full bandwidth Best Effort BE service is for services where neither throughput nor delay guarantees are provided The Subscriber Unit sends requests for bandwidth in either random access slots or dedicated transmission opportunities The occurrence of dedicated opportunities is subject to network load and the Subscriber Unit cannot rely on their presence Service parameters include Committed Time CT and Maximum Information Rate MIR Continuous Grant CG service is tailored for carrying constant bit rate CBR real time services characterized by fixed size data packets on a periodic basis such as VoIP or E1 T1 The Base Station schedules regularly in a preemptive manner grants of the size defined at connection setup without an explicit request from the Subscriber Unit This eliminates the overhead and latency of bandwidth requests in
280. smission HM VoIP stack is always in synch with the wireless transport as the DRAP is integrated into the VoIP stack all calls are terminated according to the VoIP standard Even if no resources are available the voice gateway receives an appropriate message from the BreezeMAX system and sends the required signaling message according to the VoIP standard used Supporting Generic 3rd Party VoIP Services When using VoIP devices that do not support the DRAP protocol the required service can be provided through a Data L2 service with a CG QoS see Section 4 10 4 7 that is defined in accordance with the estimated bandwidth required for the service The required bandwidth depends on several parameters such as codec type sample rate and T 38 Fax Relay support The service parameters depend also on the marking features of the VoIP equipment the ability to use either DSCP or 802 1p to distinguish between RTP RTCP and VoIP Signaling and Data traffic The system includes several pre configured Service Profiles for commonly used VoIP applications For details on the pre configured profiles refer to Section 4 10 8 For details on defining Service Profiles for generic VoIP devices refer to Appendix B Authentication and Service Provisioning The Authentication and Service Provisioning process is affected by the Base Station s Service Mode Advanced or Quick and by specific SU Status Permanent or Temporary A Permanent SU an SU t
281. sswords to their factory default values The parameters will revert to their default values after the next reset CAUTION Setting the parameters of the NPU to their default values will disable remote management of the Base Station since this affects the IP and Ethernet parameters and will delete all Authorized Managers Refer to Section 4 11 for information on the factory default values of these parameters SW Version Control The NPU can contain two SW versions E Main Each time the NPU resets it will reboot using the version defined as Main E Shadow Normally the Shadow version is the backup version Each time a new SW File is downloaded to the NPU it will be stored as a Shadow version replacing the previous Shadow Version BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 115 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 2 4 1 116 The typical process of upgrading to a new SW version includes the following steps 1 Download the new SW File to the NPU It will be stored as the Shadow version 2 Reset and run the module from its Shadow version Note that at this stage after reset the unit will reboot from its previous Main version 3 If you want to continue using the new version swap the Shadow and Main versions The new version is now defined as Main and will be used each time the module reboots The previous version is defined now as Shadow Each SW version includes two identifiers E SW File which is
282. stem Architecture 4 System Description Base Station Equipment Lid Base Station Equipment The Multi Carrier High Power Full Duplex Base Station provides all the functionality necessary to communicate with SUs and to connect to the backbone of the Service Provider The Base Station comprises the following elements Lal Base Station Chassis The Base Station equipment is based on an 8U high cPCI compact Peripheral Component Interconnect shelf designed for installation in a 19 or 21 ETSI rack This chassis has a total of nine double Euro 6U high slots and six single Euro 3U high slots All the modules are sm mARAAEA NE hot swappable and high availability can G 1 fas ss ose iix j e be provided through multiple redundancy g aaao H Grle Mara Fererere schemes The six single Euro slots are intended for one or two redundant Power Interface Units PIU and up to four redundant Power Supply Units PSUs One of the double Euro slots is dedicated _ to the Network Processing Unit NPU module supporting a central networking and management architecture Another double Euro slot is reserved for an optional redundant NPU NPU redundancy support is planned for a future release The remaining seven double Euro slots are dedicated mainly for Access Unit AU indoor modules thus enabling various future redundancy configurations Addit
283. tation System Manual Index F File Loading Procedure 245 Filtering Rules Menu 212 First Name 195 Forwarding Rule Broadcast Relaying 207 Definition 184 Menu 206 Multicast QoS Profile 208 Multicast VLAN ID 207 Name 206 Service Type 206 Unicast Relaying 207 Unknown Forwarding Policy 207 Forwarding Rule Class 208 Forwarding Rule Name 206 Frequency Bands File 136 Frequency Bands Groups 136 Frequency Scanning Parameters 178 From Network Filtering 215 From Wireless Filtering 215 G Gateway Data Port 123 Management Port 120 General Service Parameters Default L2 Voice Service Profile 195 Default PPPoE Service Profile 195 Menu 194 Service Mode 194 Show 194 Update 194 Gold LAN to LAN Pre Configured Profile 220 Gold Teleworking Pre Configured Profile 220 GPS Adapter Connectors 62 Installation 61 LEDs 63 GPS Info 110 GPS Protocol 109 GPS Supported 109 Grace Licenses 108 H Hold Over Passed Timeout 110 HOT SWAP 42 Hybrid VLAN Mode 197 I IDU Type 159 IF Cables 32 Insert AU IDU 51 PIU with HOT SWAP 51 PIU without HOT SWAP 52 PSU 52 Inserting NPU 51 Installation 29 AU ODU 30 Base Station 39 GPS Adapter 61 ODU Power Feeder 57 Installer Password NPU 114 SU 175 Interface Filtering Active Rule Type 215 Admin Status 215 Default Action 216 From Network Filtering 215 From Wireless Filtering 215 L2 Filtering Rules List 215 L3 L4 Filte
284. tecture and peripheral integration defined and developed by the peripheral component interconnect PCI industrial computers manufacturers group PICMG Designed to provide rugged high density systems Customer Premise Equipment Communications equipment that resides on the customer s premises Complex Programmable Logic Device Cyclical Redundancy Check A common technique for detecting data transmission errors in which the frame recipient calculates a remainder by dividing frame contents by a prime binary divisor and compares the calculated remainder to a value stored in the frame by the sending equipment BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Glossary CSMA CD CT DHCP DIP Switch DL DOS DRAP DSCP DiffServ DLI EIR EIRP Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection Media access mechanisms wherein devices ready to transmit data first check the channel for a carrier If no carrier is sensed for a specific period of time a device can transmit If two devices transmit at once a collision occurs and is detected by all colliding devices This collision subsequently delays retransmissions from those devices for some random length of time Ethernet and IEEE 802 3 use CSMA CD access Committed Time The time interval used for measuring average information transfer rates Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A protocol for dynamically assigning IP addresses from a pre defined list to nodes o
285. tem A system responsible for managing at least part of a network An NMS is generally a reasonably powerful and well equipped computer such as an engineering workstation NMSs communicate with agents to help keep track of network statistics and resources BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Glossary NOC NPU NRT OA amp M ODU OFDM OFDMA OOB PAP PER Network Operations Center The physical space from which a typically large telecommunications network is managed monitored and supervised Network Processing Unit Non Real Time is very similar to the Real Time polling service except that connections may utilize random access transmit opportunities for sending bandwidth requests These Non Real Time Variable Bit Rate NRT VBR services such as file transfer and Internet access with a minimum guaranteed rate are characterized by requirement for a guaranteed rate but can tolerate longer delays and are rather insensitive to jitter Service parameters include CIR Committed Time CT and MIR that limit the rate as otherwise bandwidth intensive services may expand to occupy full bandwidth Operation Administration amp Maintenance Provides the facilities and the personnel required to manage a network Outdoor Unit Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing A method for multiplexing signals which divides the available bandwidth into a series of frequencies known as tones Orthogonal tones do not in
286. terfere with each other when the peak of one tone corresponds with the null The rapid switching frequency hopping technique is intended to allow more robust data service Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access It s a logical extension of OFDM and a modulation multiple access technique OFDMA divides a signal into sub channels i e groups of carriers with each sub channel or several sub channels being allocated toa different subscriber Out Of Band Password Authentication Protocol A means of authenticating passwords which is defined in RFC 1334 PAP uses a two way handshaking procedure The validity of the password is checked at login Packet Error Rate In a digital transmission PER is the percentage of packets with errors divided by the total number of packets that have been transmitted received or processed over a given time period BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 269 Glossary PHY PIU POTS PSU PPPoE QAM Qos QPSK RADIUS RF 270 PHYsical Layer The physical or lowest layer of the OSI Network Model In a wireless network the PHY defines parameters such as data rates modulation method signaling parameters transmitter receiver synchronization etc Within an actual radio implementation the PHY corresponds to the radio front end and baseband signal processing sections Power Interface Unit Plain Old Telephone System A basic analog telephone equipment Power Supply
287. ters case null must be Yes sensitive Available only via Monitor defined Retry Interval sec 1 5 seconds 5 seconds Yes Maximum Number of Retries 0 5 5 Yes Keep Alive Timeout sec 60 180 seconds 60 seconds Yes RADIUS Authentication up to two servers IP Address IP address null Yes UDP Port 1 65535 1812 Yes Server Status 1 Primary Yes 2 Secondary Only one server can be Primary RADIUS Accounting up to two servers IP Address IP address null Yes UDP Port 1 65535 1813 Yes BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 227 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Server Status 1 Primary Yes 2 Secondary Only one server can be Primary Chain Chain Number 1 1500 0 not defined No yet must be defined GPS Protocol 0 None Timble No 1 Trimble 2 Symmetricom Time Zone Offset From UTC 12 00 to 13 00 02 00 Yes Stop Tx After Hold Over 1 Disable Disable Yes Timeout lt Enable Hold Over Passed Timeout 0 2880 minutes 30 minutes Yes NPU Parameters Administrator Password Up to 16 printable characters case admin Yes sensitive Installer Password Up to 16 printable characters case installer Yes sensitive Monitor Password Up to 16 printable characters case monitor Yes sensitive Monitor Inactivity Timeout 0 60 minutes 10 minutes Yes 0 means no timeout
288. ters define the IP parameters for the Management MGMT port connecting the base station to the backbone NOTE It is highly recommended to use the Management port for local management only Typically the port should be down disconnected The Ethernet interface of the Management port in the NPU operates using Auto Negotiation enabling communication at either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps Full Duplex Management Port IP Address The IP address of the Management port The default is 10 0 0 1 CAUTION Do not configure the IP Address of the Management port to 0 0 0 0 as this will cause loss of management connectivity via the DATA port Management Port Subnet Mask The Subnet mask of the Management port The default is 255 255 255 0 In a binary representation 32 bits the string must comprise a series of contiguous binary 1 s starting from the MSB followed by a series of contiguous binary O s 0 0 0 0 all zeros meaning nothing and 255 255 255 255 all ones meaning this address only are illegal and will be rejected NOTE The local subnet of the Management port defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters must differ from the local subnet of the Data port defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters and from the subnet that is used as the Static Route for remote management via the Management port defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Manageme
289. that controls what resources users have access to and keeps track of the activity of users over the network American National Standards Institute A voluntary organization composed of corporate government and other members that coordinates standards related activities approves U S national standards and develops positions for the United States in international standards organizations Address Resolution Protocol Internet protocol used to map an IP address to a MAC address Defined in RFC 826 Automatic Repeat reQuest A communication technique in which the receiving device detects errors and requests retransmissions American Standard Code for Information Interchange A code for representing English characters as numbers with each letter assigned a number from 0 to 127 Asynchronous Transfer Mode A network technology that dynamically allocates bandwidth ATM uses fixed size data packets and a fixed channel between two points for data transfer ATM was designed to support multiple services such as voice graphics data and full motion video It allows service providers to dynamically assign bandwidth to individual customers Automatic Transmit Power Control Access Unit Air Ventilation Unit Best effort A service where neither throughput nor delay guarantees are provided The subscriber unit sends requests for bandwidth in either random access slots or dedicated transmission opportunities The occurrence of dedicated oppor
290. the chassis should be installed on the top of the chassis front to enable convenient routing of cables connecting to power source s outdoor unit s and other equipment To enable power source and or Power Interface Unit 1 1 redundancy two PIU modules can be installed in the designated slots If a single PIU module is used it can be inserted into either one of the two available slots The number of installed PSU modules depends on the specific configuration number of AUs and NPU redundancy scheme refer to Table 2 8 If less than 4 PSU modules are used they can be installed in any of the designated slots The NPU should be installed in slot number 5 slot numbers are marked on the Cable Guide Slot 6 is reserved for a future redundant NPU Slots 1 4 and 7 9 can hold up to six AU IDU modules Unused slots should remain covered until required Installation Installing the Base Station Equipment 2 2 3 Power Requirements Use the following table to calculate worst case power source requirements for the Base Station equipment Table 2 6 Power Requirements Base Station Equipment Unit Details Power Source 40 5 to 60 VDC PIU 16W maximum active PIU PSU 200W max output power Efficiency 80 minimum NPU 65W maximum excluding power required for GPS Adapter 1 2W maximum and Outdoor GPS Receiver 6W maximum AU IDU 4CH 46W maximum AU ODU HP 2 x GHz from PIU or Power Feeder Tx
291. the services provisioned to the SU if re authenticated will be updated accordingly 188 Operation Services Menu 4 10 1 5 Using VLANs and VPLs VLANs can be used for creating within the BreezeMAX network virtual groups of multiple end users stations belonging to the same organization Subscriber They may also be used to differentiate between different end users stations connected to the same SU In the backbone VPL ID Virtual Private Link ID is used VPL is a virtual connection between two points on the network such as a base station and a service provider or corporate network identified by the VPL ID with functionality that is similar to VLAN ID VLAN on the backbone network Typically it is used to separate between different traffic types e g Data and Voice or traffic to from different ISPs or different corporate networks If the VPL ID is None No VPL ID and VLAN Transparency Mode is Off frames arriving from the infrastructure side with a VLAN ID tag will be discarded Tagged frames arriving from the wireless domain will be forwarded without a VLAN tag unless 802 1p Priority Marking is used If 802 1p Priority Marking is used tagged frames will be forwarded with VPL ID 0 and the defined Priority Marking Value If the VPL ID is other than None applicable only if VLAN Transparency Mode is Off all untagged frames forwarded to the network will be tagged with the VPL ID The VLAN ID in tagged frames arriv
292. ting the AU or after resetting the NPU which causes reset of all AUs The range is 90 to 60 dBm The default is 73 dBm Cell Parameters The Cell parameters provide a unique identifier for the Base Station and they are common to all AUs in the Base Station Updated Cell parameters are applied for each AU after resetting the AU or after resetting the NPU which causes reset of all AUs The Cell menu enables viewing updating the following parameters Operator ID A unique identifier of the network The same Operator ID must be defined for all Base Stations in the network and it should not be used by any Base Station belonging to another network in the same area The Operator ID consists of 3 groups of up to three digits each where the range for each group is 0 to 255 The default Operator ID is 186 190 0 Changes in the value configured for the Operator ID are applied only after reset Cell ID A unique identifier of Base Station The same Cell ID should not be used by any other Base Station belonging to the network The Cell ID consists of 2 groups of up to three digits each where the range for each group is 0 to 255 The default Cell ID is 0 250 Changes in the value configured for the Cell ID are applied only after reset Duplex The Duplex parameters define the operation mode of the system These parameters are applied after reset The Duplex menu enables viewing updating the following parameters Dup
293. tion maximum current and the average power consumption taking into account Tx Rx ratio that affect the requirements from a backup power source For a 2 x GHz system the peak power consumption of the 24 ODUs including the power required for Power Feeders 20 channels is 24 89 20 2 2176W Thus the total peak power of the system under worst conditions is 481 2176 2657W The average power consumption of the 24 ODUs assuming DL UL Tx Rx ratio of 60 40 is 24 89 0 60 15 0 40 20 2 1467W Thus the average power consumption of the system under worst case conditions is 481 1465 1947W HOT SWAP Support The NPU AU IDU and new PIU modules includes a blue HOT SWAP LED anda micro switch in the injector ejector handle to support hot swap control After releasing the ejector s button the HOT SWAP LED should turn on indicating that power to from the back panel is disconnected and the module can be removed safely For more details refer to Section 2 2 9 Power Interface Unit PIU The single Euro PIU module is the interface between the Base Station site s DC power source and the Base Station Chassis Power Supply Units and external ODUs which receive power via the IDUs The PIU filters and stabilizes the Base Station input power and protects the system from power problems such as over voltage surge pulses reverse polarity connection and short circuits It also filters high frequency interference radiated emissions and l
294. tion Functionality PWR Power indication E Off NPU is not powered E Red NPU power failure E Green NPU power is OK ALRM NPU Alarm indication E Off NPU is OK E Red NPU failure BST ALRM Base Station chassis alarm E Off All Base Station modules are OK indication E Red Failure in one or more Base Station modules EXT ALRM External alarm indication E Off No alarms E Red Alarm received via the ALRM IN connector not applicable in current release MASTER Master Slave operation indication I Off Secondary NPU backup Not supported in current release E Green Primary NPU 50 Installation Installing the Base Station Equipment Table 2 12 NPU LEDs Name Description Functionality GPS SYNC GPS IF clock synchronization E Off GPS IF clock synchronization is disabled functionality indication E Green GPS IF clock is synchronization enabled HOT SWAP NPU readiness for hot swap E Off Power to the module is not disconnected the NPU removal is not ready for removal E Blue Power to the module can be disconnected and the NPU can be safely removed For instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2 2 9 2 29 2 2 9 1 Using the Hot Swap Injector Ejector Handles The Base Station modules include special handles for high force insertion extraction of modules Each of the 6U high modules NPU AU IDU includes two such handles whereas each of the 3U high module
295. tion Parameters 170 Reset Unit 167 Select by MAC Address 163 Select by Name 163 Service Fault Status 159 Set Factory Defaults 167 Set Rates 173 Show Summary 158 Status 167 SU Name 170 SW Download Status 159 SW Files in NPU 161 SW Versions Control 168 Unit Control 167 Uplink Tx Frequency Phy Standard FDD Parameters 172 Voice Networking Gateways 173 SU Menu 163 Show 163 SU Ethernet Port Counters 181 SU MAC Address Service 197 SU Name 170 SU Ports Counters 181 SU Status 167 SU SW File AU 146 SU Wireless Port Counters 181 Subnet Mask Data Port 122 Management Port 120 Subscriber Admin Status 195 Definition 184 Description 195 First Name 195 Last Name 195 Menu 195 Name 195 Subscriber Name 195 SUID 159 Suppression Interval 98 SW Download Status AU 138 SU 159 SW File AU 145 SU 169 SW Files in NPU AU 140 SU 161 SW Versions Control AU 144 NPU 115 SU 168 yr Temporary 187 Temporary Grace Licenses 108 Temporary SU Definition 187 Termination Action 188 Time Zone Offset From UTC 109 Transparent Marking Mode 203 Trap Configuration 97 Admin Status 97 Severity 98 Suppression Interval 98 Traps Display Filter 96 Log 96 Traps Display Filter Days 96 Minimum Severity 96 Tx Power ODU 135 U UDP Port Accounting Server 105 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 287 Index Authentication 102 Unicast Relayin
296. tion System Manual 223 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 16 Pre Configured Forwarding Rule for Voice Services Name Service Unicast Broadcast Unknown Multicast Multicast Type Relaying Relaying forwarding QoS VLAN Policy VolP Voice Enable hard Enable hard Forward hard BE 128 Null coded coded coded Multicast VLANs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation taking into account the considerations described in Section 4 10 1 5 All pre configured Service profiles for VoIP DRAP based Voice Services and Generic 3rd party VoIP Services share the same pre configured Forwarding Rule to enable direct communication between all users of VoIP Services regardless of the gateway type and other possible differences in the Service Profiles Table 4 17 Pre Configured Priority Classifiers for Generic non DRAP VoIP Service Name Type Uplink Uplink Downlink Downlink Priority QoS Priority QoS Profiles Ranges Profiles Ranges 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 DSCP 63 CG 47 63 CG 47 1 POTS Advanced VoIP DSCP 0 BE 64 0 BE 64 Gif 26 RT 6 26 RT 6 63 CG 38 63 CG 38 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 DSCP 63 CG 108 63 CG 108 1 POTS Advanced VoIP DSCP 0 BE 64 0 BE 64 on 26 RT 11 26 RT 11 63 CG 88 63 CG 88 Table 4 18 Pre Configured BE and RT QoS Profile for Voice S
297. tion System Manual Contents 2 2 11 Air Ventilation Unit AVU rnnrennnnnnnnnnnnnnvonvnnennrnnrnnnnnrnnnnenennnnnnnnenenerenennnnnennenenn 55 2 3 Installing the ODU Power Feeder rrrnnnsvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 57 2 3 1 Installation Requirements serrrnnnnnnnnnnvvvvnnnrenrrnnnnnnnenvnnennnnrnnnnnenenenanenennsenennnnn 57 2 3 2 The ODU Power FEET usassmrneeetons nesen 58 2 3 3 Installing the ODU Power Feeder rrrnrrnnnonrnrrvnnnnnnnrvnnrnnnrnnnnvrnrrnnnanannrnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 59 2 4 Installing the GPS Adapter ernnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 61 2 4 1 Installation R equrremenis msiuummnsmnanesnnmidsivndn vea 61 2 AL The GPS FP uredd REl 62 2 4 3 Installing the GPS Adapter mrrnnnvnnnnrnrvnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnennrnnnnnnnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnre 63 2 4 4 NPU to GPS Adapter Cable Lsueavsaogmeieminninmdveisamnasunine 65 2 4 5 GPS Adapter to Outdoor GPS Receiver Cable rnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnr 66 Chapter 3 Commissioning 3 1 Configuring Basic Parameters of Base Station wrrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvennnnennnnnnnn 68 3 1 1 NPU Parameters Required for Management rrrnrnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnrnnnrvnnnnn 68 3 1 2 Base Station Configuration Parameters asnnnnrrnnvnnnnnvnrrnnnnnnnrrennnnnnnennnrnnrnnnnnrr 70 3 1 3 RADIUS Parameters oi csacectesecstsncctdecuncciienisaxceeet
298. tion and the SIP RFC 3261 SIP Session Initiation Protocol making it a certified means to provide telephony and advanced services over an IP network It supports voice band data transmission of FAX G 3 over G 711 or T 38 pay phone signaling Tax and reveres polarity CLI as well as other services that are hook flash based call waiting hold call forward etc 1 4 Management Systems The end to end IP based architecture of the system enables full management of all components using standard management tools An SNMP agent in the NPU implements standard and proprietary MIBs for remote setting of operational modes and parameters of the Base Station equipment as well as the Subscriber Units served by it Security features incorporated in BreezeMAX units restrict the access for management purposes In addition the Ethernet WAN can be used to connect to other Operation Support Systems including servers Customer Care systems and AAA Authentication Authorization and Admission tools BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 13 Chapter 1 System Description 1 4 1 AlvariSTAR AlvariSTAR is a comprehensive Carrier Class network management system for Alvarion s Broadband Wireless Access products based Networks AlvariSTAR is designed for today s most advanced Service Providers Network Operation Centers NOCs providing the network Operation Administration and Maintenance OA amp M staff and managers with all the n
299. tiple media streams to support Call Waiting If the traffic exceeds the BW allocated to the CG connection the SU may request to double the allocated BW RTP BW Calculation The required bandwidth for a G 711 call 64 Kbps codec bit rate with RTP and 160 bytes of voice payload is Total packet size bytes Ethernet of 18 bytes IP UDP RTP header of 40 bytes voice payload of 160 bytes 218 bytes Total packet size bits 218 bytes 8 bits per byte 1744 bits PPS 64 Kbps codec bit rate 1280 bits 50 pps Note 1280 bits 160 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call total packet size 1744 bits 50 pps 87 2Kbps RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 87 2 Kbps is 8 72 Kbps QoS Profile The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is approximately 88 Kbps To accommodate for other traffic types such as RTCP up to 8 7 Kbps Voice Signaling up to 2 Kbps and Data Device Management we allocate to it a total bandwidth of 108 Kbps equivalent to a Packet Size of 2160 bits or 270 bytes The SU may request twice this BW so it will be allocated with up to approximately BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1 POTS Basic VolP G 711 Service Profile 216 Kbps This is assumed to be sufficient for all traffic scenarios including Call Waiting Thus the CG 108 QoS Profile parameters are E Packet Size 270 bytes E Sample Interval 20 msec BreezeMAX
300. tivity Timeout Change Password For security and control reasons the Change Password option is available only for users with Administration access rights using the Administrator Password to access the program The Change Password option enables defining the passwords for each of the three different access levels Administrator Installer and Monitor After changing the password for a selected access level you will be prompted to re enter the new password for confirmation NOTE For security reasons the passwords do not change after performing the Set Factory Defaults operation For the same reason the passwords cannot be managed using SNMP and are are not included in backup configuration files Operation NPU Menu Valid passwords Up to 16 printable characters case sensitive The default passwords are Table 4 2 Default Passwords Access Level Default Password Administrator admin Installer installer Monitor monitor 4 5 2 2 Reset Unit Select this option to reset the NPU To avoid unintentional reset you will be prompted to confirm the reset request Changes to some of the configurable parameters are applied only after reset Refer to Section 4 11 for information on which parameters are changeable in run time and which changes are applied only after reset 4 5 2 3 Set Factory Defaults A 4 5 2 4 Select this option to set the Base Station and NPU parameters excluding the access Pa
301. to Slot 1 The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 1 Packets Forwarded to Slot 2 The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 2 Packets Forwarded to Slot 3 The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 3 Packets Forwarded to Slot 4 The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 4 Packets Forwarded to Slot 7 The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 7 Packets Forwarded to Slot 8 The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 8 Packets Forwarded to Slot 9 The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 9 Packets Discarded on Rx Packets received from the Data port that were discarded due to switching and classification failures E Data Port Tx Counters BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 127 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 4 2 128 Total Packet Transmitted The total number of packets transmitted to the interface Packets with errors are not counted Management Packets Submitted The total number of management packets submitted by the NPU Packets Submitted from Slot 1 The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 1 an
302. to the Base Station equipment The distance from the Base Station equipment should allow connection of the 2 meters NPU to GPS Adapter cable For installation in a 21 cabinet attach suitable ETSI rack adapters to the panel Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding screw located on the rear panel of the GPS Adapter and firmly tighten the grounding screw Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground earth connection or to the cabinet if applicable Connect the NPU to GPS Adapter cable to the BASE STATION INTERFACE connector on the front panel of the GPS Adapter Connect the other end of the cable to the GPS SYNC IN connector of the NPU Select the GPS Receiver to be used using the GPS SELECT miniature DIP switches To use Outdoor GPS Receiver move the ODU left most switch to the ON up position Make sure that the two other switches are in the OFF down position To use Indoor GPS Receiver move the IDU middle switch to the ON up position Make sure that the two other switches are in the OFF down position The INT Internal GPS Receiver option is not available in current release Connect the applicable cable s to the selected GPS Receiver NOTE Refer to the documentation supplied with the GPS Receiver for instructions on how to install and connect it Installation Installing the GPS Adapter 2 4 4 NPU to GPS Adapter Cable Table 2 18 NPU to GPS Adapter Cable Pin Out
303. tocol L3 L4 Filtering Rule 214 PSU 45 Ejecting 52 Inserting 52 LEDs 46 Q QoS Profile Best Effort BE Service Type 210 CIR 212 Continuous Grant CG Service Type 210 CT 211 Menu 210 MIR 212 Name 211 Non Real Time NRT Service Type 210 Packet Size 212 QoS Type 211 Real Time RT Service Type 210 Sample Interval 212 QoS Profile Class 212 QoS Profile Name 211 QoS Type 211 Quick Service Mode 187 quickynikinyoky 188 R Radio Cluster Add 131 ID 131 Location 131 Menu 130 Name 131 Parameters 131 Sector Beam Width 132 Sector Heading 132 Select 131 Show Summary 130 Radio Parameters Advanced Si 178 RADIUS General Parameters 100 RADIUS Parameters 99 Read Community Authorized Manager 125 Real Time RT Qos Profile 210 284 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Index Registration Parameters su 170 Replace AVU 55 NPU 56 Reset Unit AU 144 NPU 115 SU 167 Retry Interval 101 RT 210 Run from Shadow AU 146 NPU 117 SU 169 S Sample Interval 212 Scanning Main Step 180 Sector Heading 132 Sector ID 147 Select AU 142 Authorized Managers 125 Channel 151 ODU 134 Radio Cluster 131 Select by MAC Address SU 163 Select by Name SU 163 Select Server Accounting 105 Authentication 103 Send Traps Authorized Manager 125 Server Status Accounting 105 Authentication 102 Service Access VLAN 198 Admin Status 199
304. tunities is subject to network load and the subscriber unit cannot rely on their presence Service parameters include Committed Time CT and Maximum Information Rate MIR Glossary BER BPSK BST BW BWA CBR CG CIR cPCI CPE CPLD CRC 262 Bit Error Rate In a digital transmission BER is the percentage of bits with errors divided by the total number of bits that have been transmitted received or processed over a given time period Binary Phase Shift Keying A data transfer technique BPSK transmits data using two phase modulation signals one phase representing a binary one and the other representing a binary zero The signal is divided into bits their status is determined by the preceding wave If the wave changes for example the signal is reversed Base Station Bandwidth Broadband Wireless Access Constant Bit Rate Continuous Grant Also known as Unsolicited Grant Services UGS is tailored for carrying constant bit rate CBR real time services characterized by fixed size data packets on a periodic basis such as VoIP or E1 T1 Service parameters include unsolicited grant size packet size and normal grant interval sample interval Committed Information Rate The rate in bits per second at whicha network guarantees to transfer information under normal conditions averaged over a minimum increment of time Compact Peripheral Component Interface a new standard for computer backplane archi
305. type Yes 1 Disabled 2 Enabled 238 Operation NPU Parameters Summary Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Broadcast Relaying Applicable only for L2 Service type Yes 1 Disabled 2 Enabled Unknown Forwarding Policy Applicable only for L2 Service type Yes 1 Reject 2 Forward Multicast VLAN ID 0 4094 or null for No Multicast VLAN Yes Applicable only for Services assigned to SUs with SW version below 2 0 Multicast QoS Profile A QoS Profile Name up to 32 printable Yes characters that exists in the database Services Priority Classifiers Parameters Priority Classifier Name Up to 32 printable characters Yes Priority Type 1 DSCP Yes 2 802 1p Uplink Priority Ranges Up to 4 numbers separated by commas Yes where each number must be higher than its predecessor and the last number must be the highest available for the applicable priority type 7 for 802 1p 63 for DSCP Uplink QoS Profiles Up to four QoS Profile Names separated Yes by commas where each name up to 32 printable characters is a name of a QoS Profile that exists in the database The number of entries in the list must be identical to number of entries in Uplink Priority Ranges list Downlink Priority Ranges Up to 4 numbers separated by commas Yes where each number must be higher than its predecessor and the last number must be the hig
306. u The available options are 1 No Diversity 2 Second Order Diversity 3 Fourth Order Diversity The default is No Diversity NOTE x A change in the Diversity Mode parameter takes effect immediately and automatically resets the AU It also disables the Admin Status of all its channels when changing from No Diversity to Second Order Fourthe Order Diversity and vice versa When changing from Fourth Order Diversity to Second Order Diversity it disables the Admin Status of Channels 3 and 4 4 8 5 3 3 3 Select Use this option to select a Channel ID 1 4 to open the Channel menu for viewing or updating the Channel s parameters The configurable Channel parameters are E Associated ODU An ODU ID 1 24 of an already defined ODU E Downlink Tx Frequency MHz The Tx frequency in MHz which must be in accordance with the selected Bandwidth see Section 4 8 5 3 2 1 and the rules defined in the Frequency Bands File for the frequency band selected as the Configured ODU Frequency Band of the associated ODU see Section 4 7 4 3 The help text displayed upon clicking the Tab key reflects the limitations imposed by these rules In addition the following rules must be followed in No Diversity mode if more than one channel is used 1 After configuring the Downlink Frequency f1 for one of the AU s Channels the Downlink Frequencies for other Channels of the same AU should be configured using increments of 0 875 MHz from the de
307. udes the following options E Status E Reset E Set Factory Defaults HM SW Version Control SU Status The SU Status parameter enables defining the status of the SU which determines the services it can receive The available options are 1 Permanent 2 Temporary NOTE An SU that is defined as Temporary will be deleted from the database when it is disconnected Reset Unit Select this option to reset the unit To avoid unintentional reset you will be prompted to confirm the reset request Changes to some of the configurable parameters are applied only after reset Refer to Section 4 11 for information on which parameters are changeable in run time and which changes are applied only after reset Set Factory Defaults Select this option to set the SU parameters to their factory default values Refer to Section 4 11 for information on the factory default values of these parameters The parameters will revert to their default values after the next reset BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 167 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 7 2 4 SW Versions Control only for Permanent SUs The SU can contain two SW versions E Main Each time the SU resets it will reboot using the version defined as Main E Shadow Normally the Shadow version is the backup version Each time a new SW File is downloaded to the SU it will be stored as a Shadow version replacing the previous Shadow Version The process of up
308. uency Bands Group No MHz available for the AU and the Bandwidth Scanning Main Step KHz Bandwidth 3 5 MHz 125 to 1750 in steps No of 125 Bandwidth 5 MHz 125 to 5000 in steps of 125 Scanning Intermediate Steps Up to 8 numbers 1 8 separated by No commas or 0 none Services General Parameters Service Mode 1 Advanced Quick Yes 2 Quick Default L2 Voice Service Profile Name of an existing L2 or Voice Service Internet Access Yes Profile or None L2 Default PPPoE Service Profile Name of an existing PPPoE Service None Yes Profile or None 236 Operation NPU Parameters Summary Table 4 22 NPU Monitor Parameters Summary Parameter Range Default Run Time Updated Services Subscribers Parameters Subscriber Name Up to 32 printable characters Must be Yes unique in the network First Name Up to 50 printable characters Yes Last Name Up to 50 printable characters Yes Description Up to 50 printable characters Yes Admin Status 1 Disabled Yes 2 Enabled Services Services Parameters Service Name Up to 32 printable characters Yes Subscriber Name A Subscriber Name up to 32 printable Yes characters that exists in the database SU MAC Address MAC Address of an SU that exists in the Yes database Service Profile Name A Service Profile Name up to 32 printable Yes characters that exists in the database VLAN List A list of different numbers s
309. updating parameters that define the functionality of the MGMT and DATA ports the properties of authorized management stations and bridging functionality It also enables configuring per Telnet session the types of messages that will be displayed upon occurrence of various events The following are the guidelines for configuring these parameters E AIlIP parameters of both ports should be configured Otherwise default values shall be used E The Destination Subnet parameters of the MGMT port enable defining an additional subnet of stations that can manage the device when connected via a router to the MGMT port If OOB management via a router connected to the MGMT port is used the parameters should be configured to ensure different subnets for the Data port the Management port and the Management Port Destination Subnet NOTE It is highly recommended to use the Management port for local management only Typically the port should be down disconnected E Authorized Manager s must be configured properly to enable remote management using AlvariSTAR or another SNMP based application The Configuration menu includes the following options E Management Port E Data Port E Authorized Managers E Bridge HM Voice E Debug Stream BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 119 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 3 1 2 4 5 3 1 1 4 5 3 1 2 4 5 3 1 3 120 Management Port Parameters These parame
310. uration of AUs that are not yet installed It also enables managing AUs SW versions and viewing current status configurations and performance information For details refer to Section 4 8 SU Menu The SU menu enables viewing summary information of all relevant SUs configuring the parameters of a selected SU and defining new SUs It also enables managing a selected SU s SW versions and viewing its current status configuration and performance information For details refer to Section 4 9 Services Menu The Service menu enables viewing updating and adding service profiles and subscribers and allocating services to subscribers It also enables viewing and updating filtering rules and the MAC Address Deny List For details refer to Section 4 10 Exit Select the Exit option X to exit the Monitor program and terminate the Telnet session BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 89 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 4 Base Station Menu The Base Station menu includes the following options E Show E Configuration E Alarms and Traps E RADIUS E Licenses E Chain HM GPS Info 4 4 1 Show Select this option to view the current value selected option of configurable parameters Refer to Section 4 4 2 for more details on these parameters In addition some general status information is displayed as follows E Configurable Parameters Device Name Device Location ATPC Status Optimal Uplink RS
311. ured ODU Frequency Band 135 Delete 135 ID 135 Menu 133 Parameters 135 Select 134 Show 134 Show Summary 133 Tx Power 135 Update 134 ODU Power Feeder Connectors 58 Installation 57 LEDs 59 Operation Mode 139 su 164 Operation Status Accounting 105 Authentication Server 102 Service 199 Operator ID 93 Optimal Uplink RSSI 92 Organization Name 171 P Packet Size 212 Password Defaults NPU 115 NPU 114 Performance Service 199 Performance Monitoring AU 155 NPU 126 SU 181 Permanent 187 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 283 Index Permanent SU Definition 187 Phy Standard FDD Parameters SU 172 Phy Parameters AU 149 PIU 42 LEDs 44 PIU with HOT SWAP Ejecting 52 Inserting 51 PIU without HOT SWAP Ejecting 52 Inserting 52 Port L3 L4 Filtering Rule 214 Port Direction L3 L4 Filtering Rule 214 Ports Counters AU 155 Power Cable 44 Power Interface Unit 42 Power Requirements 41 Power Supply Unit 45 PPPoE Service 185 Pre configured Profiles 220 Preferred BST AU ID 177 Preferred BST AU ID Mask 177 Priority Classifier Definition 184 Downlink QoS Profiles 209 Downlink Upper Priority Limits 209 Menu 208 Name 208 Priority Type 208 Uplink QoS Profiles 209 Uplink Upper Priority Limits 209 Priority Classifier Name 208 Priority Marking Mode 203 Priority Marking Value 205 Priority Type 208 Profiles Pre configured 220 Pro
312. utes or 0 for no aging The default is 10 minutes Voice The Voice submenu enables configuring the DRAP TTL Retries parameter This parameter sets the limit of TTL retries for gateways that support the DRAP protocol before concluding that the gateway is no longer active and removing it BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 125 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 3 6 4 5 4 126 from the database The TTL retry time the maximum time between two consecutive Allocation Requests is 255 seconds The range is from 1 to 100 The default is 4 NOTE During SW download to a gateway which may take up to almost 15 minutes under worst conditions the DRAP protocol is not active If the gateway is removed from the database before SW download is completed the download process will fail During SW download the DRAP TTL Retries parameter should be set to its default value of 4 equivalent to 17 minutes Debug Stream The Debug Stream submenu enables configuring the types of messages that will be displayed during the Telnet session upon the occurrence of various events These messages are typically used for investigating various problem situations and many of them are meaningful only to Alvarion s technicians The DS Class Enable and DS Class Disable options can be used to enable or disable various classes of messages The classes of messages that can be controlled include E ERR Error messages that should
313. verity Displays all traps with Severity that differs from the default severity E Update Enables modifying the Severity of a selected trap E Restore Defaults Enables restoring the Severities of all traps to the default severities Suppression Interval The Suppression Interval is the minimum time between consecutive transmissions of the same trap This parameter can be used to prevent excessive retransmissions of the same trap The Suppression Interval menu enables viewing a list of all traps with Suppression Interval that differs from the default suppression interval updating the Suppression Interval of a selected trap and restoring the Suppression Intervals of all traps to the default value of 0 no suppression The Severity menu includes the following options E Show Traps with Modified Suppression Interval Displays all traps with Suppression Interval that differs from the default suppression interval which is O no suppression E Update Enables modifying the Suppression Interval of a selected trap The available range is from 0 to 86 400 seconds O means no suppression E Restore Defaults Enables restoring the Suppression Intervals of all traps to the default value 0 Operation Base Station Menu 4 4 4 RADIUS Managing a large number of users creates the need for significant administrative support together with careful attention to security authorization and accounting The use of RADIUS Remote Aut
314. work Filtering and from the wireless link From Wireless Filtering The Interface Filtering menu also enables viewing and resetting the Filtering Rules Counters which display for each of the applicable rules the number of frames matching the rule accumulated since the last reset In addition there is a Non Matching counter displaying the number of frames that did not match any of the relevant rules The counters will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status For each of the interfaces the configurable parameters are L2 Filtering Rules List The L2 Filtering Rules List submenu enables viewing details on the L2 Filtering Rules assigned to the interface adding Rules from the L2 Filtering Rules lists to the list of Rules assigned to the interface and deleting one or all Rules from the list It also enables viewing resetting the counter for a selected Rule The counter displays the number of frames matching the Rule accumulated since the last reset The counter will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status L3 L4 Filtering Rules List The L3 L4 Filtering Rules List submenu enables viewing details on the L3 L4 Filtering Rules assigned to the interface adding Rules from the L3 L4 Filtering Rules lists to the list of Rules assigned to the interface and deleting one or all Rules from the list It also enables viewing resetting the counter for a selected Rule Th
315. x Accounting Server 105 Authentication Server 102 Authorized Manager 125 New SU 183 ODU 135 Radio Cluster 131 Add New SU 183 Add Server Accounting 105 Authentication 102 Address 171 Admin Status Channel 151 Interface Filtering 215 ODU 136 Service 199 Subscriber 195 Trap Configuration 97 Administrator Password 114 Advanced Service Mode 187 Air Ventilation Unit 55 Alarms and Traps 96 Altitude 111 Antenna Selection 166 ARQ Enable Disable 147 Associated ODU 151 Associated Radio Cluster 135 ATPC Enable Disable 92 ATPC Parameters 92 AU Bandwidth 149 Base Station ID Parameters 147 Configuration Menu 147 Configured Action 138 Configured SU Operation 139 Configured SU SW File Name 139 Index Configured SU SW Version 139 Configured SW File Name 138 Configured SW Version 138 Default SW File Adv Si 141 Default SW File Std 140 IDU Type 139 MAC Parameters 147 Maximum Number of Voice Calls 154 Menu 138 Multirate Parameters 152 Operation Mode 139 Performance Monitoring 155 Phy Parameters 149 Reset Unit 144 Select 142 Set Factory Defaults 144 Show Summary 138 SU SW File 146 SW Download Status 138 SW File 145 SW Files in NPU 140 SW Versions Control 144 Unit Control 144 Voice Parameters 154 AU IDU Type 139 AU Service Type 155 AU Slot Menu 142 Show 142 AU Wireless Port Counters 156 AU IDU 47 Ejecting 52 Inserting 51 LEDs 48 AU ODU Connectors 37
316. y Operation NPU Menu Management Port Dest Subnet Management Port Dest Subnet Mask Management Port Status Up Down o 9 G 9 Management Port Management Traffic Enabled Disabled E Data Port Parameters and Status Data Port MAC Address Data Port IP Address Data Port Subnet Mask Data Port Gateway Data Port Management VLAN Data Port Speed Data Port Status Up Down gt 999999 9 Data Port Management Traffic Enabled Disabled HM Authorized Managers per manager details IP Address Send Traps Read Community Write Community HM Voice DRAP TTL Retries E Bridge Parameters Bridge Aging Time E SW Files and Versions Main SW File Main SW Version BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 113 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 5 2 4 5 2 1 114 Shadow SW File Shadow SW Version Running From The currently running version Main or Shadow Boot SW Version Frequency Bands File Version Unit Control The Unit Control menu of the NPU enables changing the access Passwords and the Monitor Inactivity Timeout resetting the NPU reverting the Base Station and the NPU to the factory default configuration managing the SW versions of the module and creating backup files The Unit Control menu includes the following options E Change Password E Reset E Set Factory Defaults E SW Versions Control E Create Backup E Monitor Inac
317. ycling and other forms of recovery of such wastes so as to reduce the disposal of waste It also seeks to improve the environmental performance of all operators involved in the life cycle of electrical and electronic equipment e g producers distributors and consumers and in particular those operators directly involved in the treatment of waste electrical and electronic equipment The name commonly given to the IEEE 802 16 standard Specifications for fixed broadband wireless metropolitan access networks MANs that use a point to multipoint architecture WIMAX supports very high bit rates in both uploading to and downloading from a base station up to a distance of 30 miles BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 275 Numerics 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 711 Pre Configured Profile 221 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G 729 Pre Configured Profile 220 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 711 Pre Configured Profile 220 1 POTS Basic VoIP G 729 Pre Configured Profile 220 802 1p Marking Mode 204 A Access Unit Indoor Module 47 Access VLAN 198 Accounting Activity Status 105 Add Server 105 Delete Selected Server 105 IP Address 105 Operation Status 105 Select Server 105 Server Status 105 Show All 104 Show Selected Server 105 Statistics 105 UDP Port 105 Accounting Parameters 104 Action SU SW File 169 Active Alarms Show 96 Active Rule Type 215 Active Voice Calls 139 Activity Status Accounting 105 Authentication 102 Add Inde
318. you connect to the system you must enter your username and password This information is passed to a RADIUS server which checks that the information is correct and then authorizes access to the system Radio frequency An AC signal of high enough frequency to be used for wireless communications BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual Glossary RFC RoHS RS 232 RS 422 RSA RSSI R amp TTE Request For Comments The name of the result and the process for creating a standard on the Internet New standards are proposed and published on the Internet as a Request For Comments The proposal is reviewed by the Internet Engineering Task Force Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in electrical and electronic equipment reference EC Directive 2002 95 EC of 27 January 2003 A serial interface published by the EIA Electronic Industries Association for asynchronous data communication over distances up to a few hundred feet Characterized by a single ended not differential physical layer it uses one signal wire for transmission another for reception and a common wire ground plus some timing and control signals RS 422 is a serial interface standard in which data is sent ina differential pair two wires or twisted pair cable which allows greater distances and higher data rates than non differential serial schemes such as RS 232 A public key encryption technology developed by RSA Data S
319. ytes 8 bits per byte 752 bits PPS 14 4 Kbps bit rate 288 bits 50 pps Note 288 bits 36 bytes voice payload 8 bits per byte Bandwidth per call total packet size 752bits 50 pps 37 6 Kbps As Fax BW is lower than Voice BW the Voice BW requirement mandates the CG connection s attributes This is true for all G 711 codecs B 5 5 FAX RTCP BW Calculation RTCP BW is 10 of RTP 10 of 37 6 Kbps is 3 76 Kbps B 5 6 QoS Profiles B 5 6 1 CG QoS for RTP Traffic The calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 87 2 Kbps equivalent to a Packet Size of 1744 bits or 218 bytes Thus the CG 88 QoS Profile parameters are E Packet Size 218 bytes E Sample Interval 20 msec B 5 6 2 RT QoS for RTCP and VoIP Signaling The required bandwidth is 10 72 Kbps 8 72 Kbps for Voice RTCP plus 2 Kbps for VoIP Signaling We round it up to 611 Kbps Thus the required RT 11 QoS Profile parameters are E CIR 11 Kbps E CT Short BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 259 Appendix B Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways B 5 6 3 BE QoS for Data As stated the recommended QoS Profile for Data is BE 64 with the following parameters E MIR 64 Kbps HM CT Medium 260 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual ANSI ARP ARQ ASCII ATM ATPC AU AVU BE Glossary Authentication Authorization and Accounting Pronounced triple a A system or several systems
320. ytes Discarded on Rx The number of bytes discarded when a packet received from the Ethernet port is not forwarded to the Wireless port due to bridging or classification considerations Data Bytes Transmitted The total number of data bytes transmitted to the Ethernet link Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Tx The number of bytes discarded when a packet received from the Wireless port is not forwarded to the Ethernet port due to bridging or VLAN considerations E Wireless Port Counters Data Bytes Received The total number of data bytes received from the Wireless link Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Rx The number of bytes in packets received from the Wireless link and discarded due to MAC protocol receive errors such as duplicate sequence number wrong sequence number etc not CRC errors BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 181 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 9 7 4 2 182 Data Bytes Transmitted The total number of data bytes transmitted to the Wireless link MAC Management frames and frames with errors are not included Data Bytes Discarded on Tx The number of bytes in packets discarded due to congestion in the wireless medium ARQ Enabled Bytes Transmitted The number of bytes transmitted over BE and NRT connections Applicable only if the ARQ mechanism in the AU is
321. zation reference clock from the AU IDU to the AU ODU The IF Tx and Rx frequencies are 240 MHz and 140 MHz respectively IDU ODU service channel at 14 MHz serves for bi directional control status and management signaling AU ODU HP The AU ODU HP High Power ODU is a full duplex multi carrier radio unit that connects to an external antenna It is designed to provide high system gain and interference robustness utilizing high transmit power and low noise figure Base Station Radio Configurations The 4 Channels High Power AU IDUs support the following radio configurations Single Channel per AU No Diversity This is the basic configuration where each AU IDU connects to one ODU serving a single sector with a directional antenna Multiple Channels per AU No Diversity Up to 4 channels per AU IDU can be used to cover several sectors where each channel connects to one ODU with one ODU per sector A single AU IDU can cover a 360 cell Where the coverage of the cell can be built from 3 sectors of 120 each with frequency reuse 1 or 4 sectors of 90 each with frequency reuse 1 i e frequency per sector or 1 2 i e 2 frequencies for 4 sectors where each frequency is used for 2 opposite sectors All ODUs served by the same AU IDU share a common MAC and modem Each ODU is managed separately BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 7 Chapter 1 System Description The following figure describes the multi chann

BreezeMAX BST, Ver.4.0.2 TDD - System Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents